Pioneer SUPERTUNERIIID+ AVH-P7850DVD Operation Manual
Operation Manual Multi-CD control DSP High power D VD-A/D VD-V/ VCD/CD/MP3/WM A/AAC/DivX/JPEG player with FM / AM tune r A VH-P7850D VD English
Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please rea d through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished read ing the instructio ns, k eep this man- ual in a safe place for futu re refer ence. Be sure to read this ! Playable discs 8 ! DVD video disc region numbers 8 ! When an operation is prohibited 12 Precautions IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS 6 T o ensure safe driving 6 T o avoid batter y exhaustion 7 Before Y ou Start About this unit 8 About this manual 9 F eatures 9 About WMA 10 About AAC 11 About DivX 11 T o protect the LCD screen 11 F or viewing LCD comfortably 12 What the marks on DVDs indicate 12 Resetting the microprocessor 12 F eature demo mode 13 Use and care of the remote control 13 What âÂÂs What Head unit 15 Sub-display 16 Remote control 17 Basic Operations T urning the unit on and selecting a source 21 Adjusting the volume 22 T urning the unit off 22 Using the rear display 22 T ouch panel key basic operation 23 Opening and closing the LCD panel 24 P rotecting your unit from theft 25 Built-in DVD player basic operations 26 T uner Listening to the radio 28 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 28 Introduction of advanced tuner operation 29 T uning in strong signals 29 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 29 Playing DVD discs W atching a DVD video 30 Listening to a DVD audio 31 Operating the DVD menu 32 Browsing still pictures 32 Skipping back or for ward to another title/ group 32 Resume playback (Bookmark) 33 F rame-by-frame playback 33 Slow motion playback 33 Searching for the part you want to play 33 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 34 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 34 Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) 34 Automatic playback of DVDs 35 Introduction of advanced DVD operation 35 Repeating play 35 Playing tracks in random order 36 Scanning tracks 36 Selecting audio output 36 Playing Video CDs W atching a Video CD 37 Contents En 2
PBC playback 37 F rame-by-frame playback 38 Slow motion playback 38 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time 38 Introduction of advanced Video CD operation 39 Repeating play 39 Selecting audio output 39 Playing CDs Listening to a CD 40 Selecting tracks from the track title list 40 Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs 40 Introduction of advanced CD operation 41 Repeating play 41 Playing tracks in random order 41 Scanning tracks of a CD 41 Playing MP3/WMA/AAC files Listening to MP3/WMA/AAC 42 Selecting tracks from the file name list 43 Displaying information on MP3/WMA/AAC file 43 Introduction of advanced built-in DVD player (MP3/WMA/AAC) operation 44 Repeating play 44 Playing tracks in random order 44 Scanning folders and tracks 44 Playing DivX/JPEG files W atching a DivX/JPEG 45 Viewing a JPEG slideshow 46 Playing DivXî VOD content 46 Selecting files from the file name list 47 Displaying text information on DivX/JPEG disc 47 F rame-by-frame playback 47 Slow motion playback 47 Searching for the part you want to play 47 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 48 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 48 Introduction of advanced built-in DVD player (DivX/JPEG) operation 49 Repeating play 49 Playing files in random order 49 Multi-CD Player Listening to a CD 50 P ausing CD playback 51 Selecting tracks from the track title list 51 Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs 51 Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 52 Repeating play 52 Playing tracks in random order 52 Scanning CDs and tracks 52 Using compression and bass emphasis 53 Using ITS playlists 53 Playing songs on iPod Listening to songs on your iP od 55 Browsing for a song 55 P ausing a song 56 Displaying text information on iP od 56 Displaying information on song 56 Repeating play 56 Playing songs in a random order (shuffle) 56 Bluetooth Audio Listening to songs on BT Audio (Bluetooth audio player) 57 F unction operation 58 En 3 Contents
Connecting a Bluetooth audio player 58 Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player 59 Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address 59 Bluetooth T elephone Hands-free phoning with cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology 60 Setting up for hands-free phoning 61 Basic operation of hands-free phoning 61 Introduction of advanced hands-free phoning operation 62 Connecting a cellular phone 62 Disconnecting a cellular phone 63 Registering connected cellular phone 63 Deleting a registered phone 63 Connecting to a registered cellular phone 64 Using the Phone Book 64 Using the Call Histor y 66 Using preset numbers 67 Making a call by entering phone number 67 Clearing memory 67 Setting the automatic answering 68 Setting the automatic rejecting 68 Switching the ring tone 68 Echo canceling and noise reduction 68 Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address 68 TV tuner W atching the television 69 Storing and recalling broadcast stations 69 Introduction of advanced TV tuner operation 70 Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 70 Selecting the area group 71 DVD Player Playing a disc 72 T urning the DVD player on or off 73 Selecting a disc 73 Introduction of advanced DVD player operation 74 Repeating play 74 Playing tracks in random order 74 Scanning tracks of a CD/MP3/WMA 74 Selecting audio output 75 Audio Adjustments Introduction to built-in DSP features 76 Introduction of audio adjustments 78 Using balance adjustment 78 Adjusting source levels 79 Using the direct control 79 Listening in surround sound 79 Using the dynamic range control 81 Using the down-mix function 81 Switching the sound settings 82 Switching between the multi-channel output and 2-channel output 82 Introduction of sound settings 83 Using the position selector 83 Recalling equalizer cur ves 84 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer 84 Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer 86 Setting the speaker setting 87 Using the cut-off frequency 87 Using the time alignment 89 Adjusting the speaker output levels 90 Using the auto-equalizer 91 Storing the adjusted audio settings in memor y 91 Editing the name of sound settings 92 Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) 92 Contents En 4
Setup Introduction of setup adjustments 95 Setting the AV input 95 Setting the automatic open function 96 Adjusting the LCD panel slide position 96 Setting the clock 96 Setting the video of rear display 97 Switching the dimmer setting for sub- display 97 Adjusting the contrast for the sub- display 97 Changing languages for CAUTION 97 Setting up the DVD player Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 98 Setting the subtitle language 98 Setting the audio language 98 Setting the menu language 99 Switching the assist subtitle on or off 99 Setting the angle icon display 99 Setting the aspect ratio 99 Setting the parental lock 100 Setting the still picture 101 T o play back bonus groups 101 Displaying your DivXî VOD registration code 101 Setting remote control code type 101 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 102 Setting the FM tuning step 102 Setting the AM tuning step 102 Switching the warning tone 102 Switching the auxiliary setting 103 Correcting distorted sound 103 Switching the sound muting/ attenuation 103 Switching the automatic disc playback 103 Resetting the audio functions 104 Switching the DSP setting mode 104 Setting the optical input 104 Setting the TV signal 104 Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection 105 Setting the security indicator 105 Other F unctions Switching the display on the sub- display 106 Adjusting the screen 106 Selecting the background display 108 Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch P anel Calibration) 108 Using the AUX source 109 Using the PGM button 109 Additional Information T roubleshoo ting 110 Error messages 112 Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages 113 DVD player and care 114 DVD discs 114 CD-R/CD-RW discs 114 Dual Discs 115 MP3, WMA and AAC files 115 About folders and MP3/WMA/AAC files 117 JPEG picture files 117 DivX video files 118 Using the display correctly 118 Language code chart for DVD 120 DSP adjustment value record sheet 121 T erms 123 Specifications 127 Index 129 En 5 Contents
IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS Please read all of these instructions regarding your display and retain them for future refer- ence. 1 Read this manual fully and carefully be- fore operating your display . 2 Keep this manual handy as a refer ence for operating procedures and safety informa- tion. 3 Pay close attention to all warnings in this manual and follow the instructions care- fully . 4 Do not allow other persons to use this sys- tem until they have read and understood the operating instructions. 5 Do not install the display where it may (i) obstruct the driver âÂÂs vision, (ii) impair the performance of any of the vehicle âÂÂs oper- ating systems or safety features, includ- ing air bags, hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the driver âÂÂs ability to safely oper- ate the vehicle. 6 Do not operate this display if doing so in any way will divert your attention from the safe operation of your vehicle. Always observe safe driving rules and follow all existing traffic regulations. If you experi- ence difficulty in operating the system or reading the display , park your vehicle in a safe location and make necessary adjust- ments. 7 Please remember to wear your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled. 8 Never use headphones while driving. 9 T o promote safety , certain functions are disabled unless the parking brake is on, and the vehicle is not in motion. 10 Never set the volume of your display so high that you cannot hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles. WARNING ! Do not attempt to install or service your display by yourself. Installation or servi- cing of the display by persons without training and experience in electronic equipment and automotive accessories may be dangerous and could expose you to the risk of electric shock or other hazards. T o ensur e safe driving WARNING ! LIGHT GREEN LEAD A T POWER CON- NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT P ARKED ST A TUS AND MUST BE CON- NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPL Y SIDE OF THE P ARKING BRAKE SWIT CH. IM- PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MA Y VIOLA TE APPLICABLE LAW AND MA Y RESUL T IN SERIOUS IN- JURY OR DAMAGE. ! T o avoid the risk of damage and injur y and the potential violation of applicable laws, this unit is not for use with a video screen that is visible to the driver . ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, the front DVD or TV (sold separately) feature should never be used while the vehicle is being driven. Also, rear displays should not be in a location where it is a visible distraction to the driver . ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply , they must be obeyed and this unit âÂÂs DVD features should not be used. Precautions En 6 Section 01
When you attempt to watch a DVD, Video CD or TV while driving, the warning Viewing of front seat video source while driving is strictly prohibited. will appear on the front display . T o watch a DVD, Video CD or TV on the front display , park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake. When using a display connected to REAR DISPLA Y OUT This unit âÂÂs REAR DISPLA Y OUT is for connec- tion of a display to enable passengers in the rear seats to watch the DVD or TV . WARNING NEVER install the rear display in a location that enables the driver to watch the DVD or TV while driving. T o avoid battery exhaustion Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using this unit. Using this unit without running the engine can result in batter y drainage. ! When no power is supplied to this unit be- cause of a replacement of the vehicle bat- ter y or for some similar reason, the microcomputer of this unit is returned to its initial condition except audio settings. Although audio adjustment information is stored in this unit for several hours, we re- commend that you transcribe the data. Y ou can fill the data in the sheet on 121. WARNING Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an ACC position. Precautions En 7 Section 01 Precautions
About this unit CAUTION ! Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. Also, this unit damage, smoke, and overheat could result from contact with liquids. ! â CLASS 1 L ASER PRODUCTâ This product contains a laser diode of higher class than 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain ac- cess to the inside of the product. Refer all ser- vicing to qualified personnel. ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for op- erating procedures and precautions. ! Always keep the volume low enough so that you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle. ! P rotect this unit from moisture. ! If the batter y is disconnected or discharged, the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed. ! If this unit does not operate properly , contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer Ser- vice Station. Playable discs DVD, Video CD and CD discs that display the logos shown below can be played back on this player . DVD audio DVD video Video CD CD Notes ! is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Li- censing Corporation. ! This player can only play back discs bearing the marks shown above. DVD video disc r egion numbers DVD video discs that have incompatible region numbers cannot be played on this player . The region number of the player can be found on the bottom of this unit. Before Y ou Start En 8 Section 02
The illustration below shows the regions and corresponding region numbers. About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and op- eration. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanator y . This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit âÂÂs potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. W e recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and obser ve WARNINGs and CAU- TION s in this manual. Features T ouch panel key operation It is possible to operate this unit by using touch panel key . DVD audio playback It is possible to play back DVD audio. DVD video playback It is possible to play back DVD video and DVD - R/RW (video mode). Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). CD playback Music CD/CD-R/RW playback is possible. MP3 file playback Y ou can play back MP3 files recorded on CD- R/RW/ROM and DVD -R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). ! Supply of this product only conveys a li- cense for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-generating) real time broad- casting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other net- works or in other electronic content distri- bution systems, such as pay-audio or audio- on-demand applications. An inde- pendent license for such use is required. F or details, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com. WMA file playback Y ou can play back WMA files recorded on CD- R/RW/ROM and DVD -R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). AAC file playback Y ou can play back AAC files recorded on CD - R/RW/ROM and DVD -R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). DivX î video file playback Y ou can play back DivX video files recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM. JPEG picture file playback Y ou can play back JPEG picture files recorded on CD -R/RW/ROM. Before Y ou Start En 9 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
NTSC/P AL compatibility This unit is NTSC/P AL system compatible. When connecting other components to this unit, be sure components are compatible with the same video system other wise images will not be correctly reproduced. Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES compatibility Y ou can enjoy the atmosphere and excitement provided by DVD movie and music software featuring 5.1 channel recordings. ! Manufactured under license from Dolby La- boratories. âÂÂDolby âÂÂ, âÂÂPro Logic âÂÂ, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ! â DTSâ , â DTS-ESâ , â Neo:6 â , and â DTS 96/24â are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Multi-aspect Switching between wide screen, letterbox and panscan display is possible. Multi-audio Y ou can switch between multiple audio sys- tems recorded on a DVD as desired. Multi-subtitle Y ou can switch between multiple subtitle lan- guages recorded on a DVD as desired. Multi-angle Y ou can switch between multiple viewing an- gles of a scene recorded on a DVD as desired. Hands-free phoning Using Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD -BTB100), this unit realizes effortless hands-fre e phoning with Bluetooth wireless technology. ! In some countries, CD -BTB100 is not sold on the market. Bluetooth audio player compatibility Using Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD -BTB100), you can control Bluetooth audio player featur- ing Bluetooth wireless technology. ! In some countries, CD -BTB100 is not sold on the market. iPod î compatibility When you use this unit with a P ioneer iP od adapter (CD -IB100II) (sold separately), you can control an iP od with Dock Connector . ! iP od is a trademark of Apple Computer , Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun- tries. Note This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual prop- erty rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. About WMA Before Y ou Start En 10 Section 02
The Windows Media ⢠logo printed on the box indicates that this unit can play back WMA data. WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsof t Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . ! Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Mi- crosoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Notes ! This unit may not operate correctly depending on the application used to encode WMA files. ! Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of WMA files encoded with image data. About AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4. Several applications can be used to encode AAC files, but file formats and extensions dif- fer depending on the application which is used to encode. This unit plays back AAC files encoded by iT unes î version 4.6 . ! iT unes is a trademark of Apple Computer , Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. About DivX DivX is a compressed digital video format cre- ated by the DivX î video codec from DivX, Inc. This unit can play DivX video files recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD video, individual DivX video files are called âÂÂTitles âÂÂ. When naming files/titles on a CD -R/RW or a DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabeti- cal order . Official DivX î Certified product Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with standard playback of DivX î media files ! DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. T o protect the LCD screen ! Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the display when this unit is not being used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in LCD screen malfunction due to the resulting high temperatures. ! When using a cellular phone, keep the an- tenna of the cellular phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. ! Never touch the screen with anything be- sides your finger when operating the touch panel function. The screen can scratch easily . Before Y ou Start En 11 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
For viewing LCD comfortably Due to its construction, the viewing angle of the LCD screen is limited. Y ou can adjust it by changing either screen size or picture adjust- ment. Changing the wide screen size By changing the screen size from 4:3 to 16:9, you can adjust the screen so that the screen can fit to the video image you are playing. F or details concerning operation, refer to Changing the wide scr een mode on page 106. Changing the picture adjustm ent Y ou can make the best adjustment to the pic- ture display by changing BRIGHT, CONTRAST , COLOR and HUE . Y ou can also dim or enlight the overall picture image using DIMMER. F or details concerning operation, refer to Changing the picture adjustment on page 106. What the marks on DVDs indicate The marks below may be found on DVD disc labels and packages. They indicate the type of images and audio recorded on the disc, and the functions you can use. Mark Meaning 2 Indicates the number of audio sys- tems. 2 Indicates the number of subtitle lan- guages. 3 Indicates the number of viewing an- gles. Mark Meaning 16 : 9 LB Indicates the picture size (aspect ratio: screen width-to -height ratio) type. 2 3 4 ALL Indicates the number of the region where playback is possible. When an operation is prohibited When you are watching a DVD and attempt to per form an operation, it may not be per formed because of the programming on the disc. When this happens, the icon appears on the screen. ! The icon may not appear with certain discs. Resetting the micropr ocessor P ressing RESET lets you reset the micropro- cessor to its initial settings without changing the bookmark information. The microprocessor must be reset under the following conditions: ! P rior to using this unit for the first time after installation ! If the unit fails to operate properly ! When strange or incorrect messages ap- pear on the display Important If you press RESET, all memorized settings are erased. F or this reason, we recommend that you record the settings in the sheet on page 121 after you have completed audio adjustments. 1 T ur n the ignition switch OFF . Before Y ou Start En 12 Section 02
2 Press RESET with a pen tip or other pointed instrument. RESET button Note After completing connections or when you want to erase all memorized settings or return the unit to its initial (factor y) settings, switch your engine ON or set the ignition switch to ACC ON before pressing RESET. Feature demo mode The feature demo automatically starts when you select the source OFF. The demo con- tinues while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. T o cancel the feature demo, press and hold SOUND SETTING. T o restart the feature demo, press and hold SOUND SETTING again. Remember that if the feature demo continues operating when the car engine is turned off , it may drain batter y power . Important The red lead (ACC) of this unit should be con- nected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch on/off operations. If this is not done, the vehicle batter y may be drained. Use and care of the remote control Installing the battery Slide the tray out on the back of the remote control and insert the batter y with the plus ( ) and minus ( âÂÂ) poles pointing in the proper di- rection. ! When using for the first time, pull out the film protruding from the tray . WARNING Keep the battery out of the reach of children. Should the batter y be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor . CAUTION ! Use only one CR2025 (3 V) lithium batter y . ! Remove the batter y if the remote control is not used for a month or longer . ! Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or dispose of the batter y in fire. ! Do not handle the batter y with metallic tools. ! Do not store the batter y with metallic materi- als. ! In the event of batter y leakage, wipe the re- mote control completely clean and install a new batter y . ! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or en- vironmental public institutions â rules that apply in your countr y/area. Using the remote control P oint the remote control in the direction of the front panel to operate. Before Y ou Start En 13 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
! The remote control may not function prop- erly in direct sunlight. Important ! Do not store the remote control in high tem- peratures or direct sunlight. ! Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor , where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. Before Y ou Start En 14 Section 02
Head unit 1 DISPLA Y button P ress to turn the information display on or off when the video is displayed. 2 PGM button P ress to operate the preprogrammed func- tions for each source. (Refer to Using the PGM button on page 109.) 3 FLIP DOWN button P ress to turn the LCD panel horizontal tem- porarily from upright position. 4 Ambient light sensor Senses ambient light. This system automati- cally adjusts the brightness of the display to compensate for ambient light. 5 OPEN/CLOSE button P ress to open or close the LCD panel. 6 BAND/ESC button P ress to select among three FM bands and to cancel the control mode of functions. 7 A TT button P ress to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. Press once more to return to the original volume level. 8 Joystick Move to per form manual seek tuning, fast forward, reverse and track search controls. Also used for controlling functions. 9 EJECT button P ress to eject a disc from this unit. P ress and hold to open or close the front panel. a RESET button P ress to return to the factor y settings (initial settings). 1 1 1 2 2 2 8 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 9 a b c d e h h h g g g f What â s Wha t En 15 Section 03 What â s What
b SOUND SETTING button P ress to select the sound setting. c REAR ON button P ress to switch between the video sources (such as DVD or AV ) on rear display . d 2ch/MUL TI-CH button P ress to switch between the multi-channel output and 2-channel output. P ress and hold to switch between the dis- plays on the sub-display . e SOURCE button, VOLUME This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all the available sources. Rotate it to increase or decrease the vo - lume. f V .ADJUST button P ress to display the picture adjustment menu. g ENTERT AINMENT button P ress to display the entertainment menu. h WIDE button P ress to select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one. Sub-display 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 1 Source display Shows the status of selected source. 2 Stereo ( 5) indicator Shows when the selected frequency is being broadcast in stereo. 3 V olume level indicator Shows the value of current volume level. 4 RDM indicator Shows when random play is turned on. 5 RPT indicator Shows when repeat play is turned on. 6 Sound setting indicator Shows what the sound setting has been se- lected. 7 Output setting indicator Shows what the output setting has been selected. What â s Wha t En 16 Section 03
Remote control Button names AV H mode DVD mode with remote control code AVH 1 Remote control selection switch Switch to change the setting of the remot e control. For details, refer to Setting re mote con- trol code type on page 101. 2 SOURCE button P ress to cycle through all the available sour ces. Press and hold to turn the source off . 3A T T button P ress to quickly lower the volume level, by ab out 90%. Press once more to return to the ori- ginal volume level. 4 VOLUME but- tons P ress to increase or decrease the volume. 5 AUDIO button P ress to change the audio langua ge during DVD playback. SUBTITLE but- ton P ress to change the subtitle langua ge during DVD playback. ANGLE button P ress to change the viewing angle during DVD playback. 2 2 2 l l l h h h j j j g g g 1 1 1 m m m k k k i i i d d d c c c e e e f f f 7 a a a b b b 9 9 9 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 8 8 8 What â s Wha t En 17 Section 03 What â s What
Button names AV H mode DVD mode with remote control code AVH 6 2ch/MUL TI-CH button P ress to switch between the multi-cha nnel output and 2-channel output. 7 RETURN button P ress to display the PBC (playback control) menu during PBC playback. 8 Dolby/DTS P ress to switch between surround soun d setting (Dolby P ro Logic II or DTS Neo:6). 9 a /b button ( TIL T/DISC ) P ress to adjust the LCD panel angle. Not used. 10 Remote control operation mode switch Switch the operation mode between AV H, DVD and TV modes . Normall y , set to AV H .F o r details, refer to Using the re mote control operation mode switch on the next page. 11 BOOKMARK button P ress to operate the preprogrammed functions for each source. (Refer to Using the PGM button on page 109.) P ress to turn the bookmark functio n on or off . For details, refer to Resume play- back (Bookmark) on page 33. 12 REAR SOURCE button P ress to switch between the video sources (such as DVD or AV ) on rear display. 13 DISPLA Y but- ton P ress to turn the information display on or off when the video is displayed. 14 EJECT button P ress to eject a disc from this unit. P ress and hold to bookmark a disc at the point you want to bookmark. Not used. 15 0 âÂÂ10 buttons, CLEAR button P ress 0 âÂÂ10 to input numbers. Button s 1 âÂÂ6 ca n operate the preset tuning for the tuner or disc changing for DVD player or multi- CD player . P ress CLEAR to clear the input numbe rs. P ress to select a menu item on the Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). 16 BACK button P ress to return to the previous display. Not used. 17 BAND/ESC but- ton P ress to select among three FM bands and to cancel the control mode of functions. P ress to switch between media file types . (Refer to Swi tching the media file type on page 27.) P ress to switch between media file types. (Refer to Switchi ng the media file type on page 27.) What â s Wha t En 18 Section 03
Button names AV H mode DVD mode with remote control code AVH 18 PLA Y/P AUSE ( f) button P ress to switch sequentially betwee n playback and pause. REVERSE ( m) button P ress to per form fast reverse. FORW ARD ( n) button P ress to per form fast for ward. PREVIOUS ( o) button P ress to return to the previous track (chapter). NEXT ( p) button P ress to go to the next track (chapter). STEP ( r/ q) button P ress to move ahead one frame at a time during DVD/VideoCD playback . P ress and hold for one second to activate slow playback . STOP ( g) but- ton P ress to stop playback. 19 AUTO PLA Y button P ress to turn the DVD auto -playback function on or off . 20 a /b button ( FOLDER) P ress to select the next/previou s folder . 21 Joystick Move to do fast for ward, reverse and track search controls. Click to recall AUDIO MEN U. Move to select a menu on the DVD menu. 22 MENU button P ress to display the DVD menu during DVD playback . TOP MENU button P ress to return to the top menu durin g DVD playback . Using the remote control operation mode switch There are three remote control operation modes on the remote control. AV H mode operation When operating this unit by remote control, the mode is normally switched to AV H . ! The joystick on the remote control can per- form the same operations as the one on the head unit. F urthermore, the joystick can per form the same operations as the touch panel keys a, b, c and d. What â s Wha t En 19 Section 03 What â s What
! 1 âÂÂ6 can per form the same operations as the preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 and the disc selection keys 01 âÂÂ06. â If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12 by using buttons 1 âÂÂ6 , press and hold the corresponding numbers, such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number ap- pears in the display . DVD mode operation If you switch the mode to DVD, the joystick and 0 âÂÂ10 operations are changed for DVD player . % When you want to operate the follow- ing functions, switch the mode to DVD: ! When operating the DVD menu by using the joystick. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 32.) ! When browsing still pictures by using the joystick. (Refer to Browsing still pictures on page 32.) ! When operating the PBC menu by using 0 âÂÂ10 . (Refer to Watching a V ideo CD on page 37.) TV mode operation TV operations available with a Pioneer TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P5750TV) can be controled with AV H mode. TV mode is not used with this unit. ! F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manuals. % When you want to operate the follow- ing functions only on the rear display , switch the mode to TV: ! When per forming manual or seek tuning by moving the joystick left or right. ! When recalling preset stations by moving the joystick up or down. What â s Wha t En 20 Section 03
T urning the unit on and selecting a source 1 1 1 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. Y ou can select a source you want to listen to. If DVD DISC AUTO is turned on, load a disc in the unit to switch to DVD (refer to Switching the automatic disc playback on page 103). % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. The source names are displayed and select- able ones are highlighted. ! DVD â Built-in DVD player ! S-DVD â DVD player/multi-DVD player ! M-CD â Multi-CD player ! FM â FM tuner ! AM â AM tuner ! TV â T elevision ! AV 1 â AV 1 input ! AV 2 â AV 2 input ! EXT1 â External unit 1 ! EXT2 â External unit 2 ! AUX1 â AUX 1 ! AUX2 â AUX 2 ! iPod â iP od ! T elephone â BT telephone ! BT AUDIO â Bluetooth audio player ! OFF â T urn the unit off # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # While operating the menu, you cannot select a source by touching the source icon. # T o close source select menu, touch ESC. % When using the button, press SOURCE to select a source. P ress SOURCE repeatedly to switch between the following sources: FM (FM tuner) âÂÂAM (AM tuner) âÂÂTV (televi- sion) â AV 1 (A V 1 input) â AV 2 (AV 2 input) â DVD (built-in DVD player) âÂÂS-DVD (DVD player/multi-DVD player) â M-CD (multi-CD player) â iPod (iP od) â EXT1 (external unit 1) â EXT2 (external unit 2) âÂÂAUX1 (AUX 1) â AUX2 (AUX 2) âÂÂT elephone (bluetooth tele- phone) â BT AUDIO (bluetooth audio player) Notes ! In the following cases, the sound source will not change: â When there is no unit corresponding to the selected source connected to this unit. â When there is no disc in the unit. â When there is no disc in the DVD player . â When there is no magazine in the multi- CD player . â When the AUX (auxiliary input) is set to off (refer to page 103). â When the AV (AV input) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 95). ! External unit refers to a P ioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions by this unit. T wo external units can be controlled by this unit. When two exter- nal units are connected, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this unit. ! When this unit âÂÂs blue/white lead is connected to the vehicle âÂÂs auto-antenna relay control terminal, the vehicle âÂÂs antenna extends when this unit âÂÂs source is turned on. T o retract the antenna, turn the source off . Basic Operation s En 21 Section 04 Basic Operations
Adjusting the volume % Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. With the head unit, rotate VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. With the remote control, press VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. T urning the unit off % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch OFF. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. % When using the button, press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. Using the rear display Y ou can watch the video sources (such as DVD or AV ) on rear display independently of front display. ! T o watch a DVD/Video CD on the rear dis- play only, switch the operation mode on the remote control to DVD. And you can oper- ate the DVD/Video CD playback on the rear display independently by the remote con- trol. (Refer to page 19.) CAUTION When you have turned the rear display output on by pressing REAR ON, you cannot turn it off even if you press SOURCE and hold. In this case, press REAR ON and hold to turn the rear display output off . % Press REAR ON to select the video source on the rear display . P ress REAR ON repeatedly to switch between the following video sources: F . SOURCE (same source as the front display) â DVD (built-in DVD player)â AV 1 (AV 1 input) â AV 2 (A V 2 input) Rear display output is turned on and the illu- mination color of REAR ON changes to a dif- ferent color from the other buttons. # Y ou can also per form this operation by press- ing REAR SOURCE on the remote control. # T o turn the rear display output off , press REAR ON and hold. # When selecting F . SOURCE , when the selected source is an audio source, nothing is displayed on rear display . # When you watch DVD (built-in DVD player) on both the front and the rear display , audio is not outputted from REAR DISPLA Y OUT . # When selecting FRONT in REAR MODE, you can select F . SOURCE only . And audio is not out- putted from REAR DISPLA Y OUT . (Refer to Set- ting the video of rear display on page 97.) Note In the following cases, the sound source will not change: ! When there is no disc in the unit. ! When the A V (AV input) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 95). Basic Operation s En 22 Section 04
T ouch panel key basic operation Activating the touch panel keys 2 1 1 1 1 TIL T ( / ) keys T ouch to adjust the LCD panel angle. 2 T ouch panel keys T ouch to do various operations. 1 T ouch the screen to activate the touch panel keys corresponding to each source. The touch panel keys appear on the display . # T o go to the next group of touch panel keys, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of touch panel keys, touch PREV. 2 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically when selecting video sources. Operating the menu 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 1 FUNCTION key T ouch to select functions for each source. 2 AUDIO key T ouch to select various sound quality con- trols. 3 SETUP key T ouch to select various setup functions. 4 DVD SETUP key T ouch to select various DVD setup func- tions. ! DVD SETUP appears on the display only when DVD is played back on this unit. 5 ESC key T ouch to cancel the control mode of func- tions. 6 BACK key T ouch to return to the previous display. 1 T ouch AV MENU to display AUDIO MENU. AUDIO MENU appears on the display . # When AV MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the desired key to display the function names you want to operate. Basic Operation s En 23 Section 04 Basic Operations
3 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. Operating the menu by using the joystick Y ou can also per form most of the menu items by using the joystick. ! Switch the remote control operation mode to AV H to operate the menu by using the joystick on the remote contro l. (Refer to page 19.) 1 Click the joystick during display of each source to display AUDIO MENU. AUDIO MENU appears on the display . 2 Move the joystick left or right to dis- play the function names you want to oper - ate. 3 Move the joystick to select the desired function. 4 Press BAND/ESC to return to the display of each source. # Y ou can return to the previous display by pressing BACK. Opening and closing the LCD panel The LCD panel will be opened or closed auto- matically with the turning of the ignition switch on or off . Y ou can turn off the automatic close/open function. (Refer to page 96.) ! The automatic close/open function will op- erate the display as follows. â When the ignition switch is turned OFF while the LCD panel is opened, the LCD panel will close aft er six seconds. â When the ignition switch is turned ON again (or turned to ACC), the LCD panel will be opened automatically . â Removing or attaching the front panel will automatically close or open the LCD panel. (Refer to the next page.) ! When the ignition switch is turned OFF after the LCD panel has been closed, turn- ing the ignition switch ON again (or turning it to ACC) will not open the LCD panel. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE to open the LCD panel. ! When closing the LCD panel, check to make sure that it has closed completely . If the LCD panel has stopped halfwa y, leaving it like this could result in damage. CAUTION Keep hands and fingers clear of the unit when opening, closing, or adjusting the LCD panel. Be especially cautious of children âÂÂs hands and fin- gers. % Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the LCD panel. # T o close the LCD panel, press OPEN/CLOSE again. Adjusting the LCD panel angle Important ! If you can hear the LCD panel knocking against your vehicle âÂÂs console or dashboard, touch TIL T ( ) to move the LCD panel a little forward. ! When adjusting the LCD panel angle, be sure to touch TIL T ( / ). F orcibly adjusting the LCD panel by hand may damage it. % T ouch TIL T ( / ) to adjust the LCD panel to an easily viewable angle. The LCD panel angle continues changing as long as you touch TIL T ( / ) and hold. Basic Operation s En 24 Section 04
# The adjusted LCD panel angle will be memor- ized and automatically returned to the next time the LCD panel is opened. T ur ning the LCD pane l horizont al When the LCD panel is upright and it hinders the operation of the air conditioner , the panel can be turned horizontal temporarily. % Press FLIP DOWN to turn the LCD panel horizontal. # T o return to original position, press FLIP DOWN again. # The LCD panel returns to the original position automatically with beeping sound 10 seconds after operation. Protecting your unit from theft The front panel can be detached from the head unit and stored in the provided protective case to prevent thef t. ! If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turni ng off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. ! Y ou can turn off the warning tone. See Switching the warnin g tone on page 102. ! Y ou can turn off the security indicator . See Setting the security indicator on page 105. Important ! Never use force or grip the display and the buttons too tightly when removing or attach- ing. ! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks. ! Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. ! If removed, replace the front panel on the unit before starting up your vehicle. Removing the front panel 1 Press and hold EJECT to open the front panel. 2 Gently grip the right side of the front panel and slowly pull it outward. T ake care not to grip it too tightly or to drop the front panel and protect it from contact with water or other fluids to prevent perma- nent damage. 3 Put the front panel into provided pro- tective case for safe keeping. Attaching the fr ont panel 1 Make sure the inner cover is closed. Basic Operation s En 25 Section 04 Basic Operations
2 Align the top of the front panel to the unit. 3 Press the bottom of the front panel until it is clicked. Note In the following cases, remove the front panel and then attach it again: ! When nothing appears in the sub-display . ! When beep sounds. Built-in DVD player basic operations Playing a disc 1 Press EJECT to open the front panel. Disc loading slot appears. # When a disc is loaded in this unit, touch the source icon and then touch DVD to select DVD . 2 Insert a disc into the disc loading slot. F ront panel is closed automatically , and play- back will start. Disc loading slot # When DVD DISC AUTO is off , touch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the built-in DVD player (refer to page 21). # If you are playing a DVD or Video CD, a menu may appear . Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 32 and PBC playback on page 37. # When the automatic playback function is on, this unit will cancel the DVD menu and automati- cally start playback from the first chapter of the first title. Refer to Automatic playback of DVDs on page 35. # Y ou can eject a disc by pressing EJECT . Notes ! The DVD player plays one, standard, 12-cm or 8-cm (single) disc at a time. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm discs. ! Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot. Discs which can be played back are listed on Playable discs on page 8. ! If bookmark function is on, DVD playback re- sumes from the selected point. For more de- tails, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 33. ! If a disc contains a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3, you can switch between media file types to play . Refer to Switching the media file type on the next page. ! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play , check that the label side of the disc is up. P ress EJECT to eject the disc, and check the disc for damage before inserting it again. Basic Operation s En 26 Section 04
! There is sometimes a delay between starting up disc playback and the sound being issued. When being read, FORMA T READ is dis- played. ! When the disc loading or ejecting function does not operate properly , you can eject the disc by pressing and holding EJECT while opening the front panel. ! If an error message such as ERROR-02 is dis- played, refer to Error messages on page 112. Basic playback controls The table below shows the basic controls for playing discs. The following chapters cover other playback features in more details. Key What it does f Starts playback, pauses a disc that â s playing or restarts a paused disc. g Stops playback. o Skips to the start of the curr ent track, chapter or file, then to previous tracks/chapte rs/files. ! P er forms fast reverse by touching and holding o. p Skips to the next track, chapter or file. ! P er- forms fast for ward by touching and holding p. Notes ! Y ou can also per form fast for ward or reverse by pressing and holding m or n on the re- mote control. ! Y ou may find with some DVD or video CD discs that some playback controls do not work in certain parts of the disc. This is not a mal- function. Switching the media file type When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3, you can switch between media file types to play. ! This unit allows playback of the following media file type recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM discs. â Audio data (CD-DA) â Compressed audio (MP3/WMA/AAC) files â DivX video files â JPEG picture files ! In case of DVD -R/RW /ROM, this unit does not allow playback of audio data (CD-DA) or JPEG picture files. % T ouch MEDIA to switch between media file types. T ouch MEDIA repeatedly to switch between the following media file types: CD (audio data (CD -DA)) âÂÂROM-Audio (MP3/ WMA/AAC files) â DivX (DivX video files) â JPEG (JPEG picture files) Basic Operation s En 27 Section 04 Basic Operations
Listening to the radio 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 6 6 6 2 2 2 5 5 5 These are the basic steps necessar y to operate the radio. More advanced tuner operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Source name Shows the selected source name. 3 Band indicator Shows to which band the radio is tuned when FM is selected as the source. 4 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 5 Frequency indicator Shows the frequency to which the tuner is tuned. 6 Preset list display Shows the preset list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch FM or AM to select the tuner . 2 T ouch BAND to select a band when FM is selected as the source. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired band is displayed, BAND 1, BAND 2 or BAND 3. 3 T o perform manual tuning, briefly touch c or d. The frequencies move up or down step by step. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by mov- ing the joystick left or right. 4 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip stations. Seek tuning starts as soon as you re- lease the key . # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by holding the joystick lef t or right. Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 you can easily store up to six broad- cast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a key . % When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory keep touching one of preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 until the beep sounds. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memor y. The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key the radio station frequency is recalled from memor y . # When P1 âÂÂP6 are not displayed, you can dis- play them by touching LIST . Notes ! Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the three FM bands, and six AM stations can be stored in memor y . ! Y ou can also use a and b to recall radio sta- tion frequencies assigned to preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 when P1 âÂÂP6 are not dis- played. T uner En 28 Section 05
Introduction of advanced tuner operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the frequency display . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . T uning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. % T ouch LOCAL on the function menu to set the sensitivity . T ouch LOCAL repeatedly until the desired level of sensitivity appears in the display . There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for AM: FM: OFF âÂÂLEVEL1 âÂÂLEVEL2 âÂÂLEVEL3 â LEVEL4 AM: OFF â LEVEL1 â LEVEL2 The LEVEL4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memor y) lets you automa- tically store the six strongest broadcast fre- quencies under preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 and once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a key . % T ouch BSM on the function menu to turn BSM on. BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 in order of their signal strength. When finished, BSM stops flashing. # T o cancel the storage process, touch BSM again. Note Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may re- place broadcast frequencies you have saved using P1 âÂÂP6 . T uner En 29 Section 05 T uner
W atchi ng a DVD video 1 1 1 4 4 4 5 5 5 2 2 6 6 6 3 3 3 7 8 8 8 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a DVD video with your DVD player . More ad- vanced DVD video operation is explained start- ing on page 35. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 DVD-V indicator Shows when a DVD video is playing. 3 Title number indicator Shows the title currently playing. 4 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent chapter . 6 Viewing angle indicator Shows which viewing angle has been se- lected. 7 Subtitle language indicator Shows which subtitle language has been selected. 8 Audio language indicator Shows which audio language has been se- lected. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit. (Refer to page 26.) # With some discs, a menu may be displayed. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 32.) 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another chapter , touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next chapter . T ouching o once skips to the start of the current chapter . T ouching it again will skip to the previous chapter . # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another chapter by moving the joystick lef t or right. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. If you keep touching o or p for five sec- onds, the icon m or n changes into rever- sal indication. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you re- lease o or p. T o resume playback at a de- sired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. # F ast for ward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Notes ! Y ou can display the repeat range selected cur- rently by touching INFO. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden auto - matically . Playing DVD discs En 30 Section 06
Listening to a DVD audio 1 1 1 4 4 4 5 5 5 2 2 6 6 6 3 3 3 7 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a DVD audio with your DVD player . More ad- vanced DVD audio operation is explained starting on page 35. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 DVD-A indicator Shows when a DVD audio is playing. 3 Group number indicator Shows the group currently playing. 4 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 6 Sampling frequency and number of quantization bits indicator Shows the sampling frequency and number of quantization bits of the current track. 7 Audio system indicator Shows which audio system has been se- lected. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit. (Refer to page 26.) # With some discs, a menu may be displayed. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on the next page.) 2 T ouch KEY to display the touch panel keys. # When KEY is not displayed, you can display the touch panel keys by touching the screen. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick lef t or right. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. If you keep touching o or p for five sec- onds, the icon m or n changes into rever- sal indication. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you re- lease o or p. T o resume playback at a de- sired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. # F ast for ward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Notes ! Y ou can display the repeat range selected cur- rently by touching INFO. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden auto - matically . Playing DVD discs En 31 Section 06 Playing DVD discs
Operating the DVD menu Some DVDs allow you to select from the disc contents using a menu. ! Y ou can display the menu by touching MENU or TOP MENU while a disc is play- ing. T ouching either of these keys again lets you start playback from the location se- lected from the menu. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. Using DVD menu direct touch control This function allows you to operate the DVD menu by touching the menu item directly . % T ouch the desired menu item on the DVD menu directly . # Depending on the contents of DVD discs, this function may not work properly . In this case, using touch panel keys operate the DVD menu. Using the touch panel keys 1 T ouch to display touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu. # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. 2 T ouch , , or to select the desired menu item. 3 T ouch ENT. Playback starts from the selected menu item. # If you switch the remote control operation mode to DVD , the joystick on the remote control can also operate the DVD menu. (Refer to page 19.) # Y ou cannot operate the DVD menu from the joystick on the head unit. # The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc. Browsing still pictures Y ou can browse still pictures recorded on the disc during DVD audio playback. ! Y ou cannot operate Slideshow . (Refer to Sli- deshow on page 126.) 1 T ouch BROWSE to browse still pictures during playback. 2 T ouch P AGE â or P AGE to switch still pictures. T ouching P AGE goes to the next still picture. T ouching P AGE â returns to the previous still picture. # T o return to the initial still picture, touch HOME . # If you switch the remote control operation mode to DVD , the joystick on the remote control can also browse still pictures. (Refer to page 19.) # Y ou cannot browse still pictures from the joy- stick on the head unit. Skipping back or forward to another title/group % T o skip back or forward to another title/group, touch a or b. T ouching a skips to the start of the next title/ group. T ouching b skips to the start of the pre- vious title/group . Title/group numbers are displayed for eight seconds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another title/group by moving the joystick up or down. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . Playing DVD discs En 32 Section 06
Resume playback (Bookmark) When playing DVD video discs, you can use this function. The Bookmark function lets you resume play- back from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded. ! One bookmark point can be stored for each disc holder independently. % During playback, touch BOOKMARK at the point you want to resume playback next time. The selected scene will be bookmarked so that playback resumes from that point next time. Y ou can bookmark up to six discs. Af ter that, the oldest bookmark is replaced by the new one. # T o clear the bookmark on a disc, keep touch- ing BOOKMARK during playback. # If you switch the remote control operation mode to DVD , you can also bookmark a disc using BOOKMARK on the remote control. (Refer to page 19.) Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % T ouch during playback. Each time you touch , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . # With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. % Keep touching until is displayed during playback. The icon is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # Y ou can adjust playback speed by pressing q or r on the remote control during slow mo- tion playback. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . # T o return to normal playback, touch f . Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi- ble. Searching for the part you want to play Y ou can use the search function to find the part you want to play . F or DVD video, you can select TITLE (title), CHAPT (chapter), TIME (time) or 10KEY (nu- meric keypad). F or DVD audio, you can select GROUP (group), TRACK (track) or 10KEY (numeric keypad). ! Chapter search, track search and time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH/10key. 2 T ouch the desired search option (e.g., CHAPT). 3 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. Playing DVD discs En 33 Section 06 Playing DVD discs
# Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . # In the time search function, to select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7, 1, 0 and 0 in that order . 4 T ouch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected part. Note With discs featuring a menu, you can also touch MENU or TOP MENU and then make selections from the displayed menu. Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) DVDs can provide audio playback with differ- ent languages and different systems (Dolby Di- gital, DTS etc.). With DVDs featuring multi- audio recordings, you can switch between lan- guages/audio systems during playback. % T ouch AUDIO during playback. Each time you touch AUDIO it switches be- tween audio systems. Notes ! With some DVDs, switching between lan- guages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using DVD SETUP MENU. For de- tails, refer to Setting the audio language on page 98. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and Mch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not be with the same audio system as that in- dicated. ! T ouching AUDIO during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings, you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. % T ouch SUBTITLE during playback. Each time you touch SUBTITLE it switches be- tween subtitle languages. Notes ! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using DVD SETUP MENU . F or details, refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 98. ! T ouching SUBTITLE during fast for ward/fast reverse, pause or slow motion playback re- turns you to normal playback. Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings, you can switch among viewing angles during play- back. ! During playback of a scene shot from mul- tiple angles, the angle icon is dis- played. T urn angle icon display on or off using DVD SETUP MENU. F or details, refer to Setting the angle icon display on page 99. Playing DVD discs En 34 Section 06
% T ouch ANGLE during playback of a scene shot from multiple angles. Each time you touch ANGLE it switches be- tween angles. Note T ouching ANGLE during fast for ward/fast reverse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Automatic playback of DVDs When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted, this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati- cally and start playback from the first chapter of the first title. ! Some DVDs may not operate properly . If this function is not fully operated, turn this function off and start playback. % T ouch AUTO PLA Y to turn automatic playback on. # T o turn automatic playback off , touch AUTO PLA Y again. # Y ou can also turn automatic playback on or off by pressing AUTO PLA Y button on the remote control. # When the automatic playback is on, you can- not operate repeating play of DVD disc (refer to Repeating play on this page). Introduction of advanced DVD operation 1 1 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for DVD playback. % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. T ouch REPEA T repeatedly until the desired re- peat range appears in the display . During DVD video playback ! DISC â Play through the current disc ! TITLE â Repeat just the current title ! CHAPTER â Repeat just the current chapter During DVD audio playback ! DISC â Play through the current disc ! GROUP â Repeat just the current group Playing DVD discs En 35 Section 06 Playing DVD discs
! TRACK â Repeat just the current track Note If you per form chapter/track search or fast for- ward/reverse, the repeat play range changes to DISC . Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the current group during DVD audio playback. % T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the current group. # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Scanning tracks Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track in the current group during DVD audio playback. 1 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur- rent group is played. 2 When you find the desired track touch SCAN again. # After scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Selecting audio output When playing DVD video discs recorded with LPCM audio, you can switch the audio output. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. % T ouch L/R SELECT on the function menu to select the audio output. T ouch L/R SELECT repeatedly until the desired audio output appears in the display . ! L R â left and right ! LEFT â left ! RIGHT â right ! MIX â mixing left and right Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the function may not be selectable, indicating that operating this function is not pos- sible. Playing DVD discs En 36 Section 06
W atchi ng a Video CD 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 2 2 5 5 5 6 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a Video CD with your DVD player . More ad- vanced Video CD operation is explained start- ing on page 39. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 VideoCD indicator Shows when a Video CD is playing. 3 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 5 Audio output indicator Shows the output channel selected cur- rently . 6 Repeat indicator Shows the selected repeat range. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit. (Refer to page 26.) # With a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function, a menu is displayed. (Refer to PBC playback on this page.) 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick lef t or right. # During PBC playback, a menu may be dis- played if you per form these operations. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. If you keep touching o or p for five sec- onds, the icon m or n changes into rever- sal indication. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you re- lease o or p. T o resume playback at a de- sired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. # F ast for ward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . PBC playback During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC:ON is displayed. Y ou can operate PBC menu with 10KEY. 1 When PBC menu is displayed, touch SEARCH/10key and then touch 10KEY. # Depending on the discs, the menu may be two or more pages long. In such case, touch o or p to display the next or previous menu. Playing Video CDs En 37 Section 07 Playing Video CD s
2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 corresponding to a menu number and then touch ENTER to start playback. Playback starts from the selected menu item. 3 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Notes ! Y ou can display the menu by touching dur- ing PBC playback. For details, refer to the in- structions provided with the disc. ! PBC playback of Video-CD cannot be can- celled. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC:ON, search and time search functions cannot be used nor can you select the range for repeat play . Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % T ouch during playback. Each time you touch , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . # With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. % Keep touching until is displayed during playback. The icon is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # Y ou can adjust playback speed by pressing q or r on the remote control during slow mo- tion playback. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi- ble. Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time Y ou can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specif ying a track, and the time search function to specif y the time on a disc at which play starts. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. ! Time search is not possible when disc play- back has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH/10key. 2 T ouch TRACK (track), TIME (time) or 10KEY (numeric keypad). 3 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. # Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . # In the time search function, to select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7, 1, 0 and 0 in that order . 4 T ouch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected scene. Playing Video CDs En 38 Section 07
Introduction of advanced Video CD operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play There are two repeat play ranges for the Video CD playback: TRACK (track repeat) and DISC (disc repeat). ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. T ouch REPEA T repeatedly until the desired re- peat range appears in the display . ! DISC â Repeat the current disc ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track Note If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, the repeat play range changes to DISC. Selecting audio output Y ou can switch between stereo and monaural audio output. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. % T ouch L/R SELECT on the function menu to select the audio output. T ouch L/R SELECT repeatedly until the desired audio output appears in the display . ! L R â left and right ! LEFT â left ! RIGHT â right ! MIX â mixing left and right Playing Video CDs En 39 Section 07 Playing Video CD s
Listening to a CD 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 6 6 6 2 2 2 5 5 5 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your DVD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 CD indicator Shows when a CD is playing. 3 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing disc only when playing CD TEXT discs. 4 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 6 T rack list display Shows the track title list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit. (Refer to page 26.) 2 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick lef t or right. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. Selecting tracks from the track title list T rack title list lets you see the list of tracks on a disc and select one of them to play back. When playing a CD TEXT disc, track titles are displayed. 1 T ouch PREV or NEXT to switch between the lists of titles. # When the list of tracks is not displayed, touch LIST . 2 T ouch your favorite track title. That selection will begin to play . Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist âÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. T ext information recorded on a CD TEXT disc can be displayed. % T ouch INFO. T ouch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Disc Title (disc title) âÂÂDiscArtist (disc artist name) â T rack Title (track title) â T rackArtist (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, No XXXX will be displayed (e.g., No Name). Playing CDs En 40 Section 08
Introduction of advanced CD operation 1 1 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play There are two repeat play ranges for the CD playback: TRACK (track repeat) and DISC (disc repeat). % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. T ouch REPEA T repeatedly until the desired re- peat range appears in the display . ! DISC â Repeat the current disc ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track Note If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, the repeat play range changes to DISC. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order . % T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order . # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 2 When you find the desired track touch SCAN again. # After scanning of a CD is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Playing CDs En 41 Section 08 Playing CDs
Listening to MP3/WMA/AAC 1 1 1 4 4 4 5 5 5 8 8 8 2 2 2 6 6 6 3 3 3 7 7 7 These are the basic steps necessar y to play an MP3/WMA/AAC with your DVD player . More advanced MP3/WMA/AAC operation is ex- plained starting on page 44. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 ROM-Audio indicator Shows when a compressed audio (MP3/ WMA/AAC) file is playing. 3 MP3/WMA/AAC indicator Shows the type of file currently playing. 4 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. 5 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing. 6 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent file. 7 Folder name indicator Shows the name of the currently playing folder . 8 Folder and file name list Shows the list of folder and file name. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit. (Refer to page 26.) 2 T ouch a or b to select a folder . # Y ou can also select a folder by moving the joy- stick up or down. # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND/ESC . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) con- tains no files, playback commences with folder 02 . # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have an MP3/WMA/AAC file recorded in it. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick lef t or right. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. Notes ! This DVD player can play back an MP3/WMA/ AAC file recorded on CD -R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM. (Refer to page 115 for files that can be played back.) ! Playback is carried out in order of file number . F olders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02.) ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used. ! There is no sound on fast for ward or re- verse. Playing MP3/WMA/AAC files En 42 Section 09
Selecting tracks from the file name list File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. 1 T ouch PREV or NEXT to switch between the lists of names. # When the list of file names is not displayed, touch LIST . 2 T ouch your favorite file name (or folder name). That selection will begin to play . # When you have selected a folder , a list of the names of the files (or the folders) in it can be viewed. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select the desired file name. # T o return to the previous list (the folder one level higher), touch . Displaying information on MP3/WMA/AAC file Information recorded on an MP3/WMA/AAC disc can be displayed. % T ouch to display information on the MP3/WMA/AAC file you are currently play- ing. ! ALBUM (album title) ! TRACK (track title) ! FOLDER (folder name) ! FILE (file name) ! ARTIST (artist name) ! GENRE (genre) ! YEAR (year) # When playing back WMA files, lists of album title, genre and year appear in blank. # If specific information has not been recorded on an MP3/WMA/AAC file, no xxxx will be dis- played in the list (e.g., No Data). # Depending on the version of ID3 tag or Win- dows Media Player , the information may not be displayed correctly . Displaying text information on MP3/WMA/AAC disc T ext information recorded on an MP3/WMA/ AAC disc can be displayed. % T ouch INFO. T ouch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Folder Name (folder name) âÂÂFile Name (file name) â Album (album title) â T rack (track title) â Artist (artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on an MP3/WMA/AAC disc, no xxxx will be dis- played (e.g., no artist). # Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. Playing MP3/WMA/AAC files En 43 Section 09 Playing MP3/WMA/AAC files
Introduction of advanced built-in DVD player (MP3/ WMA/AAC) operation 1 1 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play F or MP3/WMA/AAC playback, there are three repeat play ranges: FOLDER (folder repeat), FILE (one-track repeat) and DISC (repeat all tracks). % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. T ouch REPEA T repeatedly until the desired re- peat range appears in the display . ! DISC â Repeat all tracks ! FOLDER â Repeat the current folder ! FILE â Repeat just the current track Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during FILE , the repeat play range changes to FOLDER. ! When FOLDER is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, FOLDER and DISC . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected FOLDER or DISC ranges. # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Scanning folders and tracks While you are using FOLDER, the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using DISC , the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur- rent folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. 3 When you find the desired track (or folder) touch SCAN again. # After track or folder scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks will begin again. Playing MP3/WMA/AAC files En 44 Section 09
W atchi ng a DivX/JPEG 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 7 7 7 2 2 2 5 5 5 6 6 6 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a DivX/JPEG with your DVD player . More ad- vanced DivX/JPEG operation is explained start- ing on page 49. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 DivX/JPEG indicator Shows the type of file currently playing. 3 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. 4 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent file. ! When playing a JPEG disc, play time in- dicator does not appear . 6 Folder name indicator Shows the name of the currently playing folder . 7 Folder and file name list Shows the list of folder and file name. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit. (Refer to page 26.) 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch a or b to select a folder . # Y ou can also select a folder by moving the joy- stick up or down. # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND/ESC . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) con- tains no files, playback commences with folder 02 . # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have a DivX/JPEG file recorded in it. 4 T o skip back or forward to another file, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next file. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current file. T ouching it again will skip to the previous file. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another file by moving the joystick lef t or right. 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. If you keep touching o or p for five sec- onds, the icon m or n changes into rever- sal indication. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you re- lease o or p. T o resume playback at a de- sired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. # This is fast for ward and reverse operation only for the file being played. This operation is can- celed when the previous or next file is reached. # When playing a JPEG disc, this operation can- not be per formed. Playing DivX/JPEG files En 45 Section 10 Playing DivX/JPEG files
Notes ! This DVD player can play back a DivX file re- corded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ ROM. (Refer to page 118 for files that can be played back.) ! This DVD player can play back a JPEG file re- corded on CD-R/RW/ROM. (Refer to page 117 for files that can be played back.) ! Playback is carried out in order of file number . F olders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02.) ! There is no sound on fast for ward or reverse. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden auto - matically . Viewing a JPEG slideshow When loading a CD/CD -R/RW containing JPEG picture files, this unit automatically starts a slideshow from the first folder/picture on the disc. The player displays the pictures in each folder in alphabetical order . The table below shows the controls for viewing a slideshow . Key What it does f Starts the slideshow , pauses the slideshow or restarts a paused disc. o Displays the previous picture. p Displays the next picture. Rotates the displ ayed picture 90ð clockwise. Playing DivX î VOD cont ent Some DivX VOD (video on demand) content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD conte nt, the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), Rental expired is dis- played. ! If your DivX VOD content allows an unlim- ited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your player and play the con- tent as of ten as you like, and no message will be displayed. Important ! In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider . About your regis- tration code, refer to Displaying your DivX î VOD registration code on page 101. ! DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Di- gital Rights Management) system. This re- stricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. % If the message is displayed after load- ing a disc containing DivX VOD content, touch PLA Y. Playback of the DivX VOD content will start. # T o skip to the next file, touch NEXT PLA Y . # If you do not want to play the DivX VOD con- tent, touch STOP. Playing DivX/JPEG files En 46 Section 10
Selecting files from the file name list File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. 1 T ouch PREV or NEXT to switch between the lists of names. # When the list of file names is not displayed, touch LIST . 2 T ouch your favorite file name (or folder name). That selection will begin to play . # When you have selected a folder , a list of the names of the files (or the folders) in it can be viewed. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select the desired file name. # T o return to the previous list (the folder one level higher), touch . Displaying text information on DivX/JPEG disc T ext information recorded on a DivX/JPEG disc can be displayed. % T ouch INFO. T ouch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Folder Name (folder name) âÂÂFile Name (file name) Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during DivX playback. % Press r on the remote control during playback. Each time you press r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . # With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback When playing DivX video file, this lets you slow down playback speed. % Press r on the remote control until is displayed during playback. The icon is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi- ble. Searching for the part you want to play When playing DivX video file, you can use the time search function to find the part you want to play. ! Time search is not possible when disc play- back has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH. Playing DivX/JPEG files En 47 Section 10 Playing DivX/JPEG files
2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. # T o select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7, 1 , 0 and 0 in that order . # Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . 3 T ouch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected part. Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) When playing a DivX video disc recorded with dialog in two or more languages, you can switch audio language during playback. % T ouch AUDIO during playback. Each time you touch AUDIO it switches be- tween audio systems. Note T ouching AUDIO during fast for ward/fast reverse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) When playing a DivX video disc recorded with subtitles in one or more languages, you can switch subtitle language during playback. % T ouch SUBTITLE during playback. Each time you touch SUBTITLE it switches be- tween subtitle languages. Note T ouching SUBTITLE during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Playing DivX/JPEG files En 48 Section 10
Introduction of advanced built-in DVD player (DivX/ JPEG) operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play F or DivX video file playback, there are three re- peat play ranges: FOLDER (folder repeat), FILE (file repeat) and DISC (repeat all files). F or JPEG picture file playback, there are two repeat play ranges: FOLDER (folder repeat) and DISC (repeat all files). % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. T ouch REPEA T repeatedly until the desired re- peat range appears in the display . ! DISC â Repeat all files ! FOLDER â Repeat the current folder ! FILE â Repeat just the current file Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during FILE , the repeat play range changes to FOLDER. ! When FOLDER is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . Playing files in random order When playing a JPEG disc, random play lets you play back files in a random order within the repeat range, FOLDER and DISC. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. Files will play in a random order within the pre- viously selected FOLDER or DISC ranges. # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Playing DivX/JPEG files En 49 Section 10 Playing DivX/JPEG files
Listening to a CD 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 7 7 7 2 2 2 5 5 5 6 6 6 Y ou can use this unit to control a multi-CD player , which is sold separately . These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your multi- CD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on page 52. ! This unit does not have a disc title input function. ! Only those functions described in this man- ual are supported by 50-disc multi- CD players. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Source name Shows the selected source name. 3 Disc number indicator Shows the disc number currently playing. 4 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 6 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing disc only when playing CD TEXT discs. 7 Disc list display Shows the disc title list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch M-CD to select the multi-CD player . 2 T ouch any of 01 âÂÂ06 to select a disc you want to listen to. If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12, touch PREV or NEXT to display 07 âÂÂ12 . # When 01 âÂÂ06 and 07 âÂÂ12 are not displayed, you can display them by touching LIST . # Y ou can also sequentially select a disc by using a/ b when DISC LIST is not displayed. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick lef t or right. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. Notes ! When the multi-CD player per forms the pre- parator y operations, READY is displayed. ! If an error message such as ERROR-02 is dis- played, refer to the multi-CD player owner âÂÂs manual. ! If there are no discs in the multi-CD player ma- gazine, NO DISC is displayed. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden auto - matically . Multi-CD Player En 50 Section 11
Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f to tur n pause on. Playback of the current track pauses. # T o turn pause off , touch f again. Selecting tracks from the track title list T rack title list lets you see the list of tracks on a disc and select one of them to play back. When playing a CD TEXT disc, track titles are displayed. 1 T ouch LIST to display track list. Each time you touch LIST it selects lists in the following order: DISC LIST (disc list) âÂÂTRACK LIST (track list) â no list displays 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT to switch between the lists of titles. 3 T ouch your favorite track title. That selection will begin to play . Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs Y ou can use these functions only with a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player . Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist âÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. T ext information recorded on a CD TEXT disc can be displayed. % T ouch INFO. T ouch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Disc Title (disc title) âÂÂDiscArtist (disc artist name) â T rack Title (track title) â T rackArtist (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, No XXXX will be displayed (e.g., No Name). Multi-CD Player En 51 Section 11 Multi-CD Player
Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 1 1 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the multi-CD player: MUL TI-CD (multi- CD player repeat), TRACK (one-track repea t) and DISC (disc repeat). % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. T ouch REPEA T repeatedly until the desired re- peat range appears in the display . ! MUL TI-CD â Repeat all discs in the multi- CD player ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track ! DISC â Repeat the current disc Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to MUL TI-CD . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRACK , the repeat play range changes to DISC. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in ran- dom order within the repeat range, MUL TI-CD and DISC. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected MUL TI-CD or DISC ranges. # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Scanning CDs and tracks While you are using DISC, the beginning of each track on the selected disc plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using MUL TI-CD , the beginning of the first track of each disc is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur- rent disc (or the first track of each disc) is played. Multi-CD Player En 52 Section 11
3 When you find the desired track (or disc) touch SCAN again. # After track or disc scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks will begin again. Using compression and bass emphasis Y ou can use these functions only with a multi- CD player that supports them. Using COMP (compression) and DBE (dy- namic bass emphasis) functions lets you ad- just the sound playback quality of the multi- CD player . Each of the functions has a two- step adjustment. The COMP function balances the output of louder and sof ter sounds at high- er volumes. DBE boosts bass levels to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as you select them and use the one that best enhances the playback of the track or CD that you are listening to. % T ouch COMPRESSI ON on the function menu to select your favorite setting. T ouch COMPRESSION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings: OFF âÂÂCOMP1 âÂÂCOMP2 âÂÂOFF âÂÂDBE1 â DBE2 # If the multi-CD player does not support COMP/DBE, NO COMP is displayed and COMPRESSION cannot be operated. Using ITS playlists ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a playlist of favorite tracks from those in the multi-CD player magazine. After you have added your favorite tracks to the playlist you can turn on ITS play and play just those selec- tions. Creating a playlist with ITS programming Y ou can use ITS to enter and play back up to 99 tracks per disc from up to 100 discs (with the disc titles). (With multi-CD players sold be- fore the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, up to 24 tracks can be stored in the playlist.) 1 Play a CD that you want to program. 2 T ouch ITS MEMORY on the function menu. 3 T ouch or to select the desired track. 4 T ouch MEMORY to store the currently playing track in the playlist. MEMOR Y is displayed briefly and the cur- rently playing selec tion is added to your play- list. The display then shows track number again. # After data for 100 discs has been stored in memor y , data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. Playback from your ITS playlist ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into your ITS playlist. When you turn on ITS play, tracks from your ITS playlist in the multi- CD player will begin to play . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch ITS PLA Y on the function menu to tur n ITS play on. Playback begins of those tracks from your playlist within the previously selected MUL TI-CD or DISC ranges. # If no tracks in the current range are pro- grammed for ITS play , then ITS EMPTY is dis- played. # T o turn ITS play off , touch ITS PLA Y again. Multi-CD Player En 53 Section 11 Multi-CD Player
Erasing a track from your ITS playlist Y ou can delete a track from your ITS playlist if ITS play is on. If ITS play is already on, skip to step 2. 1 Play the CD with the track you want to delete from your ITS playlist, and tur n ITS play on. Refer to Playback from your ITS playlist on the previous page. 2 T ouch ITS MEMORY on the function menu. 3 T ouch or to select the desired track. 4 T ouch CLEAR to erase the track from your ITS playlist. The currently playing selection is erased from your ITS playlist and playback of the next track from your ITS playlist begins. # If there are no tracks from your playlist in the current range, ITS EMPTY is displayed and nor- mal play resumes. Erasing a CD fr om your ITS playlist Y ou can delete all tracks of a CD from your ITS playlist if ITS play is off . 1 Play the CD that you want to delete. 2 T ouch ITS MEMORY on the function menu. 3 T ouch CLEAR to erase all tracks on the currently playing CD from your ITS playlist. All tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from your playlist and CLEAR is dis- played. Multi-CD Player En 54 Section 11
Listening to songs on your iPod 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 8 8 8 2 2 2 6 6 6 7 7 7 5 5 5 Y ou can use this unit to control an iP od adapter , which is sold separately . 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Source name Shows the selected source name. 3 Song number indicator Shows the number of song played in the se- lected list. 4 Repeat indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent track. 5 Shuffle indicator Shows when random play is set to SONGS or ALBUMS. 6 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent song. 7 Song title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing song. 8 Song information Shows detailed information of currently playing song. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch iPod to select the iPod. # When the iP od is not connected to this unit, you cannot select the iP od as a source. 2 T o skip back or forward to another song, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next song. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current song. T ouching it again will skip to the previous song. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. Browsing for a song The operation of this unit to control an iP od is designed to be as close to the operation of the iP od as possible for easy operation and song search. 1 T ouch TOP to display the top menu. 2 T ouch one of the categories in which you want to search for a song. ! Playlists (playlists) ! Artists (artists) ! Albums (albums) ! Songs (songs) ! Genres (genres) 3 T ouch a list title that you want to play . Repeat this operation until you find the de- sired song. # Y ou can start playback throughout the se- lected list by touching and holding desired list title. # Y ou can start a playback of all the songs in the selected list ( Genres , Artists or Albums). T o do this, touch ALL . Playing songs on iPod En 55 Section 12 Playing songs on iPod
# T o go to the next group of list titles, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of list titles, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous menu, touch . # T o go to the top menu of the list search, touch TOP . # If the playback stops for any reason, touch TOP and refine your search for a song. Pausing a song P ause lets you temporarily stop playback of a song. % T ouch f during playback. P AUSE appears in the display . # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Displaying text information on iPod T ext information recorded on the iP od can be displayed on the information bar . % T ouch INFO. T ouch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Song Title (song title) âÂÂArtist (artist name) â Album (album title) # If the characters recorded on the iP od are not compatible with this unit, those characters will not be displayed. Displaying information on song Song title, artist name, album title of the cur- rently playing song can be displayed (if they have been entered in iP od) together with the index and the remaining playback time in the form of the status bar . % T ouch to display information on the song you are currently playing. Song informatio n is displayed. ! Status bar shows the remaining playback time. The bar is filled up from the left to the right as the playback time is consumed. Repeating play F or playback of the songs on the iP od, there are two repeat play ranges: ONE (repeat one song) and ALL (repeat all songs in the list). ! While this unit is set to repeat one song, you cannot select the other songs. % T ouch REPEA T to select the repeat range. T ouch REPEA T repeatedly until the desired re- peat range appears in the display . ! ONE â Repeat just the current song ! ALL â Repeat all songs in the selected list Playing songs in a random order (shuffle) F or playback of the songs on the iP od, there are two random play methods: SONGS (play back songs in a random order) and ALBUMS (play back albums in a random order). % T ouch SHUFFLE to select the random play method. T ouch SHUFFLE repeatedly until the desired random play method appears in the display . ! SONGS â Play back songs in a random order within the selected list ! ALBUMS â Select an album randomly , and then play back all the songs in it in order # T o cancel the random play , touch SHUFFLE re- peatedly until the shuffle icon is turned off . Playing songs on iPod En 56 Section 12
Listening to songs on BT Audio (Bluetooth audio player) 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 2 2 2 If you connect Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD- BTB100) to this unit, you can control Bluetooth audio player via Bluetooth wir eless technology . ! In some countries, CD -BTB100 is not sold on the mark et. F or details concerning operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides brief informatio n on Blue- tooth audio player operations with this unit which slightly differes or is cut short from that described in the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. ! Even though your audio player does not contain a Bluetooth module, you can still control it from this unit via Bluetooth wire- less technology. T o control your audio player by using this unit, connect a product featuring Bluetooth wireless technology (available on the market) to your audio player and connect Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100) to this unit. Important ! Depending on the Bluetooth audio player con- nected to this unit, the available operations with this unit are limited to the following two levels: â Lower level: Only playing back songs on your audio player is possible. â Higher level: Playing back, pausing, select- ing songs, etc., are possible (all the opera- tions illustrated in this manual). ! Since there are a number of Bluetooth audio players available on the market, operations with your Bluetooth audio player using this unit var y in great range. Please refer to the in- struction manual that came with your Blue- tooth audio player as well as this manual while operating your player on this unit. ! Information about songs (e.g. the elapsed playing time, song title, song index, etc.) can- not be displayed on this unit. ! While you are listening to songs on your Blue- tooth audio player , please refrain from operat- ing on your cellular phone as much as possible. If you tr y operating on your cellular phone, the signal from your cellular phone may cause a noise on the song playback. ! When you are talking on the cellular phone connected to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology , the song playback from your Blue- tooth audio player connected to this unit is muted. ! Even if while you are listening to song on your Bluetooth audio player you switch to another source, the playback of song continues to elapse. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Source name Shows the selected source name. 3 Device name Shows the device name of the connected Bluetooth audio player (or Bluetooth adap- ter). 4 Bluetooth audio indicator Shows when a Bluetooth audio player con- nection is established (for more details, refer to Connecting a Bluetooth audio player on the next page). Bluetooth Audio En 57 Section 13 Bluetooth Audio
1 T ouch the source icon and then touch BT AUDIO to select the Bluetooth audio source. # F or this unit to control your Bluetooth audio player it needs to establish a Bluetooth wireless connection. (Refer to Connecting a Bluetooth audio player on this page.) 2 T ouch f. Playback starts. # When you want to pause a song, touch f again. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick lef t or right. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. 5 T o stop playback, touch g. Note Depending on the Bluetooth audio player you connected to this unit, operations on this unit to control the player may differ from those explained in this manual. Function operation 1 1 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Connecting a Bluetooth audio player % T ouch CONNECTION OPEN on the func- tion menu to tur n the connection open on. CONNECTION W AITING is displayed. This unit is now on standby for connection from Bluetooth audio player . If your Bluetooth audio player is set ready for Bluetooth wireless connection, the connection to this unit will be automatically established. Bluetooth Audio En 58 Section 13
Note Before you can use audio players you may need to enter the PIN code into this unit. If your player requires a PIN code to establish a connection, look for the code on the player or in its accompa- nying documentation . Enter the PIN code refer- ring to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 105. Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player % T ouch DISCONNECT on the function menu. After the disconnection is completed, No Connection is displayed. Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player When you are done using your Bluetooth audio player with this unit, you can close the Bluetooth wireless connection. 1 T ouch AV MENU to display AUDIO MENU. AUDIO MENU appears on the display . 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . 3 T ouch DISCONNECT. After the disconnection is completed, No Connection is displayed. Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address % T ouch DEVICE INFO on the function menu to display the BD address. V arious information regarding the bluetooth wireless technology are displayed. ! BD ADDRESS (system address) ! SYSTEM NAME (system name) ! SYSTEM VER. (version) ! BT MODULE VER. (Bluetooth module version) Bluetooth Audio En 59 Section 13 Bluetooth Audio
Hands-free phoning with cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 b b b 2 2 2 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 a a a If you use Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100), you can connect a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology to this unit for hands-free, wir eless calls, even while driving. ! In some countries, CD -BTB100 is not sold on the mark et. F or details concerning operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides brief informatio n on the hands-free phoning operations with this unit which slightly differes or is cut short from that described in the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. Important Since this unit is on standby to connect with your cellular phones via Bluetooth wireless technol- ogy , using this unit without running the engine can result in batter y drainage. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Source name Shows the selected source name. 3 User number indicator Shows the registration number of the cellu- lar phone. 4 Device name Shows the device name of the cellular phone. 5 Automatic answering/Automatic reject- ing indicator Shows when the automatic answering func- tion is on (for more details, refer to Setting the automatic answering on page 68). Shows when the automatic rejecting func- tion is on (for more details, refer to Setting the automatic rejecting on page 68). 6 Battery strength indicator Shows the batter y strength of cellular phone. ! Batter y strength indicator may differ from the actual batter y strength. ! If the batter y strength is not available, nothing is displayed in the batter y strength indicator area. 7 Signal level indicator Shows the signal strength of cellular phone. ! Signal level indicator may differ from the actual signal level. ! Depending on the cellular phones featur- ing Bluetooth wireless technology, radio field intensity is not available. 8 T elephone indicator Shows when a phone connection using Bluetooth wireless technology is estab- lished (for more details, refer to Connecting a cellular phone on page 62). 9 Incoming call notice indication Shows when an incoming call has been re- ceived and not checked yet. Bluetooth T elephone En 60 Section 14
! Incoming call notice is not displayed for calls made when your cellular phone is disconnected from this unit. a V oice recognition indicator Shows when the voice recognition function is on (for more details, refer to V oice recogni- tion on this page). b Preset dial list display Shows the Preset dial list. % T ouch the source icon and then touch T elephone to select the telephone. Note Equalizer cur ve for the phone source is fixed. When selecting the phone source, you cannot op- erate the equalizer function. Refer to Recalling equalizer cur ves on page 84. Setting up for hands-free phoning Before you can use the hands-free phoning function you will need to set up the unit for use with your cellular phone. This entails es- tablishing a Bluetooth wireless connection be- tween this unit and your phone, registering your phone with this unit, and adjusting the volume level. 1 Connection F or detailed instructions on connecting your phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless tech- nology , refer to Connecting a cellular phone on the next page. # Y our phone should now be temporarily con- nected; however , to make best use of the technol- ogy , we recommend you register the phone to this unit. 2 Registration Refer to Registering connected cellular phone on page 63 for instructions on how to register your temporaril y connected phone. 3 V olume adjustment Adjust the earpiece volume on your cellular phone for comfort. When adjusted, the volume level is memorized in this unit as the default setting. # Caller âÂÂs voice volume and ring volume may var y depending on the type of cellular phones. # If the difference between the ring volume and caller âÂÂs voice volume is big, overall volume level may become unstable. # Before disconnecting cellular phone from this unit, make sure to adjust the volume to proper level. If the volume has been muted (zero level) on your cellular phone, the volume level of your cellular phone remains muted even aft er the cel- lular phone is disconnected from this unit. Basic operation of hands- free phoning Important Advanced operations that require your attention such as dialing numbers on the monitor , using phone book, etc., are prohibited while you are driving. When you need to use these advanced operations, stop your vehicle in a safe place and operate. Making a phone call V oice recognition 1 T ouch VOICE to tur n the voice recogni- tion function on. V oice dial icon appears on the information bar . V oice recognition function is now ready . Bluetooth T elephone En 61 Section 14 Bluetooth T elephone
# T o cancel the voice recognition function, touch VOICE again. 2 Pronounce the name of your contact. T aking a phone call Answering an incoming call 1 When a call comes in, touch . T ouching switches between callers on hold. 2 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). Rejecting an incoming call % When a call comes in, touch . The call is rejected. Answering a call waiting 1 T ouch to answer a call waiting. 2 T ouch to end the call. # The caller you have been talking to is now on hold. T o end the call, both you and your caller need to hang up the phone. # While your callers hold the line, touching switches between callers. Rejecting a call waiting % T ouch to reject a call waiting. Introduction of advanced hands-free phoning operation 1 1 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Connecting a cellular phone Searching for available cellular phones 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch Search to search for available cel- lular phones. While searching, SEARCHING flashes. When available cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology are found, device names or Name Not Found (if names cannot be ob- tained) are displayed. Bluetooth T elephone En 62 Section 14
# If this unit fails to find any available cellular phones, Not Found is displayed. 3 T ouch the device name you want to connect. While connecting, CONNECTING flashes. T o complete the connection, please check the de- vice name ( Pioneer BT unit) and enter the link code on your cellular phone. If the connection is established, CONNECTED is displayed. # The link code is set to 0000 as default. Y ou can change this code in the initial setting. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con- nection on page 105. Using a cellular phone to initiate a connection 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch CONNECTION OPEN. The unit is now on standby for connection from cellular phone. 3 Use cellular phone to connect to this unit. # T o cancel this function, touch CONNECTION OPEN again. # The link code is set to 0000 as default. Y ou can change this code in the initial setting. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con- nection on page 105. Disconnecting a cellular phone 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch DISCONNECT to disconnect the currently connected cellular phone from this unit. After the disconnection is completed, No Connection is displayed. Registering connected cellular phone 1 T ouch PHONE REGISTER on the function menu. Registration assignments appear on the dis- play . F rom the top to the third assignment are for User phone 1, 2 and 3. The rest two assign- ments are for Guest phone 1 and 2. 2 T ouch and hold one of the registration assignments to register the currenctly con- nected phone. If the registration is succeeded, the device name of the connected phone is displayed in the selected assignment. # If the assignment is empty , the device name is not displayed. If the assignment is already taken, the device name appears. T o replace an assign- ment with a new phone, first delete the current assignment. For more detailed instructions, see Deleting a registered phone on this page. # If the registration failed, device name of the connected phone is not displayed in the selected assignment. In this case, return to step 1 and tr y again. Deleting a registered phone 1 T ouch PHONE REGISTER on the function menu. Bluetooth T elephone En 63 Section 14 Bluetooth T elephone
2 T ouch DELETE next to the device name you want to delete. A confirmation display appears. T ouch YES to delete the phone. # T o cancel deleting a registered phone, touch NO . Connecting to a registered cellular phone Connecting to a registered phone manually 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch DIRECT CONNECT. 3 T ouch the device name you want to connect. While connecting, CONNECTING is flashing. If the connection is established, CONNECTED is displayed. Connecting to a registered phone automatically % T ouch AUTO CONNECT on the function menu to tur n the Automatic Connection function on. If your cellular phone is set ready for Bluetooth wireless connection, the connection to this unit will be automatically established. # T o turn automatic connection off , touch AUTO CONNECT again. Using the Phone Book T ransferring entries to the Phone Book The Phone Book can hold a total of 500 en- tries; 300 from User 1, 150 from User 2, and 50 from User 3. 1 T ouch PHONEBOOK TRANSFER on the function menu. 2 T ouch ST ART to tur n the Phone Book T ransfer function on. The Phone Book T ransfer is now on standby . 3 Use cellular phone to perform phone book transfer . P er form phone book transfer using the cellu- lar phone. For detailed instruction on this, refer to the instruction manual that came with your cellular phone. # The display indicates how many entries have been transferred and the total number to be transferred. # T o cancel the transferring process, touch STOP . 4 Completed is displayed and phone book transfer is completed. Changing the Phone Book display order % T ouch PHONEBOOK NAME VIEW on the function menu to tur n Phone Book Name View function on. Display order for the Phone Book is changed. # T o change to the other display order , touch PHONEBOOK NAME VIEW again. Bluetooth T elephone En 64 Section 14
Calling a number in the Phone Book Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation. After finding the number in the Phone Book you want to call, you can select the entr y and make the call. 1 T ouch PHONEBOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 T ouch SEARCH to display the Phone Book search display . 3 T ouch an alphabet letter to select the first letter of the name you are looking for . 4 T ouch ENTER to show entries starting with the letter you chose. The display shows the first six Phone Book en- tries starting with that letter (e.g. âÂÂBen âÂÂ, â Brianâ and â Burtâ when â Bâ is selected). 5 T ouch a Phone Book entry you want to call. The display is switched to the Phone Book edit display . # T ouch PREV or NEXT to display other phone book entries. # T o refine the search with a different letter , touch . 6 T ouch phone number of the Phone Book entry you want to call. If several phone numbers are entered to an entr y , touch one you want to call. The display returns to the normal display and the Phone Book entr y you selected is dis- played on the information bar . 7 T ouch to make a call. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . 8 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). Editing the name of a Phone Book entry Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation. 1 T ouch PHONEBOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to edit. Refer to Calling a number in the Phone Book on this page for detailed instructions. 3 T ouch EDIT next to the Phone Book entry name. The display is changed to the Phone Book edit display . 4 T ouch the letter you wish to input. Key What it does Moves the cursor to the previous charac- ter pos ition. Moves the cursor to the next character po - sition. Inputs the space. ABC /123 Switches keypad between alphabet and numeric. Deletes letter by letter from the end of the text. 5 T ouch MEMORY to store the new name. Bluetooth T elephone En 65 Section 14 Bluetooth T elephone
Editing phone numbers Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation. 1 T ouch PHONEBOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to edit. See step two to three on Calling a number in the Phone Book on the previous page for how to do this. 3 T ouch EDIT next to the phone number you want to edit. The display is changed to the Phone Book dial edit display. 4 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input numbers. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . # T ouch CLEAR to delete the number . T ouch and hold CLEAR to delete all the input numbers. 5 T ouch MEMORY to store the new num- ber . Clearing a Phone Book entry Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation. 1 T ouch PHONEBOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to delete. See step two to three on Calling a number in the Phone Book on the previous page for how to do this. 3 T ouch DELETE to delete the Phone Book entry . A confirmation display appears. T ouch YES to delete the entr y . # If you do not want to clear a Phone Book entr y that you have selected, touch NO. Using the Call History Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation. The 12 most recent calls made (dialed), re- ceived and missed are stored in the Call His- tor y . Y ou can browse the Call Histor y and call numbers from it. 1 T ouch LOG to display the Call History . T ouching LOG repeatedly switches between the following call histories: MISSED CALL LIST (missed call) â DIALED CALL LIST (dialed call) â RECEIVED CALL LIST (received call) # If no phone numbers have been stored in the selected list, nothing is displayed. # Y ou can switch between phone number and name (if entered) by touching ABC/123. 2 T ouch a phone number or name (if en- tered) you want to call. The display returns to the normal display and the phone number you selected is displayed on the information bar . # T ouch PREV or NEXT to display other phone number or name (if entered). 3 T ouch to make a call. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . 4 T o end the call, touch . Bluetooth T elephone En 66 Section 14
Using preset numbers Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation. Assigning preset numbers Numbers that you dial frequently can be as- signed to presets for quick recall. Y ou can assign up to 6 frequently called phone numbers to number presets. 1 Select a desired phone number from the Phone Book or the Call History . Or di- rectly enter a desired phone number . T o select a desired phone number from the Phone Book or the Call Histor y , see the in- structions explained in previous pages. T o di- rectly enter a desired phone number , see Making a call by entering phone number on this page. The display should now be the normal display and the selected phone number is displayed on the information bar . 2 Keep touching one of preset assign- ments to store the phone number . The phone number you selected is stored in presets. # When P1 âÂÂP6 are not displayed, you can dis- play them by touching LIST . # No Data is displayed for empty assignment. Even if the assignment is taken, you can replace it to the new one by keeping touching the assign- ment. Recalling preset numbers 1 T ouch one of preset assignments . The selected phone number should now be displayed on the information bar . # When P1 âÂÂP6 are not displayed, you can dis- play them by touching LIST . 2 T ouch to make a call. 3 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). Making a call by entering phone number Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation. 1 T ouch DIRECT to display the direct dial display . 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input numbers. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . # If you want to store the entered phone number to preset assignment, touch SET here. The display returns to the normal display and the phone num- ber you entered is selected. # T ouch CLEAR to delete the number . T ouch and hold CLEAR to delete all the input numbers. # Up to 24 digits can be entered. 3 When you completed entering the number , touch to make a call. 4 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). Clearing memory 1 T ouch CLEAR MEMORY on the function menu. Bluetooth T elephone En 67 Section 14 Bluetooth T elephone
2 T ouch CLEAR next to the item you want to delete from the memory . Select from the following: ! PHONEBOOK (phone book) ! Dialed Calls (dialed call histor y) ! Received Calls (received call histor y) ! Missed Calls (missed call histor y) ! Preset Dials (preset phone numbers) After selecting a desired item, a confirmation display appears. T ouch YES to delete the mem- or y . # If you do not want to clear memor y that you have selected, touch CANCEL. # If you want to clear all the Phone Book, dia- led/received/missed call histor y list and preset phone number , touch CLEAR ALL . Setting the automatic answering % T ouch AUTO ANSWER on the function menu to tur n the automatic answer on. # T o turn the automatic answer off , touch AUTO ANSWER again. Setting the automatic rejecting % T ouch REFUSE ALL CALLS on the func- tion menu to tur n the automatic call rejec- tion on. # T o turn the automatic call rejection off , touch REFUSE ALL CALLS again. Switching the ring tone % T ouch RING TONE on the function menu to tur n the ring tone on. # T o turn the ring tone off , touch RING TONE again. Echo canceling and noise reduction % T ouch ECHO CANCEL on the function menu to tur n Echo Cancel function on. # T o turn echo canceling off , touch ECHO CANCEL again. Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address % T ouch DEVICE INFO on the function menu to display the BD address. V arious information regarding the bluetooth wireless technology are displayed. ! BD ADDRESS (system address) ! SYSTEM NAME (system name) ! SYSTEM VER. (version) ! BT MODULE VER. (Bluetooth module version) Bluetooth T elephone En 68 Section 14
W atchi ng the television 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 6 6 6 2 2 2 5 5 5 Y ou can use this unit to control a TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P5750TV), which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. This section pro- vides information on TV operations with this unit which differs from that described in the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. Important Depending on the TV tuner connected to this unit, some functions may not be operable. For de- tails, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Source name Shows the selected source name. 3 Band indicator Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to. 4 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 5 Channel indicator Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned. 6 Preset list display Shows the preset list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch TV to select the TV . 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired band is displayed, BAND 1 or BAND 2 . 4 T o perform manual tuning, briefly touch c or d. The channels move up or down step by step. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by mov- ing the joystick left or right. 5 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the channels until a broad- cast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys. # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by holding the joystick lef t or right. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Storing and recalling broadcast stations If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P01 âÂÂP12 you can easily store up to 12 broad- cast stations for later recall with the touch of a key . TV tuner En 69 Section 15 TV tuner
% When you find a station that you want to store in memory , keep touching one of preset tuning keys P01 âÂÂP12 until the beep sounds. The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key the station is recalled from memor y . # T o switch between P01 âÂÂP06 and P07 âÂÂP12 , touch PREV or NEXT . # When P01 âÂÂP06 and P07 âÂÂP12 are not dis- played, you can display them by touching LIST. Notes ! Up to 24 stations, 12 for each of two TV bands, can be stored in memor y . ! Y ou can also use a and b to recall stations as- signed to preset tuning keys P01 âÂÂP12 when P01 âÂÂP12 are not displayed. Introduction of advanced TV tuner operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the TV picture. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially % T ouch BSSM on the function menu to turn BSSM on. BSSM begins to flash. While BSSM is flashing the 12 strongest broadcast stations will be stored in order from the lowest channel up. When finished, BSSM stops flashing. # T o cancel the storage process, touch BSSM again. TV tuner En 70 Section 15
Note Storing broadcast stations with BSSM may re- place broadcast stations you have saved using P01 âÂÂP12 . Selecting the area group % T ouch COUNTRY on the function menu to select the area group. T ouch COUNTR Y repeatedly until the desired area group appears in the display . COUNTR Y 1 (CCIR channel) âÂÂCOUNTRY 2 (IN channel) â COUNTR Y 3 (CHN channel) â COUNTR Y 4 (U.K. channel) âÂÂCOUNTRY 5 (OIRT channel) â COUNTR Y 6 (AUSTRALIA channel) â COUNTRY 7 (SAF channel) TV tuner En 71 Section 15 TV tuner
Playing a disc 1 1 1 4 4 4 6 6 6 a a a 2 2 2 7 7 7 3 3 3 9 9 9 5 5 5 8 8 8 Y ou can use this unit to control a DVD player or multi-DVD player , which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the DVD player âÂÂs or multi-DVD player âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides information on DVD operations with this unit which differs from that described in the DVD player â so r multi-DVD player âÂÂs operation manual. ! When operating DVD player/multi-DVD player by using the touch panel keys, refer to built-in DVD player operation. â When using a DVD player or multi-DVD player , you cannot operate the DVD menu by touching the menu item di- rectly . ! This unit does not have ITS playlist and disc title functions. ! Switch the remote control selection to sui- table setting to operate DVD players. (Refer to page 101.) ! Switch the remote control operation mode to DVD to operate the DVD player by using remote control. (Refer to page 19.) 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Disc type indicator Shows the type of the currently playing disc. 3 Audio language indicator Shows which audio language has been se- lected when playing DVD video. 4 Disc number indicator Shows the disc number currently playing when using a multi-DVD player . 5 Title/Folder number indicator Shows the title (when playing DVD video) or folder (when playing MP3 or WMA) of the selection currently playing. 6 Chapter/track number indicator Shows the chapter (when playing DVD video) or track (when playing video CD, CD, MP3 or WMA) currently playing. 7 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent chapter/track. 8 Viewing angle indicator Shows which viewing angle has been se- lected when playing DVD video. 9 Subtitle language indicator Shows which subtitle language has been selected when playing DVD video. a Disc list display Shows the list of the disc type when using a multi-DVD player . 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch S-DVD to select the DVD player . 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another chapter/track, briefly touch o or p. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another chapter/track by moving the joystick left or right. DVD Player En 72 Section 16
When using the joystick on the remote control, switch the remote control operation mode to AV H . (Refer to page 19.) 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. When using the joystick on the remote control, switch the remote control operation mode to AV H . (Refer to page 19.) Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically when playing DVD video or video CD. T urning the DVD player on or off ! Only the remote control can operate this function. T o per form this function, switch the remote control operation mode to DVD . (Refer to page 19.) % Press REAR SOURCE to turn the DVD player on. # T o turn the DVD player off , press REAR SOURCE again. Selecting a disc ! Y ou can operate this function only when a multi-DVD player is connected to this unit. % T ouch any of 01 âÂÂ06 to select the de- sired disc. # When 01 âÂÂ06 are not displayed, you can dis- play them by touching LIST . # Y ou can also select a disc by pressing a/ b ( TIL T/DISC ) on the remote control when the re- mote control operation mode is switched to DVD . DVD Player En 73 Section 16 DVD Player
Introduction of advanced DVD player operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. During DVD video playback ! DISC â Repeat the current disc ! CHAPTER â Repeat just the current chapter ! TITLE â Repeat just the current title During Video CD or CD playback ! DISC â Repeat the current disc ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track During MP3/WMA playback ! DISC â Repeat the current disc ! FOLDER â Repeat the current folder ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! During video CD or CD playback, if you per- form track search or fast for ward/reverse dur- ing TRACK , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! During MP3/WMA playback, if you select an- other folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! During MP3/WMA playback, if you per form track search or fast for ward/reverse during TRACK , the repeat play range changes to FOLDER . Playing tracks in random order ! Y ou can operate this function during CD/ MP3/WMA playback. % T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order . # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Scanning tracks of a CD/ MP3/WMA ! Y ou can operate this function during CD/ MP3/WMA playback. 1 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 2 When you find the desired track touch SCAN again. DVD Player En 74 Section 16
Selecting audio output When playing DVD video discs recorded with LPCM audio, or video CD discs, you can switch the audio output. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. % T ouch L/R SELECT on the function menu to select the audio output. T ouch L/R SELECT repeatedly until the desired audio output appears in the display . ! L R â left and right ! LEFT â left ! RIGHT â right DVD Player En 75 Section 16 DVD Player
Introduction to built-in DSP features Important W e recommend that you record the settings in the sheet on page 121 after you have completed audio adjustments. DSP modes This unit features two DSP modes: the net- work mode and the standard mode. Y ou can switch between DSP modes as desired. Initi- ally , the DSP mode is set to the standard mode. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) ! Auto T A and EQ can be used for the stan- dard mode only . (Refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto -equalizing) on page 92 and Using the auto-equalizer on page 91.) ! A 2-way front speaker output can be used for the network mode only . Note Switching the DSP mode erases the current ad- justing audio settings ( LAST MEMOR Y ). If needed, memorize it into custom settings ( CUSTOM1 , CUSTOM2 or CUSTOM3). Output channel modes ( 2CH/Multi CH) This unit has two output channel modes for each DSP mode: the 2-channel mode and the multi-channel mode. Y ou can switch between output channel modes depending on the source that you have selected. ! Dolby Pro Logic II/EX and DTS Neo:6 ( Dolby/DTS) can be used for multi-channel mode only. ! Graphic equalizer ( GRAPHIC EQ ) can be used for 2-channel mode only . ! P arametric equalizer ( P ARAMETRIC EQ ) can be used for multi-channel mode only . Note When selecting 2-channel mode, audio does not be output from front center and rear center speakers. Sound settings ( SETTING1, SETTING2 or SETTING3 ) Created acoustic sound field can be stored in this unit and called up easily . Additionally, this unit stores the sound setting and output chan- nel information for each source group. Chan- ging the source switches sound setting and output channel information for each source group at the same time. Three types of sound settings can be set and stored for both 2-channel mode and multi- channel mode independently. Moreover , sound settings can be stored for both the net- work mode and the standard mode. Therefore, a total of 12 types of sound settings can be set and stored. ! Auto T A and EQ can be per formed only when the standard mode is selected. P er- forming Auto T A and EQ creates auto set- tings ( AUTO) which are adjusted finely for both 2-channel mode and multi-channel mode. However , AUTO cannot be custo- mized. Source groups Each source stores both sound settings and output channels information. When a DVD player (built-in or optional) is selected as a source, the each medium stores these settings independently . Media of DVD player are listed as follows: ! DVD audio (AOB: audio object) Audio Adjustments En 76 Section 17
! DVD audio (VOB: video object) ! DVD video ! Video CD ! CD (CD-DA) ! DTS-CD ! Compressed audio (MP3/WMA/AAC) files ! DivX video files Note External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same value automatically . Custom settings ( CUSTOM1, CUSTOM2 and CUSTOM3) F ollowing functions can store the settings in the custom settings ( CUSTOM1, CUSTOM2 and CUSTOM3 ). Custom settings are com- mon to Sound settings ( SETTING1, SETTING2 and SETTING3 ). ! Speaker setting ( SPEAKER SETTING) ! Cut-off frequency setting ( CUT OFF) ! Time alignment setting ( TIME ALIGNMENT ) ! Speaker level setting ( SPEAKER LEVEL) ! P arametric equalizer setting ( P ARAMETRIC EQ ) (when selecting multi- channel mode only) ! Graphic equalizer setting ( GRAPHIC EQ ) (when selecting 2-channel mode only) Audio setup procedure Standard mode First, per form Auto T A and EQ. Auto T A and EQ creates finely-tuned sound field for both 2- channel mode and multi-channe l mode ac- cording to your vehicle interior acoustic char- acteristics. (Refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto -time alignment and auto-equalizing) on page 92.) Basically , that âÂÂs all you need to do to adjust the audio setting and no other fine tuning is necessar y . However , according to your wishes, it is possi- ble to customize audio settings based on Auto T A and EQ settings. By carr ying out the follow- ing settings/adjustments in the order shown, you can customize sound field effortlessly . ! Switching the sound settings ( SOUND SETTING ) ! Customizing the speaker setting ( SPEAKER SETTING) ! Using the cut- off fr equency ( CUT OFF) ! Adjusting the time alignment ( TIME ALIGNMENT ) ! Adjusting the speak er output levels ( SPEAKER LEVEL) ! Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer ( P ARAMETRIC EQ ) (when selecting multi- channel mode only) ! Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer ( GRAPHIC EQ) (when selecting 2-channel mode only) Network mode Make sure of the following settings before per- forming finely audio adjustments. Function Setting Page Digital Direct OFF 79 P ARAMETRIC EQ / GRAPHIC EQ FLA T 84, 86 FADER/BALANCE FRONT 0/REAR 0/ LEFT 0/RIGHT 0 78 Dolby/DTS OFF 79 By carr ying out the following settings/adjust- ments in the order shown, you can create a fi- nely-tuned sound field effortlessly. ! Switching the sound settings ( SOUND SETTING ) ! Using the position selector ( POSITION ) ! Customizing the speaker setting ( SPEAKER SETTING) ! Using the cut- off fr equency ( CUT OFF) Audio Adjustments En 77 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
! Adjusting the time alignment ( TIME ALIGNMENT ) ! Adjusting the speak er output levels ( SPEAKER LEVEL) ! Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer ( P ARAMETRIC EQ ) (when selecting multi- channel mode only) ! Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer ( GRAPHIC EQ) (when selecting 2-channel mode only) Extra functions These functions are helpful in adjusting the sound to suit your system or your personal preferences. ! Using balance adjustment ( FADER/BALANCE) ! Adjusting source levels ( SOURCE LEVEL ADJUSTER) ! Using the dir ect control ( Digital Direct) ! Listening in surr ound sound ( Dolby/DTS) (when selecting multi-channel mode only) ! Using the dynamic range contr ol ( DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL ) ! Using the down-mix function ( DOWN MIX) Introduction of audio adjustments 1 1 1 1 Audio display Shows the audio function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU to display the audio function names. The audio function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SOURCE LEVEL ADJUSTER. # When selecting 2-channel mode, you cannot switch to Dolby/DTS . 2 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Using balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide you an ideal listening envir- onment in all occupied seats. 1 T ouch FADER/BALANCE on the audio function menu. Audio Adjustments En 78 Section 17
2 T ouch or to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Each time you touch or it moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FRONT 25 to REAR 25 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . 3 T ouch or to adjust left/right speaker balance. Each time you touch or it moves the lef t/ right speaker balance towards the lef t or the right. LEFT 25 to RIGHT 25 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from lef t to right. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad- just. 2 T ouch SOURCE LEVEL ADJUSTER on the audio function menu. 3 T ouch or to adjust the source vo- lume. Each time you touch or it increases or decreases the source volume. 14dB to âÂÂ14dB is displayed as the source vo - lume is increased or decreased. Notes ! Video CD, CD, compressed audio (MP3/WMA/ AAC) and DivX are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! DVD and the optional DVD player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . Using the direct control Y ou can override audio settings to check for ef- fectiveness of your audio settings. ! All audio functions are locked out when the direct control is on except VOLUME, Dolby PL II/EX and DTS Neo:6 . % T ouch Digital Direct on the audio func- tion menu to tur n the direct control on. # T o turn direct control off , touch Digital Direct again. Note When selecting 2-channel mode, the following occurs: ! If Digital Direct is turned on, output setting is switched to MCH automatically . If Digital Direct is turned off , output setting is returned to 2CH automatically . Listening in surround sound Using this unit, you can listen to any source in surround sound. However , the options avail- able will depend on your speaker setup and the type of source you are listening to. Y ou can select Dolby PL II/EX or DTS Neo:6. Audio Adjustments En 79 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
! When selecting 2CH (2-channel mode), you cannot use this function. (Refer to Switch- ing between the multi-channel output and 2-channel output on page 82.) ! If both the front center and the rear speak- ers are set to OFF, you cannot use this function. Recalling surround sound settings % T ouch Dolby/DTS on the audio function menu to select your favorite setting. T ouch Dolby/DTS repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings. OFF (off) âÂÂDolby PL II/EX (Dolby P ro Logic II/ EX) â DTS Neo:6 (DTS Neo:6) Using the Dolby Pro Logic II/EX Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth output channels from two -channel sources to achieve high-purity matrix surround. ! If both the center and the rear speakers are set to OFF, you cannot use this function. ! Dolby Pro Logic II supports up to 48kHz sampling rate stereo source and has no ef- fect on other types of source. 1 T ouch Dolby/DTS on the audio function menu to select Dolby PL II/EX. Refer to Recalling surr ound sound settings on this page. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to Dolby/DTS. 3 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the desired mode. ! MOVIE â The Movie mode suitable for movie playback ! MUSIC â The Music mode suitable for music playback ! MA TRIX â The Matrix mode for when FM radio reception is weak # Y ou can operate MUSIC ADJUSTMENT only when MUSIC has been selected. Adjusting the Music mode Y ou can adjust the Music mode with the fol- lowing three controls. ! P anorama ( P ANORAMA ) extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting â wraparound â ef- fect. ! Dimension ( DIMENSION ) allows you to gradually adjust the sound field either to- wards the front or the rear . ! Center Width Control ( CENTER WIDTH ) al- lows center-channel sounds to be posi- tioned between the center speaker and the left/right speakers. It improves the left-cen- ter-right stage presentation for both the dri- ver and the front passenger . 1 T ouch MUSIC to adjust music mode. Refer to Using the Dolby P ro L ogic II/EX on this page. 2 T ouch P ANORAMA to turn the Panora- ma control on. # T o turn the P anorama control off , touch P ANORAMA again. 3 T ouch or to adjust DIMENSION (di- mension). Each time you touch or it moves the sound towards the front or the surrounds. 3 to âÂÂ3 is displayed as the front/surround speaker balance moves from front to sur- rounds. 4 T ouch or to adjust CENTER WIDTH (center width control). Each time you touch or it gradually spreads the center channel sound into the front lef t and right speakers over a range 0 to 7 . Audio Adjustments En 80 Section 17
3 is the default and it âÂÂs recommended for most recordings. 0 places all center sound in the center speaker . 7 places all center sound equally in the lef t/right speakers. Using the DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources. 1 T ouch Dolby/DTS on the audio function menu to select DTS Neo:6. Refer to Recalling surr ound sound settings on the previous page. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to Dolby/DTS. 3 T ouch either of the following touch panel keys to select the desired mode. ! CINEMA â The Cinema mode suitable for movie playback ! MUSIC â The Music mode suitable for music playback # Y ou can operate MUSIC ADJUSTMENT only when MUSIC has been selected. # With the DTS Neo:6, audio and voice from TV or radio may be breaking up. In such case, we re- commend you to turn the DTS Neo:6 off . Adjusting the Music mode In music mode, you can adjust the center image to create a wider stereo effect with vo - cals. Adjust the effect from 0 (all center chan- nel sent to front right and left speakers) to 10 (center channel sent to the center speaker only). 1 T ouch MUSIC to adjust music mode. Refer to Using the DTS Neo:6 on this page. 2 T ouch or to adjust CENTER IMAGE (center image). Each time you touch or it gradually spreads the center channel sound into the front lef t and right speakers over a range 10 to 0 . Using the dynamic range control The dynamic range refers to the difference be- tween the largest and sof test sounds. The dy- namic range control compresses this difference so that you can clearly hear sounds even at low volume levels. ! The dynamic range control is effective only on Dolby Digital sounds. ! The dynamic range control may produce lit- tle effect on certain discs. % T ouch DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL on the audio function menu to turn the dy- namic range control on. # T o turn dynamic range control off , touch DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL again. Using the down-mix function The down-mix function allows you to play back multi-channel audio in 2 channels. % T ouch DOWN MIX on the audio func- tion menu to switch the setting. ! Lt/Rt â Down mix so that the surround components can be restored (decoded). ! Lo/Ro â Stereo mix the original audio that do not contain channel modes such as sur- round components. Audio Adjustments En 81 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
Switching the sound settings Y ou can switch the acoustic sound field stored in this unit according to the source you are lis- tening to. F or detailed instructions on creating the acoustic sound field, refer to Introduction of sound settings on the next page. % T ouch SOUND SETTING on the audio function menu to switch the sound setting. T ouch SOUND SETTING repeatedly to switch between the following settings: SETTING1 (user setting 1) âÂÂSETTING2 (user setting 2) â SETTING3 (user setting 3) â AUTO (setting created by auto T A & EQ) # Y ou can also switch the sound setting by pressing SOUND SETTING. # Y ou cannot select AUTO when NETWORK has been selected. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) # When ST ANDARD has been selected, you cannot select AUTO if Auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. Switching between the multi-channel output and 2-channel output Y ou can switch the output channel between the multi-channel output and 2-channel out- put according to the source you are listening to. ! Selecting 2CH changes the audio settings as below: â Both the front center and rear center speakers are turned off automatically in the speaker setting. (Refer to page 87.) â Both Dolby Pro Logic II/EX and DTS Neo:6 switch to OFF. (Refer to page 79.) % T ouch 2CH/Multi CH on the audio func- tion menu to switch the mode. T ouch 2CH/Multi CH repeatedly until the de- sired mode appears in the display . ! MCH â Multi-channel audio output ! 2CH â 2-channel audio output (stereo) # Y ou can also switch the output setting by pressing 2ch/MUL TI-CH . Audio Adjustments En 82 Section 17
Introduction of sound settings 1 1 1 1 Sound setting display Shows the sound setting function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU to display the audio function names. The audio function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to SOUND SETTING to display the sound setting function names. The sound setting function names are dis- played. # AUTO cannot be customized. When AUTO is selected, select the other sound settings by touching SOUND SETTING. 3 T ouch any of SETTING1, SETTING2 or SETTING3 to select the sound setting to be adjusted. 4 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Sound setting function display T ouching the sound setting selection keys en- ables you to cross-refer the other adjustments. Even in the adjustment screen, it is possible to refer and set another setting menus. 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 Sound setting selection keys T ouch to recall the desired sound setting function. 2 Sound setting function display Shows the adjustment screen of the se- lected sound setting function. Using the position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. The position selector function lets you automati- cally adjust the speaker output levels and in- serts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. 1 T ouch POSITION on the sound setting menu. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select a listening position. ! FRONT LEFT â Front seat left ! FRONT RIGHT â F ront seat right ! FRONT â Front seats ! ALL â All seats Audio Adjustments En 83 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
# T o cancel the selected listening position, touch OFF . Note When you make adjustments to the listening po- sition, the speaker outputs are automatically set for appropriate levels. Y ou can tailor the levels more precisely referring to Adjusting the speaker output levels on page 90. Recalling equalizer curves The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. There are eight stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves: Display Equalizer curve SUPER BASS (S. BASS) Super bass POWERFUL P ower ful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal FLA T Flat CUSTOM1 Custom 1 CUSTOM2 Custom 2 CUSTOM3 Custom 3 ! CUSTOM1 , CUSTOM2 and CUSTOM3 are adjusted equalizer cur ves. ! When FLA T is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. When selecting multi-channel mode % T ouch P ARAMETRIC EQ on the sound setting menu to select the equalizer . T ouch P ARAMETRIC EQ repeatedly to switch between the following equalizers: POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂFLA T â CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂCUSTOM3 â LAST MEMORY âÂÂSUPER BASS (S. BASS) # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted equalizer cur ve is not memorized in this unit. When selecting 2-channel mode % T ouch GRAPHIC EQ on the sound set- ting menu to select the equalizer . T ouch GRAPHIC EQ repeatedly to switch be- tween the following equalizers: POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂFLA T â CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂCUSTOM3 â LAST MEMORY âÂÂSUPER BASS (S. BASS) # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted equalizer cur ve is not memorized in this unit. Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer F or custom equalizer cur ves ( CUSTOM1 to CUSTOM3 ), you can adjust the front, rear , front center and rear center equalizer cur ves separately by selecting a center frequency, an equalizer level, and a Q factor for each band. ! A separate CUSTOM1 cur ve can be cre- ated for each source. ! CUSTOM2 and CUSTOM3 cur ves can be created common to all sources. Audio Adjustments En 84 Section 17
! The center speaker largely determines the sound image and getting the balance right isn âÂÂt easy . We recommend reproducing a 2- ch. audio (a CD for example) and getting the balance right among the speakers ex- cept for the center , and then reproducing a 5.1-ch. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and ad- justing the center speaker output to the balance you have already got among the other spea kers. 1 T ouch ADJ. next to P ARAMETRIC EQ on the sound setting menu. 2 T ouch LR Common/LR Independent to switch the equalizer adjustment method. ! LR Common â Adjusts left and right speak- ers simultaneously . ! LR Independent â Adjusts lef t and right speakers separately . 3 T ouch EQ to select the equalizer . T ouch EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂFLA T â CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂCUSTOM3 â LAST MEMORY âÂÂSUPER BASS (S. BASS) # Y ou can also select the equalizer by using EQUALIZER LIST . # T o close the equalizer cur ve list, touch CLOSE. # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted equalizer cur ve is not memorized in this unit. 4 T ouch or next to SPEAKER to select the speaker to be adjusted. T ouch or until the desired speaker appears in the display . FRONT LEFT (front lef t speaker) â FRONT RIGHT (front right speaker) â REAR LEFT (rear lef t speaker) âÂÂREAR RIGHT (rear right speaker) â FRONT CENTER (front center speaker) â REAR CENTER (rear center speaker) # Y ou can mute the selected speaker unit by touching . T o cancel muting, touch . # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . 5 T ouch BAND to select the equalizer band to be adjusted. Each time you touch BAND it selects equalizer bands in the following order: LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) â HIGH (high) 6 T ouch or to select the center fre- quency of selected band. T ouch or until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display . 40 âÂÂ50 âÂÂ63 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ100 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ160 âÂÂ200 â 250 âÂÂ315 âÂÂ400 âÂÂ500 âÂÂ630 âÂÂ800 âÂÂ1k â 1.25k âÂÂ1.6k âÂÂ2k âÂÂ2.5k âÂÂ3.15k âÂÂ4k âÂÂ5k â 6.3k âÂÂ8k âÂÂ10k âÂÂ12.5k (Hz) # Y ou can select a center frequency from among 20 frequencies for each band. Y ou can change the center frequency in 1/3-octave steps, but you cannot select frequencies that have inter- vals shorter than 1 octave among the center fre- quencies of the three bands. 7 T ouch or to adjust the equalizer level. Each time you touch or it increases or decreases the equalizer level. 12dB â âÂÂ12dB is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. # When you adjust the speaker loudness with selecting LR Common , the equalizer levels of both side speakers are changed simultaneously . Thus, if the equalizer level of one speaker is at maximum or minimum, the level of the other speaker is at full limit in opposite direction. 8 T ouch Q.Fac to select the desired Q fac- tor . Each time you touch Q.Fac it switches be- tween the following Q factor: 1.2 (wide) â 3.6 (narrow) Audio Adjustments En 85 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
# Y ou can adjust parameters for each band of the other speakers in the same way. Note Y ou can store the adjusted setting in memor y by using MEMOR Y . For details concerning opera- tion, refer to Storing the adjusted audio settings in memor y on page 91. Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer F or custom equalizer cur ves ( CUSTOM1 to CUSTOM3 ), you can adjust the level of each band. ! A separate CUSTOM1 cur ve can be cre- ated for each source. ! CUSTOM2 and CUSTOM3 cur ves can be created common to all sources. 1 T ouch ADJ. next to GRAPHIC EQ on the sound setting menu. 2 T ouch LR Common/LR Independent to switch the equalizer adjustment method. ! LR Common â Adjusts left and right speak- ers simultaneously . ! LR Independent â Adjusts lef t and right speakers separately . 3 T ouch EQ to select the equalizer . T ouch EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂFLA T â CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂCUSTOM3 â LAST MEMORY âÂÂSUPER BASS (S. BASS) # Y ou can also select the equalizer by using EQUALIZER LIST . # T o close the equalizer cur ve list, touch CLOSE. # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted equalizer cur ve is not memorized in this unit. 4 T ouch or next to SPEAKER to select the speaker to be adjusted. T ouch or until the desired speaker appears in the display . LEFT (lef t spea kers) âÂÂRIGHT (right speakers) # Y ou can mute the selected speaker units by touching . T o cancel muting, touch . 5 T ouch or to select the equalizer band to be adjusted. T ouch or until the desired equalizer band appears in the display . 50 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ200 âÂÂ315 âÂÂ500 âÂÂ800 âÂÂ1.25k â 2kâ 3.15kâ 5kâ 8kâ 12.5k (Hz) 6 T ouch or to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Each time you touch or it increases or decreases the level of the equalization band. 12dB â âÂÂ12dB is displayed as the level is in- creased or decreased. # When you adjust the speaker loudness with selecting LR Common , the equalizer levels of both side speakers are changed simultaneously . Thus, if the equalizer level of one speaker is at maximum or minimum, the level of the other speaker is at full limit in opposite direction. # Y ou can then select another band and adjust the level. Note Y ou can store the adjusted setting in memor y by using MEMOR Y . For details concerning opera- tion, refer to Storing the adjusted audio settings in memor y on page 91. Audio Adjustments En 86 Section 17
Setting the speaker setting Y ou can make a fine adjustment on each speaker installed in your vehicle. Y ou can change the size of each speaker according to the speaker specification. On a spot at which a speaker is not installed, you can set the ad- justment to OFF. The adjustment you made will be memorized into this unit and you can recall it. Recalling speaker settings % T ouch SPEAKER SETTING on the sound setting menu to select the speaker setting. T ouch SPEAKER SETTING repeatedly to switch between the following speaker settings: CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂCUSTOM3 âÂÂAUTO â LAST MEMORY # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted speaker setting is not memorized in this unit. # Y ou cannot select AUTO when NETWORK has been selected. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) # When ST ANDARD has been selected, you cannot select AUTO if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. Customizing the speaker setting Y ou need to make with/without (or yes/no) and size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/ad- justments depending on the installed speak- ers. The size needs to be set to LARGE (large) if the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds of about 100 Hz or below . Other wise select SMALL (small). ! Low frequency range is not output if the subwoofer is set to OFF and the front and rear speakers set to SMALL or OFF . ! It is imperative that non-installed speakers be set to OFF. ! Set the front or rear speaker to LARGE if the speaker is capable of reproducing bass content, or if no subwoofer is installed. 1 Recall the speaker setting you want to adjust. Refer to Recalling speak er settings on this page. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to SPEAKER SETTING on the sound setting menu. 3 T ouch or to select the correct size for the speaker . Each time you touch or it selects the size in the following order: OFF (off) âÂÂSMALL (small) âÂÂLARGE (large) # Y ou cannot select OFF in the front speaker set- ting. # Y ou can turn ON or OFF in the subwoofer set- ting. # When the rear speaker setting is set to OFF , the rear center speakers switch to OFF automati- cally . Note Y ou can store the adjusted setting in memor y by using MEMOR Y . For details concerning opera- tion, refer to Storing the adjusted audio settings in memor y on page 91. Using the cut-off frequency Y ou can adjust the cut- off frequency and slope to match the characteristics of each speaker unit. And then you can store the adjusted cut- off frequency in this unit for later recall. Audio Adjustments En 87 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
Recalling cut-off frequency settings % T ouch CUT OFF on the sound setting menu to select the cut-off frequency set- ting. T ouch CUT OFF repeatedly to switch between the following cut- off frequency settings: CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂCUSTOM3 âÂÂAUTO â LAST MEMORY # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted cut- off frequency setting is not memor- ized in this unit. # Y ou cannot select AUTO when NETWORK has been selected. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) # When ST ANDARD has been selected, you cannot select AUTO if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. Selecting a cut-off frequency Y ou can select a frequency , under which sounds are reproduced through the subwoo - fer . If the installed speakers include one whose size has been set to SMALL, you can select a frequency , under which sounds are repro - duced through a LARGE speaker or subwoo- fer . 1 Recall the cut-off frequency setting you want to adjust. Refer to Recalling cut- off frequency settings on this page. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to CUT OFF on the sound setting menu. 3 T ouch the speaker to be adjusted. # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF or LARGE . 4 T ouch or to adjust parameters of the selected speak er unit (filter). Adjustable parameters and ranges are differ- ent depending on each speaker unit (filter). Parameter What it does FREQUENCY Selects cut-off freque ncies in the fol- lowing order: 50 âÂÂ63 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ100 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ160 âÂÂ200 (Hz) SLOPE Selects slopes in the following order: 18 â 12 â 6 (dB/oct.) When subwoofer is selected Parameter What it does FREQUENCY Selects cut-off freque ncies in the fol- lowing order: 50 âÂÂ63 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ100 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ160 âÂÂ200 (Hz) SLOPE Selects slopes in the following order: â 18 â â 12 â â 6 â 0 (pass) (dB/oct .) PHASE Switches the phase between NOR- MAL and REVER SE . When tweeter is selected in the network mode Parameter What it does FREQUENCY Selects cut-off freque ncies in the fol- lowing order: 1.25k âÂÂ1.6k âÂÂ2k âÂÂ2.5k âÂÂ3.15k âÂÂ4k â 5kâ 6.3kâ 8kâ 10kâ 12.5k (Hz) SLOPE Selects slopes in the following order: 12 â 6 (dB/oct.) When front speaker HPF is selected in the network mode Parameter What it does FREQUENCY Selects cut-off frequenc ies in the following order: 50 âÂÂ63 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ100 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ16 0 âÂÂ200 (Hz) SLOPE Audio Adjustments En 88 Section 17
Parameter What it does Selects slopes in the following order: 18 â 12 â 6 (dB/oct.) T o switch the filter of the front speaker between LPF and HPF , touch HIGH or LOW . When front speaker LPF is selected in the network mode Parameter What it does FREQUENCY Selects cut-off freque ncies in the fol- lowing order: 1.25k âÂÂ1.6k âÂÂ2k âÂÂ2.5k âÂÂ3.15k âÂÂ4k â 5kâ 6.3kâ 8kâ 10kâ 12.5k (Hz) SLOPE Selects slopes in the following order: â 12 â â 6 âÂÂ0 (pass) (dB/oct.) # Y ou can mute the selected speaker unit by touching MUTE OFF. T o cancel muting, touch MUTE ON . Notes ! Selecting cut-off frequencies sets cut-off fre- quencies of the subwoofer âÂÂs L.P .F . (low-pass filter) and that of the SMALL speaker H .P .F . (high-pass filter). The cut-off frequency setting has no effect if the subwoofer is set to OFF and other speakers are set to LARGE or OFF . ! If tr ying to boost the bass output of the sub- woofer doesn âÂÂt do much or rather makes you feel that the bass gets more murky , this may indicate that the subwoofer âÂÂs output and bass content you hear over other speakers cancel each other out. T o remove this problem, tr y changing the phase setting for the subwoofer . ! Y ou can store the adjusted setting in memor y by using MEMORY . F or details concerning op- eration, refer to Storing the adjusted audio set- tings in memor y on page 91. Using the time alignment The time alignment lets you adjust the dis- tance between each speaker and the listening position. Recalling time alignment settings % T ouch TIME ALIGNMENT on the sound setting menu to select the time alignment. T ouch TIME ALIGNMENT repeatedly to switch between the following time alignment set- tings: INITIAL âÂÂAUTO âÂÂCUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 â CUSTOM3 âÂÂLAST MEMOR Y âÂÂOFF # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted time alignment setting is not memorized in this unit. # Y ou cannot select AUTO when NETWORK has been selected. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) # When ST ANDARD has been selected, you cannot select AUTO if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. Adjusting the time alignment Y ou can adjust the distance between each speaker and the selected position. ! An adjusted time alignment can be memor- ized in CUSTOM1, CUSTOM2 or CUSTOM3 . 1 Recall the time alignment setting you want to adjust. Refer to Recalling time alignment settings on this page. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to TIME ALIGNMENT on the sound setting menu. # Y ou cannot adjust the time alignment when neither FRONT LEFT nor FRONT RIGHT is se- lected in the position selector mode. Audio Adjustments En 89 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
3 T ouch or to adjust the distance be- tween each speaker and the listening posi- tion. Each time you touch or it increases or de- creases the distance. 0.0cm to 500.0cm is dis- played as the distance is increased or decreased. # Y ou can mute the selected speaker unit by touching MUTE. T o cancel muting, touch MUTE again. # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . Note Y ou can store the adjusted setting in memor y by using MEMOR Y . For details concerning opera- tion, refer to Storing the adjusted audio settings in memor y on the next page. Adjusting the speaker output levels Y ou can adjust the speaker output level of each speaker unit. Recalling the speaker output level settings % T ouch SPEAKER LEVEL on the sound setting menu to select the speaker output level setting. T ouch SPEAKER LEVEL repeatedly to switch between the following speaker output level set- tings: CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂCUSTOM3 âÂÂAUTO â LAST MEMORY # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted speaker output level setting is not mem- orized in this unit. # Y ou cannot select AUTO when NETWORK has been selected. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) # When ST ANDARD has been selected, you cannot select AUTO if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone This function allows you to easily get the over- all balance right among the speakers. 1 Recall the speaker output level settings you want to adjust. Refer to Recalling the speak er output level set- tings on this page. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to SPEAKER LEVEL on the sound setting menu and then touch TEST TONE. The test tone is outputted. It rotates from speaker to speaker in the following sequence at inter vals of about two seconds. The current settings for the speaker over which you hear the test tone are shown in the display . F ront lef t speaker âÂÂF ront center speaker â F ront right speaker âÂÂRear right spea ker âÂÂRear center speaker âÂÂRear left speaker âÂÂSubwoo- fer Check each speaker output level. If no adjust- ments are needed, per form step 4 to stop the test tone. # Using TEST TONE , the tweeters and the front speakers are adjusted same time. T o adjust them separately , please refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels finely on the next page. # The settings do not appear for speakers whose size is set OFF . 3 T ouch or to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch or it increases or de- creases the speaker output level. â 24dB to 10dB is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Audio Adjustments En 90 Section 17
# The test tone rotates to the next speaker after about two seconds from the last operation. 4 T ouch STOP to stop the test tone out- put. Notes ! If needed, select speakers and adjust their âÂÂab- solute â output levels. (Refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels on the previous page.) ! Y ou can store the adjusted setting in memor y by using MEMORY . F or details concerning op- eration, refer to Storing the adjusted audio set- tings in memor y on this page. ! The adjusted speaker output level cannot be stored by each listening position. This means, memorizing a speaker output level for custom setting over writes the levels of all listening po- sitions. Adjusting the speaker output levels finely Y ou can readjust the speaker output levels using a test tone while listening to music. 1 Recall the speaker output level settings you want to adjust. Refer to Recalling the speak er output level set- tings on the previous page. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to SPEAKER LEVEL. 3 T ouch or to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch or it increases or de- creases the speaker output level. â 24dB to 10dB is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . Notes ! Y ou can store the adjusted setting in memor y by using MEMORY . F or details concerning op- eration, refer to Storing the adjusted audio set- tings in memor y on this page. ! The adjusted speaker output level cannot be stored by each listening position. This means, memorizing a speaker output level for custom setting over writes the levels of all listening positions. Using the auto-equalizer Y ou can use this function only when ST ANDARD has been selected. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) The auto-equalizer is the equalizer cur ve cre- ated by auto T A and EQ (refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto -time alignment and auto-equalizing) on the next page). Y ou can turn the auto-equalizer on or off . 1 T ouch AUTO EQ on the sound setting menu. # Y ou cannot use this function if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. 2 T ouch ON to turn the auto-equalizer on. # T o turn auto -equalizer off , touch OFF . Storing the adjuste d audio settings in memor y Y ou can store the adjusted audio settings in this unit for later recall. 1 T ouch MEMORY. 2 T ouch any of CUSTOM1, CUSTOM2 or CUSTOM3 to store the adjusted setting. Audio Adjustments En 91 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
3 T ouch YES to store the current setting into the selected sound setting. # T o cancel the storage process, touch NO. Editing the name of sound settings The name displayed for sound settings ( SETTING1 , SETTING2 and SETTING3 ) can be changed. ! Each name can be up to 10 characters long. 1 T ouch any of SETTING1, SETTING2 or SETTING3 on the sound setting menu. 2 T ouch NAME EDIT. 3 T ouch the letter you wish to input. Key What it does Moves the cursor to the previous charac- ter pos ition. Moves the cursor to the next character po - sition. Inputs the space. ABC /123 Switches keypad between alphabet and numeric. Deletes letter by letter from the end of the text. 4 T ouch MEMORY to store the entered name in memory . Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto- equalizing) Y ou can use this function only when ST ANDARD has been selected. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) The auto-time alignment is automatically ad- justed for the distance between each speaker and the listening position. The auto-equalizer automatically measures the car interior acoustic characteristics, and then creates the auto -equalizer cur ve based on that information. WARNING T o prevent accidents, never carr y out auto T A and EQ while driving. When this function measures the car interior acoustic characteristics to create an auto-equalizer cur ve, a loud measurement tone (noise) may be outputted from the speakers. CAUTION ! Carr ying out auto T A and EQ under the follow- ing conditions may damage the speakers. Be sure to check the conditions thoroughly be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. â When speakers are incorrectly connected. (e.g., When a rear speaker is connected to a subwoofer output.) â When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speaker âÂÂs maximum input power capabil- ity . ! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measurement tone may become loud and measurement may take a long time, resulting in a drain on batter y power . Be sure to place the microphone in the specified loca- tion. Audio Adjustments En 92 Section 17
Before operating the auto T A and EQ function ! Carr y out auto T A and EQ in as quiet a place as possible, with the car engine and air conditioning switched off . Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car , or remove them from the car be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. Sounds other than the measurement tone (sur- rounding sounds, engine sound, tele- phones ringing etc.) may prevent correct measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! Be sure to carr y out auto T A and EQ using the supplied microphone. Using another microphone may prevent measurement, or result in incorrect measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! When front speaker is not connected, auto T A and EQ cannot be carried out. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with input level control, auto T A and EQ may not be possible if you lower power amp input level. Set the power amp âÂÂs input level to the standard position. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with an LPF , turn off the LPF on the power amp before carr ying out auto T A and EQ. In addition, the cut-off frequency for built-in LPF of an active subwoofer should be set to the highest frequency . ! The time alignment value calculated by auto T A and EQ may differ from the actual distance in the following circumstances. However , the distance has been calculated by computer to be the optimum delay to give accurate results for the circum- stances, so please continue to use this value. â When the reflected sound within a vehi- cle is strong and delays occur . â When delays occur for low sounds due to the influence of the LPF on active subwoofers or external amps. ! Auto T A and EQ changes the audio settings as below: â The fader/balance settings return to the center position. (Refer to page 78.) â The equalizer cur ve switches to FLA T . (Refer to page 84.) â It will be adjusted automatically to high pass filter setting for front, center and rear speaker . ! If you carr y out auto T A and EQ when a pre- vious setting of this already exists, the set- ting will be replaced. Carrying out auto T A and EQ 1 Stop the car in a place that is as quiet as possible, close all doors, windows and the sun roof, and then tur n the engine off. If the engine is left running, engine noise may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. 2 Fix the supplied microphone in the cen- ter of the headrest of the driver â s seat, fa- cing forward, using the belt (sold separately). The auto T A and EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone. If desired, place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carr y out auto T A and EQ. Audio Adjustments En 93 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
3 T ur n the ignition switch to ON or ACC. If the car âÂÂs air conditioner or heater is turned on, turn it off . Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. 4 Press SOURCE to turn the source off if this unit is tur ned on. 5 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 6 T ouch AV MENU and then touch AUTO EQ&T A to enter the auto T A and EQ measurement mode. 7 T ouch either of the following touch panel keys to select the position for the seat on which the microphone is placed. ! FRONT LEFT â Front seat left ! FRONT RIGHT â F ront seat right 8 T ouch NEXT. 9 Plug the AUTO T A&EQ microphone into the microphone/auxiliary input jack on this unit. AUTO T A&EQ microphone 10 T ouch ST ART to start the auto T A and EQ. 11 Get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds when the 10-second count-down starts. The measurement tone (noise) is outputted from the speakers, and auto T A and EQ be- gins. # When all speakers are connected, auto T A and EQ is completed in about 14 minutes. # T o stop auto T A and EQ, touch STOP . # T o cancel auto T A and EQ part way through, touch BACK or ESC . 12 When auto T A and EQ is completed, Complete is displayed. When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible, an error message is displayed. (Refer to Under- standing auto T A and EQ error messages on page 113.) 13 T ouch ESC to cancel the auto T A and EQ mode. 14 Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment. Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or any other safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for an extended period, high temperatures may cause distortion, color change or mal- function. Audio Adjustments En 94 Section 17
Introduction of setup adjustments 1 1 1 1 Setup menu display Shows the setup function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch SETUP to display the setup function names. The setup function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Setting the A V input Y ou can connect up to two AV components to this unit and display videos either on AV source or S-DVD source. Switch the AV input setting depending on the connected AV components. ! Select VIDEO to watch video of a con- nected component as AV source. ! Select S-DVD to watch video of a con- nected DVD player as S-DVD source. ! Select B.UP CAMERA to watch a rear view camera video while you are backing your vehicle. When A V component is connected to A V input 1 % T ouch AV INPUT 1 on the setup menu to select the AV input 1 setting. T ouch A V INPUT 1 until the desired setting is selected. ! OFF â No video component is connected ! VIDEO â External video component (such as portable video player) ! S-DVD â DVD player connected with RCA cable # When a DVD player is connected with an AV - BUS cable, do not select S-DVD other wise no pic- ture will be displayed even if you select S-DVD as a source. When A V component is connected to A V input 2 % T ouch AV INPUT 2 on the setup menu to select your desired setting. T ouch A V INPUT 2 until the desired setting is selected. ! OFF â No video component is connected ! VIDEO â External video component (such as portable video player) ! B.UP CAMERA â Rear view camera When rear view camera is connected to A V input 2 CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images, other- wise screen image may appear reversed. Y ou can install a rear view camera onto the AV input 2 and display a rear view camera video. When the gear shif t is in REVERSE (R) posi- tion, the video automatically switches to a rear view camera video. (F or more details, consult your dealer .) Setup En 95 Section 18 Setup
! After you set up the rear view camera set- ting, move the gear shift in REVERSE (R) and confirm if a rear view camera video can be shown on the display . ! If the display should be switched to a rear view camera video by error while you are driving forward, change the rear view cam- era setting. ! T o end watching a rear view camera video and return to the source display , press V .ADJUST . 1 T ouch AV INPUT 2 on the setup menu to select B.UP CAMERA. 2 T ouch B. CAMERA POLARITY on the setup menu to select an appropriate set- ting for polarity . Each time you touch B. CAMERA POLARITY it switches between the following polarity: ! BA TTER Y â When the polarity of the con- nected lead is positive while the gear shif t is in REVERSE (R) position ! GROUND â When the polarity of the con- nected lead is negative while the gear shif t is in REVERSE (R) position Setting the automatic open function T o prevent the display from hitting the shif t lever of an automatic vehicle when it is in P (park) position, or when you do not wish the display to open/close automatically , you can set the automatic open function in the manual mode. % T ouch AUTO FLAP on the setup menu to select the display to open/close automa- tically or manually . Each time you touch AUTO FLAP it switches between the following settings: ! AUTO â The LCD panel will be opened or closed automatically with the turning of the ignition switch on or off ! MANUAL â Y ou have to press OPEN/CLOSE to open/close the LCD panel Adjusting the LCD panel slide position Y ou can adjust the LCD panel slide position so that the panel is set back or for ward. % T ouch FLAP SET BACK on the setup menu to tur n the set back on. The LCD panel slides to the back. # T ouch FLAP SET BACK again to turn the set back off and the LCD panel slides to the front. Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. 1 T ouch CLOCK ADJUSTMENT on the setup menu. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to set the clock. # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 3 T ouch ENTER. Note T ouching 24h/ 12h switches the clock display on the sub-display between 12/24-hour formats. Setup En 96 Section 18
Setting the video of rear display Y ou can select either showing the same source as the front display or showing the video source on rear display independently . ! When selecting FRONT and the selected source is an audio source, nothing is dis- played on the rear display . ! When selecting FRONT, audio is not out- putted from REAR DISPLA Y OUT . % T ouch REAR MODE on the setup menu to select the video on rear display . Each time you touch REAR MODE it switches between the following settings: ! FRONT â Display the same source as the front display ! SEP ARA TE â Display the video source on rear display independently of front dis- play Switching the dimmer setting for sub-display T o prevent the sub-display from being too bright at night, the sub-display is automati- cally dimmed when the car âÂÂs headlights are turned on. Y ou can turn dimmer on or off . % T ouch SUB DISPLA Y DIMMER on the setup menu to tur n dimmer on. # T o turn dimmer off , touch SUB DISPLA Y DIMMER again. Adjusting the contrast for the sub-displ ay Display contrast adjustment lets you adjust the display for easier viewing when lighting conditions change. % Press SUB DISPLA Y CONTRAST on the setup menu to switch the contrast setting. Each time you touch SUB DISPLA Y CONTRAST it switches between HIGH (high contrast) and LOW (low contras- t). Changing languages for CAUTION Some operations on this unit are prohibited while driving or needs to be paid a careful at- tention when operating. In such case, a cau- tion appears on the display . Y ou can change the language of the cautions at this setting. 1 T ouch CAUTION LANGUAGE on the setup menu. 2 T ouch the desired language. The language for CAUTION is set. Setup En 97 Section 18 Setup
Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 1 1 1 Y ou can use this menu to change audio, subti- tle, parental lock and other DVD settings. ! When watching a DVD/Video CD on the rear display independently, you cannot op- erate this menu . 1 DVD setup menu display Shows the DVD setup menu names. 1 While playing a disc, touch A V MENU and then touch DVD SETUP to display the DVD setup function names. The DVD setup function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Setting the subtitle language Y ou can set a desired subtitle language. If the selected subtitle language is recorded on the DVD, subtitles are displayed in that language. 1 T ouch SUB TITLE LANGUAGE on the DVD setup menu. A subtitle language menu is displayed. 2 T ouch the desired language. A subtitle language is set. # If you have selected Others , refer to When you select Others on this page. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is displayed. ! Y ou can also switch the subtitle language by touching SUBTITLE during playback. (Refer to Changing the subtitle language during play- back (Multi-subtitle) on page 34.) ! Even if you use SUBTITLE during playback to switch the subtitle language, this does not af- fect the settings here. When you select Others When you select Others, a language code input display is shown. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 120 to input the four- digit code of the desired language. 1 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the language code. # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 2 T ouch ENTER. Setting the audio language Y ou can set the preferred audio language. 1 T ouch AUDIO LANGUAGE on the DVD setup menu. An audio language menu is displayed. 2 T ouch the desired language. The audio language is set. # If you have selected Others , refer to When you select Others on this page. Setting up the DVD player En 98 Section 19
Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is outputted. ! Y ou can also switch the audio language by touching AUDIO during playback. (Refer to Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) on page 34.) ! Even if you use AUDIO during playback to switch the audio language, this does not af- fect the settings here. Setting the menu language Y ou can set the preferred language for dis- plays of menus recorded on a disc. 1 T ouch MENU LANGUAGE on the DVD setup menu. A menu language menu is displayed. 2 T ouch the desired language. The menu language is set. # If you have selected Others , refer to When you select Others on the previous page. Note If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is dis- played. Switching the assist subtitle on or off If assist subtitles are recorded on a DVD disc, you can display them by turning the assist subtitle function on. Y ou can turn assist subtitles on or off as de- sired. % T ouch ASSIST SUB TITLE on the DVD setup menu to tur n assist subtitles on. # T o turn the assist subtitle off , touch ASSIST SUB TITLE again. Setting the angle icon display Y ou can set it up so that the angle icon ap- pears on scenes where the angle can be switched. % T ouch MUL TI ANGLE on the DVD setup menu to tur n angle icon display on. # T o turn the angle icon display off , touch MUL TI ANGLE again. Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display . A wide screen display has a width-to -height ratio (TV aspect) of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display connected to REAR DISPLA Y OUT . ! When using a regular display , select either LETTER BOX or P AN SCAN . Selecting 16:9 may result in an unnatural picture. ! If you select the TV aspect, the unit âÂÂs dis- play changes to the same setting. % T ouch TV ASPECT on the DVD setup menu to select the TV aspect. T ouch TV ASPECT repeatedly until the desired TV aspect appears in the display . ! 16:9 â Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis- played as it is (initial setting) ! LETTER BOX â The picture is the shape of a letterbox with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen ! P AN SCAN â The picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen Setting up the DVD player En 99 Section 19 Setting up the DVD player
Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify P AN SCAN , playback is with LETTER BOX even if you select P AN SCAN setting. Confirm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark. (See page 12.) ! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc âÂÂs in- structions. Setting the parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict children from viewing violent and adult- oriented scenes. Y ou can set the par- ental lock to your desired level. ! When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock, code number input indications may be dis- played. In this case, playback will begin when the correct code number is input. Setting the code number and level Y ou need to have registered a code number for playing back discs with parantal lock. 1 T ouch P ARENT AL on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input a four digit code number . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 3 T ouch ENTER. The code number is set, and you can now set the level. 4 T ouch any of 1 âÂÂ8 to select the desired level. The parental lock level is set. ! 8 â Playback of the entire disc is possible (initial setting) ! 7 to 2 â Playback of discs for children and non-adult-oriented discs is possible ! 1 â Playback of discs for children only is possible Notes ! W e recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. ! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc. Look for the level indication written at the disc package, included literature or on the disc it- self . P arental lock of this unit is not possible if a parental lock level is not recorded in the disc. ! With some discs, the parental lock may be ac- tive only on the scenes with certain levels. The playback of those scenes will be skipped. For details, refer to the instruction manual that came with the discs. Changing the level Y ou can change the set parental lock level. 1 T ouch P ARENT AL on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the registered code number . 3 T ouch ENTER. This enters the code number , and you can now change the level. # If you input an incorrect code number , the icon is displayed. T ouch C and input the cor- rect code number . # If you forget your code number , refer to If you forget your code number on the next page. 4 T ouch any of 1 âÂÂ8 to select the desired level. The new parental lock level is set. Setting up the DVD player En 100 Section 19
If you forget your code number Refer to Changing the level on the previous page, and touch C 10 times. The registered code number is canceled, letting you register a new one. Setting the still picture The unit uses one of two processes when dis- playing a still picture from a DVD disc. % T ouch STILL PICTURE on the DVD setup menu to select the setting. T ouch STILL PICTURE repeatedly until the de- sired setting appears in the display . ! AUTO â FIELD or FRAME is selected auto - matically by this unit. ! FIELD â P roduces a stable, generally shake- free image. ! FRAME â P roduces a sharper image, but more prone to shake than field stills. T o play back bonus groups Some DVD audio discs have an extra âÂÂbonus â group that requires a four-digit password to access. See the disc packaging for details and the password. When you tr y and play the bonus group, the password input screen will automatically appear . ! The bonus group can be played back after the password has been entered, until the disc is removed from the unit. 1 T ouch BONUS GROUP on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input a four -digit pass- word. # If you input an incorrect password, touch C and then input the correct password. 3 T ouch ENTER. Displaying your DivX î VOD registration code In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider . Y ou do this by generating a DivX VOD registra- tion code, which you submit to your provider . % T ouch DivX VOD on the DVD setup menu. Y our 8-digit registration code is displayed. ! Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider . Setting remote control code type When the remote control operation switch is set to DVD, changing the remote control code type enables you to operate the P ioneer DVD player with the supplied remote control. There are three remote codes, code type A , code type B and code type AV H . When operating a multi-DVD player (e.g. XDV -P90), select code A . When operating this unit, select code AV H . 1 Set the remote control selection switch on the left side of the remote control to the appropriate position with a pen tip or other pointed instrument . ! If you select AV H mode, there is no need to take the following procedure. ! If you select A/ B mode, take the following procedure and change the code type to the appropriate type. 2 Press 7 and 0 on the remote control si- multaneously to change the code type. Initially , the code type is set to A. Each time you press 7 and 0 simultaneously on the re- mote control the code type switches between A and B . Setting up the DVD player En 101 Section 19 Setting up the DVD player
Adjusting initial settings 1 1 1 Using the initial settings, you can customize various system settings to achieve optimal per- formance from this unit. 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch OFF to tur n this unit off. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch AV MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . 4 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Note Y ou can use AUTO EQ&T A (auto- time alignment and auto-equalizing), only when ST ANDARD has been selected in DSP MODE . (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) Setting the FM tuning step The FM tuning step employed by seek tuning can be switched between 100 kHz, the preset step, and 50 kHz. % T ouch FM STEP on the initial menu to select the FM tuning step. T ouching FM STEP will switch the FM tuning step between 50 kHz and 100 kHz. The se- lected FM tuning step will appear in the dis- play . Note If seek tuning is per formed in 50 kHz steps, sta- tions may be tuned in imprecisely . T une in the sta- tions with manual tuning or use seek tuning again. Setting the AM tuning step The AM tuning step can be switched between 9 kHz, the preset step, and 10 kHz. When using the tuner in North, Central or South America, reset the tuning step from 9 kHz (531 kHz to 1 602 kHz allowable) to 10 kHz (530 kHz to 1 640 kHz allowable). % T ouch AM STEP on the initial menu to select the AM tuning step. T ouching AM STEP will switch the AM tuning step between 9 kHz and 10 kHz. The selected AM tuning step will appear in the display . Switching the war ning tone If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turni ng off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. Y ou can turn off the warning tone. Initial Settings En 102 Section 20
% T ouch DET ACH W ARNING on the initial menu to tur n war ning tone on. # T o turn warning tone off , touch DET ACH W ARNING again. Switching the auxiliary setting Auxiliar y equipments connected to this unit can be activated individually . Set each AUX source to ON when using. About connecting or using auxiliar y equipments, refer to Using the AUX sour ce on page 109. % T ouch AUX1/AUX2 on the initial menu to tur n each auxiliary setting on. # T o turn auxiliar y setting off , touch AUX1/ AUX2 again. Correcting distort ed sound Y ou can minimize distortion that may be caused by the equalizer cur ve settings. Setting an equalizer level high can cause dis- tortion. If high sound is crippled or distorted, tr y switching to LOW. Normally , leave the set- ting at HIGH to ensure quality sound. % T ouch DIGIT AL A TT on the initial menu to switch the digital attenuator setting. T ouch DIGIT AL A TT repeatedly until the de- sired setting appears in the display . ! HIGH â High quality sound ! LOW â Minimize distortion sound Switching the sound muting/attenuation Sound from this system is muted or attenu- ated autom atically when the signal from the equipment with mute function is received. ! Sound from this system returns to normal when the muting or attenuation is can- celed. % T ouch MUTE on the initial menu to se- lect any of the muting, attenuation or off. T ouch MUTE until the desired setting appears in the display . ! MUTE â Muting ! AT T â 10dB â Attenuation ! AT T â 20dB â Attenuation ( AT T â 20dB has a stronger effect than AT T â 10dB) ! OFF â T urn the sound muting/attenuation off Notes ! The sound is turned off , MUTE is displayed and no audio adjustments are possible. ! The sound is attenuated, AT T is displayed and no audio adjustments, except volume control, are possible. ! Operation returns to normal when the phone connection is ended. Switching the automatic disc playback Y ou can turn automatic disc playback on or off when you insert a disc into the disc loading slot. When this function is on, the disc will be automatically played af ter it is inserted into the disc loading slot. Initially , this function is set to on. Initial Settings En 103 Section 20 Initial Settings
% T ouch DVD DISC AUTO on the initial menu to tur n automatic disc playback on. # T o turn automatic disc playback off , touch DVD DISC AUTO again. Resetting the audio functions Y ou can reset all audio functions except vo- lume. Important If you per form this operation, audio settings are erased. F or this reason, we recommend that you record the settings in the sheet on page 121 after you have completed audio adjustments. 1 T ouch AUDIO RESET on the initial menu. 2 T ouch RESET. Proceed with reset? appears and asks you to confirm it. 3 T ouch RESET again to reset audio func- tions. Reset completed is displayed and the audio settings are reset. # T o cancel resetting the audio functions, touch CANCEL . Switching the DSP setting mode This unit features two operation modes: the network mode and the standard mode. Y ou can switch between modes as desired. Initi- ally , the DSP setting is set to the standard mode. ! Switching the DSP mode erases the cur- rent adjusting audio settings ( LAST MEMOR Y ). If needed, memorize it into custom settings ( CUSTOM1, CUSTOM2 or CUSTOM3 ). 1 T ouch DSP MODE on the initial menu. 2 T ouch either of the following touch panel keys to select the desired mode. ! ST ANDARD â Standard mode ! NETWORK â Network mode 3 T ouch CHANGE to change the mode. # T o cancel changing the mode, touch CANCEL . Setting the optical input When connecting a DVD player , select S-DVD. % T ouch OPTICAL INPUT on the initial menu to select the optical input setting. T ouch OPTICAL INPUT until the desired set- ting appears in the display . ! OFF â No DVD player is connected ! S-DVD â DVD player/multi-DVD player Setting the TV signal When this unit is connected to a TV tuner , you need to adjust the TV signal suitable to your countr y TV signal setting. ! This function is initially set to AUTO so that this unit automatically adjusts the TV signal setting. % T ouch TV FORMA T on the initial menu to select an appropriate TV signal. T ouching TV FORMA T switches TV signal set- tings in the following order: AUTO â PA L âÂÂNTSC âÂÂP AL-M âÂÂSECAM Initial Settings En 104 Section 20
Note About your countr y TV signal, consult with your nearest P ioneer dealer . Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection With some Bluetooth audio players, you may be required to enter to this unit in advance PIN code of your Bluetooth audio player , in order to set this unit ready for a connection from your Bluetooth audio player . ! Only when Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD - BTB100) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. 1 T ouch PIN EDIT on the initial menu. PIN code input display appears. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the PIN code of your Bluetooth audio player . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 3 After inputting PIN code (up to 16 di- gits), touch ENTER. The PIN code you entered is stored in this unit. Setting the security indicator The LED indicator (security indicator) will flash when front panel is detached from the head unit. Y ou can turn this indicator on or off . % T ouch SECURITY INDICA TOR on the in- itial menu to tur n security indicator on. # T o turn security indicator off , touch SECURITY INDICA TOR again. Initial Settings En 105 Section 20 Initial Settings
Switching the display on the sub-displ ay Y ou can switch between the displays on the sub-display . % Press 2ch/MUL TI-CH and hold to switch the display . P ress and hold 2ch/MUL TI-CH repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Source display âÂÂclock display âÂÂOFF Adjusting the screen Changing the wide screen mod e Y ou can select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one. % Press WIDE to select the desired set- ting. P ress WIDE repeatedly to switch between the following settings: FULL (full) âÂÂJUST (just) âÂÂCINEMA (cinema) â ZOOM (zoom) âÂÂNORMAL (normal) â AUTO (auto) FULL (full) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direc- tion only , giving you a 4:3 TV picture (normal pic- ture) without any omissions. JUST (just) The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and the amount of enlargement increases horizontally to the ends, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without sensing any disparity even on a wide screen. CINEMA (cinema) The picture is enlarged by the same proportion as FULL or ZOOM in the horizontal direction and by an intermediate proportion between FULL and ZOOM in the vertical direction; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture) where cap- tions lie outside. ZOOM (zoom) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion both vertically and horizontally ; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture). NORMAL (normal) A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no sense of disparity since its proportions are the same as that of the normal picture. AUTO (auto) In this mode, this unit selects the appropriate set- ting from among FULL , JUST, CINEMA , ZOOM or NORMAL automatically . Notes ! Different settings can be memorized for each video source. ! When video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original aspect ratio, it may appear different. ! Remember that using the wide mode feature of this system for commercial or public view- ing purposes may constitute an infringement on the author âÂÂs rights protected by the Copy- right Law . ! Video will appear grainy when viewed in CINEMA or ZOOM mode. Changing the picture adjustm ent Y ou can adjust BRIGHT (brightness), CONTRAST (contrast), COLOR (color) and HUE (hue) for each source and rear view cam- era. Other Functions En 106 Section 21
! The adjustments of BRIGHT and CONTRAST are stored separately for light ambient (daytime) and dark ambient (night- time). A sun or moon is displayed to the lef t of BRIGHT and CONTRAST, respec- tively , as the ambient light sensor deter- mines brightness or darkness. ! Y ou cannot adjust HUE for P AL video. ! Y ou cannot adjust COLOR or HUE for the audio source. 1 Press V .ADJUST to display PICTURE ADJUSTMENT. 2 T ouch or to adjust the following items. The adjustment function names are displayed and adjustable ones are highlighted. Each time you touch or it increases or de- creases the level of selected item. â 24 to 24 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. ! BRIGHT â Adjust the black intensity ! CONTRAST â Adjust the contrast ! COLOR â Adjust the color saturation ! HUE â Adjust the tone of color (red is em- phasized or green is emphasized) ! DIMMER â Adjust the brightness of display ! B.Camera /SOURCE â Switch the picture ad- justment modes # Y ou can adjust the picture adjustment for rear view camera only when BACK UP CAMERA IN is turned on. (Refer to When rear view camera is con- nected to A V input 2 on page 95.) # If you are viewing image from the rear view camera, you cannot adjust picture adjustment for the selected source. # With some rear view cameras, picture adjust- ment may not be possible. 3 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Adjusting the dimmer The adjustment of DIMMER is stored sepa- rately for each ambient light; daytime, evening and nighttime. The brightness of LCD screen will be adjusted to optimum level automati- cally in accordance with the ambient light based on the setting values. ! The icons indicating the current ambient brightness used for adjusting BRIGHT and CONTRAST may differ from DIMMER slightly . 1 Press V .ADJUST to display PICTURE ADJUSTMENT. The ambient light level used as the standard for adjusting DIMMER appears above the level bar . ! Red sun â Adjust the brightness for bright ambient light (daytime) ! Orange sun â Adjust the brightness for intermediate brightness (evening) ! Y ellow moon â Adjust the brightness for dark ambient light (nighttime) 2 T ouch or for DIMMER to adjust the brightness. Each time you touch or it moves cursor to - wards the lef t or the right. The level indicates the brightness of the screen being adjusted. The farther cursor moves to the right, the brighter the screen. 3 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Other Functions En 107 Section 21 Other Functions
Selecting the background display Y ou can display the thumbnails of available background pictures/movies and select one to set your background display. The selection can be made each for the audio source group (playing CD, listening to T uner , etc.), telephone source and the movie source group (watching DVD, AV , etc.). 1 Press ENTERT AINMENT. Thumbnails of background pictures/movies appear on the display . 2 T ouch one of the thumbnails that you want to display in the background. The selected picture/movie is displayed at the background. Note In the following cases, background images from that source cannot be selected: ! When there is no disc in the unit. ! When the A V (AV input) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 95). Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch Panel Calibration) If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch, adjust the response po- sitions of the touch panel. There are two ad- justment methods: 4-point adjustment, in which you touch four corners of the screen; and 16-point adjustment, in which you make fine-adjustments on the entire screen. ! Make sure to use the supplied pen for ad- justment, and gently touch the screen. If you press the touch panel forcefully , the touch panel may be damaged. Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen. Other wise the screen is damaged. 1 Press V .ADJUST to display PICTURE ADJUSTMENT. 2 Press and hold V .ADJUST. The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen ap- pears. 3 T ouch each of the arrows on the four corners of the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen. # T o cancel the adjustment, press and hold V .ADJUST . 4 Press V .ADJUST to complete the 4-point adjustment. The adjusted position data is saved. ! Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data. 5 Press V .ADJUST to proceed to the 16- point adjustment. The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen appears. # T o cancel the adjustment, press and hold V .ADJUST . 6 Gently touch the center of the mark displayed on the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen. After you touch all the marks, the adjusted po - sition data is saved. ! Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data. 7 Press and hold V .ADJUST to complete the adjustment. Note If touch panel adjustment cannot be per formed properly , consult your local Pioneer dealer . Other Functions En 108 Section 21
Using the AUX source This unit can control an auxiliar y equipment such as VCR or portable device (sold sepa- rately). When connected, auxiliar y equipment is automatically read in as AUX source and as- signed to AUX. About AUX connection method Y ou have two methods to connect auxiliar y equipment to this unit. Stereo mini pin plug cable When connecting auxiliar y equipment using a stereo mini plug cable % Insert the stereo mini plug into the mi- crophone/auxiliary input jack on this unit. F or more details, refer to the installation man- ual. IP-BUS-RCA interconnector When connecting auxiliar y equipment using an IP -BUS-RCA Inter connector (sold separately) % Use an IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separetely) to connect this unit to auxiliary equipment featuring RCA output. F or more details, refer to the IP -BUS-RCA Inter- connector owner âÂÂs manual. # Y ou can only make this type of connection if the auxiliar y equipment has RCA outputs. Selecting AUX as the source % T ouch the source icon and then touch AUX1/AUX2 to select AUX as the source. # If the auxiliar y setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. For more details, see Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 103. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. ! Each title can be up to 10 characters long. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source, touch A V MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NAME EDIT. 2 T ouch the letter you wish to input. F or details concerning operation, refer to Edit- ing the name of sound settings on page 92. Using the PGM button Y ou can operate the preprogrammed functions for each source by using PGM. % Press PGM to turn pause on when se- lecting the following sources: ! DVD â Built-in DVD player ! S-DVD â DVD player/multi-DVD player ! M-CD â Multi-CD player ! iPod â iP od ! BT AUDIO â Bluetooth Audio # T o turn pause off , press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to tur n BSM on when selecting FM or AM as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to tur n BSSM on when selecting TV as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. Other Functions En 109 Section 21 Other Functions
T roubleshooting Common Symptom Cause Action (See) P ower doesn âÂÂt turn on. The unit doesn âÂÂt operate. Leads and connectors are incor- rectly connected. Confirm once more that all connect ions are correct. The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then replace the fuse. Be ver y sure to install the correct fuse with the same rating. Noise and other factors are causing the built-in microprocessor to oper- ate incorrectly . P ress RESET . (P ag e 12) Operation with the remote con- trol isn âÂÂt possibl e. The unit does not operate cor- rectly even when the appropriate remote control buttons are pressed. The remote control operation mode is incorr ect. Switch to the correct remote control mode. (P age 19) The remote control code is incor- rect. Make sure the remote control selection switch setting and code type setting are the same. (P ag e 101) Batter y power is low . Load new batter y . ( P age 13) Some operations are prohibited with certain discs. Check by using another disc. Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty. Clean disc. (P age 114) The loaded disc is a type this unit cannot play . Check what type the disc is. Non compatible video system disc is loaded. Change to a disc compatible to your video system. No sounds are heard. The volume level will not rise. Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly. The unit is per form ing still, slow mo - tion or frame-by-frame playback . There is no sound during still, slow motion or frame-by-frame playback. The front, rear , lef t and rig ht speak- ers are not properly adjusted in level balance. Adjust the relative levels between the speak- ers correc tly . (Page 78) Sound is not heard over a speci- fic speake r . The speaker size is set to OFF . Make the correct size setting for the speaker . (P age 87) The speaker level is set too low . Increase the speaker level setting to get the balance right with the other speakers. (Page 90) The center speaker size is set to SMALL or LARGE whereas no cen- ter speaker is installed. Set the center speaker size to OFF . (P age 87) There is no picture. The parking brake cord is not con- nected. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The parking brake is not applied. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. Additional Information En 110 Appendix
Symptom Cause Action (See) The icon is displ ayed, and op- eration is not possible. The operation is prohibited for the disc. This operation is not possible. The operation is not compatible with the disc âÂÂs organization. This operation is not possible. The picture stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated. Reading of data has become impos- sible during playback. After pressing g once, start playback once more. There is no sound. V olume level is low . The volume level is low . Adjust the volume level. The attenuator is on. T urn the attenuator off . There is audio and video skip- ping. The unit is not firmly secured. Secure the unit firmly. The picture is stretched, the as- pect is incorrect. The aspect setting is incorrect for the display . Select the appropriat e settin g for your display. (P age 99) When the ignition switch is turned ON (or turned to ACC), the motor sounds. The unit is confirming whether a disc is loaded or not. This is a normal operation. Nothing is displayed. The touch panel keys cannot be used. The rear view camera is not con- nected. BACK UP CAMERA IN is at incor- rect setting. Connect a rear view camera. P ress V .ADJUST to return to the source dis- play and then select the correct setting for BACK UP CAMERA IN . (P age 95) Problems during DVD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re- gion number from this unit. Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. (P age 8, P age 126) A parental lock message is dis- played and playback is not pos- sible. P arental lock is on. T urn parental loc k off or change the level. (P age 100) P arental lock cannot be can- celed. The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number . (Page 100) Y ou have forgotten your code num- ber . P ress CLEAR 10 times to cancel the code number . (P age 101) Dialog language (and subtitle language) cannot be switched. The DVD playing does not feature multiple language recordings . Y ou cannot switch among multiple languages if they are not recorded on the disc. Y ou can only switch betwee n items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. No subtitles are displayed. The DVD playing does not feature subtitles. Subtitles are not displayed if they are not re- corded on the disc. Y ou can only switch betwee n items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. Playback is not with the audio language and subtitle language settings selected in DVD SETUP MENU . The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the language selected in DVD SETUP MENU. Switching to a selected language is not possi- ble if the language selected in DVD SETUP MENU is not recorded on the disc. Additional Information En 111 Appendix Additional Information
Symptom Cause Action (See) Switching the viewing angle is not possible. The DVD playing does not feature scenes shot from multiple angles. Y ou cannot switch betwee n multiple angles if the DVD does not feature scenes recorded from multiple angles. Y ou are tr ying to switch to multiple angle viewing of a scene that is not recorded from multiple angles. Switch between multiple angles when watch- ing scenes recorded from multiple angles. The picture is extremely unclear/ distorted and dark during play- back. The disc features a signal to prohibit copying. (Some discs may have this.) Since this unit is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect system, when play- ing a disc that has a signal prohibiting copy- ing, the picture may suffer from horizon tal stripes or other imper fections when viewed on some displays. This does not mean this unit is malfunctioning. Problems during Video CD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) The PBC (playback control) menu display cannot be called up. The Video CD playing does not fea- ture PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs not featuring PBC. Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. The Video CD playing features PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs featuring PBC. Error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Ser vice Center , be sure to record the error message. Message Cause Action (See) ERROR-02 Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Replace disc. ERROR-05 Electrical or mechanical P ress RESET . DIFFERENT REGION DISC (RE- GION ERR) The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct region number . NON PLA Y ABLE DISC (NO N- PLA Y) This type of disc cannot be played by this un it Replace the disc with one this unit can play. The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly. THERMAL PROTECTION IN MOTION (TEMP) The temperature of this unit is out - side the normal operating range W ait until the unit âÂÂs temperature returns to within normal operating limits. NO AUDIO The inserted disc does not contain any files that can be played back Replace disc. Additional Information En 112 Appendix
Message Cause Action (See) T rack Skipped The inserted disc contains WMA files that are protected by DRM Replace disc. PROTECT All the files on the inserted disc are secured by DRM Replace disc. Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto T A and EQ, an error message may appear on the display . If an error message appears, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. Af ter checking, tr y again. Message Cause Action Error check MIC Microph one is not connected. Plug the supplied microphone securely into the jack. Error check front SP , Error check FL SP , Error check FR SP , Error check center SP , Error check RL SP , Error check RR SP , Error check subwoofer The microphone cannot pick up the measuring tone of a speaker . ! Confirm that the speakers are connected correctly . ! Correct the input level setting of the power amp connected to the speakers. ! Set the mic rophone correctly . Error check noise The surrounding noise level is too high. ! Stop your car in a place that is as quiet as possible, and switch off the engine, air condi- tioner or heater . ! Set the mic rophone correctly . Additional Information En 113 Appendix Additional Information
DVD player and care ! Use only normal, round discs. If you insert irregular , non-round, shaped discs they may jam in the DVD player or not play prop- erly . ! Check all discs for cracks, scratches or warping before playing. Discs that have cracks, scratches or are warped may not play properly. Do not use such discs. ! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed) sur face when handling the disc. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che- micals to the sur face of the discs. ! T o clean a disc, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center . ! If the heater is used in cold weather , con- densation may form on components inside the DVD player . Condensation may cause the DVD player to not operate properly . If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the DVD player for an hour or so to allow it to dr y out and wipe any damp discs with a sof t cloth to remove the moisture. ! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback. DVD discs ! With some DVD video discs, it may not be possible to use certain functions. ! It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode). It is not possible to play back DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode). ! It may not be possible to play back DVD -R/ DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode), be- cause of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit. ! It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/ DVD-RAM discs. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD -R/CD-RW discs are used, play- back is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! It may not be possible to play back CD -R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re- corder or a personal computer because of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc., on the lens of this unit. Additional Information En 114 Appendix
! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) ! Playback of CD-R/CD -RW discs may be- come impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the sto - rage conditions in the vehicle. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD -R/CD-RW disc may not be dis- played by this unit (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)). ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD -RW discs before using them. Dual Discs ! Dual Discs are two -sided discs that have a recordable CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other . ! Playback of the DVD side is possible with this unit. However , since the CD side of Dual Discs is not physically compatible with the general CD standard, it may not be possible to play the CD side with this unit. ! F requent loading and ejecting of a Dual Disc may result in scratches on the disc. Serious scratches can lead to playback pro- blems on this unit. In some cases, a Dual Disc may become stuck in the disc loading slot and will not eject. T o prevent this, we recommend you refrain from using Dual Disc with this unit. ! Please refer to the information from the disc manufacturer for more detailed infor- mation about Dual Discs. MP3, WMA and AAC files ! MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard. ! WMA is short for Windows Media ⢠Audio and refers to an audio compression tech- nology that is developed by Microsoft Cor- poration. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . ! AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression tech- nology standard. ! This unit may not operate correctly depend- ing on the application used to encode WMA files. ! Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of WMA/AAC files encoded with image data. ! This unit allows playback of MP3/WMA/ AAC files on CD-R/R W/ROM and DVD -R/ RW/ROM discs. Disc recordings compati- ble with level 1 and level 2 of ISO9660 and with the Romeo and Joliet file system can be played back. ! It is possible to play back multi-session compatible recorded discs. ! MP3/WMA/AAC files are not compatible with packet write data transfer . ! The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a file name, including the extension (.mp3, .wma or .m4a), is 64, from the first character . ! The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a folder name is 64. ! In case of files recorded according to the Romeo file system, only the first 64 charac- ters can be displayed. Additional Information En 115 Appendix Additional Information
! The folder selection sequence for playback and other operations becomes the writing sequence used by the writing software. For this reason, the expected sequence at the time of playback may not coincide with the actual playback sequence. However , there also is some writing sof tware which per- mits setting of the playback order . ! Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge into one another without a pause. When these discs are converted to MP3/WMA/ AAC files and burned to a CD-R/RW/ROM or a DVD -R/RW/ROM, the files will be played back on this player with a short pause between each one, regardless of the length of the pause between tracks on the original audio CD. Important ! When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file, add the corresponding filename extension (.mp3, .wma or .m4a). ! This unit plays back files with the filename ex- tension (.mp3, .wma or .m4a) as an MP3/ WMA/AAC file. T o prevent noise and malfunc- tions, do not use these extensions for files other than MP3/WMA/AAC files. MP3 additional information ! Files are compatible with the ID3 T ag V er . 1.0, 1.1, 2.2 and 2.3 formats for display of album (disc title), track (track title), artist (track artist) and comments. V er . 2.x of ID3 T ag is given priority when both V er . 1.x and V er . 2.x exist. ! The emphasis function is valid only when MP3 files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequen- cies are played back. (16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz sampling frequencies can be played back.) ! There is no m3u playlist compatibility . ! There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3 interactive) or mp3 PRO formats. ! The sound quality of MP3 files generally be- comes better with an increased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality , we recommend using only discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps. WMA additional information ! This unit plays back WMA files encoded by Windows Media Player version 7, 7.1, 8, 9 and 10. ! Y ou can only play back WMA files in the fre- quencies 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. ! The sound quality of WMA files generally becomes better with an increased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 48 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR) or from 48 kbps to 384 kbps (VBR), but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality , we recommend using discs recorded with a higher bit rate. ! This unit doesn âÂÂt support the following for- mats. â Windows Media Audio 9 P rofessional (5.1ch) â Windows Media Audio 9 Lossless â Windows Media Audio 9 V oice AAC additional information ! This unit plays back AAC files encoded by iT unes î version 4.6 . ! This unit plays back AAC files in the sam- pling frequencies 11.025, 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. Additional Information En 116 Appendix
! The sound quality of AAC files generally be- comes better with an increased transmis- sion rate. This unit can play recordings with transmission rates from 16 kbps to 320 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality , we recommend using discs recorded with a higher trans- mission rate. ! This unit doesn âÂÂt support the following for- mats. â Apple Lossless About folders and MP3/ WMA/AAC files ! An outline of a disc with MP3/WMA/AAC files on it is shown below . Subfolders are shown as folders in the folder currently se- lected. 3 1 2 1 First level 2 Second level 3 Third level Notes ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user cannot assign folder numbers. ! It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3/WMA/AAC files. (These folders will be skipped without displaying the folder number .) ! MP3/WMA/AAC files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back. However , there is a delay in the start of playback on discs with numer- ous tiers. F or this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers. ! It is possible to play back up to 255 folders on one disc. JPEG picture files ! JPEG is short for Joint Photographic Ex- perts Group and refers to a still image com- pression technology standard. ! Files are compatible with Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.1 still image up to resolution of 8 192 à7 680. (EXIF format is used most commonly with digital still cameras.) ! EXIF format that processed by the personal computer may not be played back. ! There is no progressive JPEG compatibility . Important ! When naming a JPEG picture file, add the cor- responding filename extension (.jpg, .jpeg or .jpe). Additional Information En 117 Appendix Additional Information
! This unit plays back files with the filename ex- tension (.jpg, .jpeg or .jpe) as a JPEG picture file. T o prevent malfunctions, do not use these extensions for files other than JPEG picture files. DivX video files ! Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with standard playback of DivX î media files ! F or more details about DivX, visit the follow- ing site: http://www .divx.com/ Important ! When naming a DivX video file, add the corre- sponding filename extension (.avi or .divx). ! This unit plays back files with the filename ex- tension (.avi or .divx) as a DivX video file. T o prevent noise and malfunctions, do not use these extensions for files other than DivX video files. Using the display correctly CAUTION ! If liquid or foreign matter should get inside this unit, turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Do not use the unit in this condition because doing so may result in a fire, electric shock, or other failure. ! If you notice smoke, a strange noise or smell, or any other abnormal signs from the display , turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Using this unit in this condition may result in permanent da- mage to the system. ! Do not disassemble or modify this unit, as there are high-voltage components inside which may cause an electric shock. Be sure to consult your dealer or the nearest author- ized PIONEER Ser vice Station for internal in- spection, adjustments or repairs. Handling the display ! When the display is subjected to direct sun- light for a long period of time, it will be- come ver y hot resulting in possible damage to the LCD screen. When not using this unit, close the display and avoid exposing it to direct sunlight. ! The display should be used within the tem- perature ranges shown below . Storage temperature range: â 20 ðC to 80 ðC At temperatures higher or lower than the operating temperature range the display may not operate normally . ! The LCD screen of this unit is exposed in order to increase its visibility within the ve- hicle. Please do not press strongly on it as this may damage it. ! Do not place anything on the display when it is opened. Also, do not attempt to carr y out angle adjustment, or open/close the display by hand. Applying strong force to the display may damage it. ! Do not push the LCD screen with much force as this may scratch it. ! Be careful not to place anything between the display and the main body when the display is opening or closing. If an object gets between the display and main body , the display may stop working. Additional Information En 118 Appendix
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen ! If the display is near the vent of an air con- ditioner when it is opened, make sure that air from the air conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from the heater may damage the LCD screen, and cool air from the cool- er may cause moisture to form inside the display resulting in possible damage. Also, if the display is cooled down by the cooler , the screen may become dark, or the life span of the small fluorescent tube used in- side the display may be shortened. ! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots) may appear on the LCD screen. These are due to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do not indicate a problem with the display. ! At low temperature s, the LCD screen may be dark for a while after the power is turned on. ! The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is exposed to direct sunlight. ! When using a portable phone, keep the an- tenna of the portable phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. Keeping the display in good condition ! When removing dust from the screen or cleaning the display , first turn the system power off , then wipe with the supplied cloth . ! When wiping the screen, take care not to scratch the sur face. Do not use harsh or abrasive chemical cleaners. Small fluorescent tube ! A small fluorescent tube is used inside the display to illuminate the LCD screen. â The fluorescent tube should last for ap- proximately 10 000 hours, depending on operating conditions. (Using the display at low temperatures reduces the ser vice life of the fluorescent tube.) â When the fluorescent tube reaches the end of its useful life, the screen will be dark and the image will no longer be projected. If this happens, consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Additional Information En 119 Appendix Additional Information
Language code chart for DVD Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 P ashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721 F rench (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814 German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Romanian (ro), 1815 Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyar wanda (rw), 1823 Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 P ortuguese (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sangho (sg), 1907 Swedish (sv), 1922 Inu piak (ik), 0911 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911 Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Soma li (so), 1915 Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Albanian (sq), 1917 Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918 Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919 Aymara (ay), 0125 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 T amil (ta), 2001 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 T elugu (te), 2005 Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 T ajik (tg), 2007 Bislama (bi), 0209 Laothian (lo), 1215 Thai (th) , 2008 Bengali (bn), 0214 Lithuan ian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian (lv), 1222 T urkmen (tk), 2011 Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 T agalog (tl), 2012 Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014 Corsican (co), 0315 Macedo nian (mk), 1311 T onga (to), 2015 Czech (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 T urkish (tr), 2018 W elsh (cy), 0325 Mongoli an (mn ), 1 314 T songa (ts), 2019 Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 T atar (tt), 2020 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 T wi (tw), 2023 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Estonian (et), 0520 Maltese (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118 Basque (eu), 0521 Burme se (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126 P ersian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Finnish (fi) , 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 V olapük (vo), 2215 Fiji (fj), 06 10 Norwegian (no), 1415 Wolof (wo), 2315 F aroes e (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408 F risian (fy), 0625 Oromo (om), 1513 Y oruba (yo), 2515 Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu), 2621 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 P anjabi (pa), 1601 Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl), 1612 Additional Information En 120 Appendix
DSP adjustme nt value record sheet Please make a copy of sheet below as desired. Parametric equalizer setting ( P ARAMETRIC EQ ) (when selecting multi-channel mode only) Speaker unit BAND F requency Level Q.Fac FRONT LEFT LOW MID HIGH FRONT RIGHT LOW MID HIGH REAR LEFT LOW MID HIGH REAR RIGHT LOW MID HIGH FRONT CENTER LOW MID HIGH REAR CENTER LOW MID HIGH Graphic equalizer setting ( GRAPHIC EQ) (when selecting 2-channel mode only) Speaker unit 50 80 125 200 315 500 800 1.25k 2k 3.15k 5k 8k 12.5k LEFT RIGHT Speaker setting ( SPEAKER SETTING) Speaker unit F ront center F ront Rear Rear center Subwoofer Setting Cut-off frequency setting ( CUT OFF) Additional Information En 121 Appendix Additional Information
Speaker unit FREQUENCY SLOPE PHASE TWEETER LEFT â TWEETER RIGHT â FRONT LEFT LOW â HIGH â FRONT RIGHT LOW â HIGH â REAR LEFT â REAR RIGHT â CENTER â REAR CENTER â SUBWOOFER The following filters (speaker units) are availabl e on the network mode only . ! TWEETER LEF T ! TWEETER RIGHT ! LOW of the front speaker s Time alignment setting ( TIME ALIGNMENT) and speaker level setting ( SPEAKER LEVEL) Speaker unit TIME ALIGNMENT SPEAKER LEVEL T weeter left T weeter right F ront center F ront lef t F ront right Rear left Rear right Rear center Subwoofer T weeters are available on the network mode only . Additional Information En 122 Appendix
T erms AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4. Aspect ratio This is the width-to -height ratio of a TV screen. A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps (bits per second) units. The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. Bonus group An âÂÂextra â group on some DVD audio discs that requires a key number to access. Browsable pictures A feature of some DVD audio discs in which you can browse still pictures recorded on the disc while the audio is played back. Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book. With DVD video discs fea- turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search. DivX DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com- pressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files can also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks. Many DivX media files are available for down- load online, and you can create your own using your personal content and easy-to -use tools from DivX.com. DivX Certified DivX Certified products are officially tested by the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all versions of DivX video, including DivX 6. Certi- fied products qualif y for one of several DivX P rofiles that designate the type of video the product supports, from compact portable video to high-definition video. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system used in theaters. Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates six full-bandwidth out- put channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives three surround channels from the two in the original recording. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II can create five full-band- width output channels from two -channel sources. This new technology enables a dis- crete 5-channel playback with 2 front chan- nels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear channels. A music mode is also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. DTS This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a surround system delivering multi-channel audio from up to 6 independent channels. Additional Information En 123 Appendix Additional Information
DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio using a DTS 96/24 decoder . This format is also fully backward compatible with all existing decoders. This means that DVD players can play this sof tware using a conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder . DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel information already encoded into the source, as well as its ownpro- cessing to determine channel localization (with two channel sources, the âÂÂ.1 â subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver). T wo modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS Neo:6 with two chan- nel sources. DTS-ES DTS-ES is a decoder that is capable of decod- ing both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Ma- trix 6.1 encoded sources. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives âÂÂtrue â 6.1 channel sound, with a comple- tely separate (discrete) surround back chan- nel. DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed into the surround lef t/right channels. Both sources are also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder . Dynamic range control Dolby Digital has a function for compressing the difference between the loudest and softest sounds: Dynamic range control. This control ensures sounds with an increased dynamic range are heard clearly even at low volume le- vels. EXIF (Exchangeable image file) A file format developed by F uji Photo Film for digital still cameras. Digital cameras from var- ious manufacturers use this compressed file format which carries date, time and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data. Group A collection of tracks on a DVD audio disc. Equivalent to a DVD video title. ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded in- formation can include the track title, the ar- tist âÂÂs name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 T ag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted as to the num- ber of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the for- mat logic of CD -ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con- sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the â _â sign, with a file-extension of three charac- ters). Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (in- cluding the separation mark âÂÂ. â and a file ex- tension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. JPEG This stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group, and is an international still image com- pression standard. Additional Information En 124 Appendix
Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. Generally , DVDs are re- corded with higher sampling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide higher sound quality. m3u Playlists created using the â WINAMP â soft- ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan- dards Orga nization). MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a con- ventional disc. MPEG This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group, and is an international video image compression standard. Some DVDs feature di- gital audio compressed and recorded using this system. MS ADPCM This stands for Microsof t adaptive differential pulse code modulation, which is the signal re- cording system used for the multimedia sof t- ware of Microsof t Corporation. Multi-angle With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV . Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let- ting you choose your viewing angle as desired. Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog) Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi- ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc, letting you choose as desired. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that al- lows additional data to be recorded later . When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD -R or CD-RW , etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses- sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses- sions on one disc. Multi-subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re- corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as desired. Number of quantization bits The number of quantization bits is one factor in the overall sound quality; the higher the â bit-depthâ , the better the sound quality . How- ever , increasing the bit-depth also increases the amount of data and therefore storage space required. Packed PCM A lossless compression system that enables more PCM audio to be stored on a DVD audio disc than would other wise be possible. Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD -R , etc., at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. Parental lock Some DVD video discs with violent or adult-or- iented scenes feature parental lock which pre- vents children from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you set the unit âÂÂs parental lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these scenes will be skipped. Additional Information En 125 Appendix Additional Information
Playback control (PBC) This is a playback control signal recorded on Video CDs (V ersion 2.0). Using menu displays provided by Video CDs with PBC lets you enjoy playback of simple interactive software and software with search functions. Y ou can also enjoy viewing high- and standard-resolution still images. Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos- sible unless it features the same region num- ber as the DVD player . This unit âÂÂs region number is displayed on the bottom of the unit. Slideshow A feature of some DVD discs in which still pic- tures recorded on the disc cycle automatically while the audio is played back. Title DVD video discs have high data capacity , en- abling recording of multiple movies on a sin- gle disc. If , for example, one disc contains three separate movies, they are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func- tions. VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compres- sion, it is possible to achieve compression- priority sound quality. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media ⢠Audio and refers to an audio compression technol- ogy that is developed by Microsoft Corpora- tion. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra- demarks or registered trademarks of Microsof t Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Additional Information En 126 Appendix
Specifications General Rated powe r source ............... 14.4 V DC (allowable voltage range: 12.0 V to 14.4 V DC) Grounding system ................... Negative type Head unit: Max. current consumption ........................................... 3 . 7 A Dimensions (W àH àD): DIN Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 0 m m Nose ........................... 1 8 8 à5 8 à3 6 m m D Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 5 m m Nose ........................... 1 7 0 à4 6 à3 1 m m W eight ................................ 2 . 3 k g Hideaway unit: Max. current consumption ........................................... 21.5 A Dimensions (W àH àD) ........................................... 2 8 0 à3 7 à1 7 1 m m W eight ................................ 1 . 4 k g Display Screen size/aspect ratio ....... 7 inch wide/15:9 (effective display area: 152.4 à91.44 mm) P ixels ............................................. 1 1 5 2 0 0 0 (800 à480 à3) T y p e ................................................ T F T active matr ix, transmis- sive type Color system .............................. NTSC/P AL compat ible Storage temperature range ..................................................... â 20 ðC to 80 ðC Angle adjustment .................... 5 0 ð t o 110ð (initial settings: 90ð) Audio Maximum power output ....... 5 0 W à8 Continuous power output . . . 22 W à8 (50 Hz to 15 000 Hz, 5% THD, 4 W load, both channels driven) Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 W to 8 W allowable) P reout max output level/outpu t impedance ..................................................... 5 . 0 V à9/100 W Decoder ........................................ Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby EX, Dolby P ro Logic II, DTS, DTS-CD, DTS-ES (matrix, discrete), DTS 96/24, DTS Neo:6, AAC Sound setting P osition ........................................ Front left /F ront right/F ront/ All/Off P arametric equ alizer (multi-channel mode): Band .................................... 3 b a n d F requency .......................... 40/50/63/80/ 100/125/160/ 200/250/315/400/500/630/ 800/1k/1.25k/1.6k/2k/2.5k/ 3.15k/4k/5k/6.3k/8k/10k/ 12.5k Hz Q Fa c t o r .............................. 1.2/3.6 Gain ...................................... ñ12dB (2 dB/ste p) Graphic equalizer (2-channel mode): Band .................................... 1 3 band F requency .......................... 50/80/125 /200/315/500/800/ 1.25k/2k/3.15k/5k/8k/12.5k Hz Q Fa c t o r .............................. 5 . 0 Gain ...................................... ñ12dB (2 dB/ste p) Speaker setting: F ront ..................................... Large/Small F ront center ...................... Large/Small/Off Rear ...................................... Large/Small/Off Rear cen ter ....................... Large/Small/O ff Subwoofer ......................... On/Off Time alignme nt ........................ 0 c m t o 5 0 0 c m (2.5 cm/ step) Speaker level .............................. âÂÂ24 dB to 10 dB (1 dB/ step) Cut-off frequency F ront (L/R independe nt) (Standard mode): HPF : F requency ................ 50/63/80/100/1 25/160/200 Hz Slope .......................... âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12/ âÂÂ18 dB/oct Mute .................................... On/Off F ront (L/R independe nt) (Network mode): High HPF : F requency ................ 1.25/1.6/2 /2.5/3.15/4/5/6.3/8/ 10/12.5 kHz Slope .......................... âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12 dB/oct Low LPF : F requency ................ 1.25/1.6/2 /2.5/3.15/4/5/6.3/8/ 10/12.5 kHz Additional Information En 127 Appendix Additional Information
Slope .......................... 0 ( Pass)/ âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12 dB/oct Low HPF : F requency ................ 50/63/80/100/1 25/160/200 Hz Slope .......................... âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12/ âÂÂ18 dB/oct Mute .................................... On/Off F ront center: HPF : F requency ................ 50/63/80/100/1 25/160/200 Hz Slope .......................... âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12/ âÂÂ18 dB/oct Mute .................................... On/Off Rear (L/R independe nt): HPF : F requency ................ 50/63/80/100/1 25/160/200 Hz Slope .......................... âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12/ âÂÂ18 dB/oct Mute .................................... On/Off Rear cen ter: HPF : F requency ................ 50/63/80/100/1 25/160/200 Hz Slope .......................... âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12/ âÂÂ18 dB/oct Mute .................................... On/Off Subwoofer: LPF : F requency ................ 50/63/80/100/1 25/160/200 Hz Slope .......................... 0 ( Pass)/ âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12/ âÂÂ18 dB/oct Phase ........................ Normal/Reverse Mute .................................... On/Off DVD Player System .......................................... D V D audio, DVD video, Video CD, CD, MP3 , WMA, AAC, DivX, JPEG system Usable discs .............................. D V D audio, DVD video, Video CD, dtsCD, CD, CD-R/ RW , DVD -R/RW Region number: for Sou theast Asian models ........................................... 3 for Sou th American and Oceanian model s ........................................... 4 for Midd le East Asian and South African models ........................................... 2 Signal format: Sampling frequency ..... 16/22.05/24/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 kHz Number of quantization bits ........................................... 16/20/24; linear F requency respo nse ............... 5 H z t o 9 6 0 0 0 H z (with DVD, at sampling frequency 192 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 1 0 2 d B ( 1 k H z ) (IEC -A net- work) (CD: 102 dB (1 kHz) (IEC -A network)) Dynamic range ......................... 1 0 0 d B ( 1 k H z ) (CD: 98 dB (1 kHz)) Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz) Output level: Video .................................... 1 . 0 Vp-p/75 W (ñ0.2 V) Audio ................................... 1 . 1 V ( 1 k H z , 0 d B ) Number of channels .............. 2 ( s t ereo), Digita l 6 ch MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ......... V e r . 7 , 7.1, 8, 9, 10 (2ch audio) (Windows Me dia Playe r) AAC decoding format ............ i Tunes î V er . 4.6 FM tuner F requency ran ge ...................... 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz Usable sensitivity ..................... 8 d B f (0.7 õV/75 W , mono, S/N: 30 dB) 50 dB quieting sensitivity ..... 1 0 d B f (0.9 õV/75 W , mono) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 7 5 d B (IEC -A network) Distortion ..................................... 0 . 3 % ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 kHz, stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dBf , 1 kHz, mono) F requency respo nse ............... 3 0 H z t o 1 5 0 0 0 H z ( ñ 3 d B ) Stereo separation .................... 4 5 d B ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 kHz) Selectivity .................................... 8 0 d B (ñ200 kHz) AM tuner F requency ran ge ...................... 5 3 1 k H z t o 1 6 0 2 k H z ( 9 kHz) 530 kHz to 1 640 kHz (10 kHz) Usable sensitivity ..................... 1 8 õ V (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 6 5 d B (IEC -A network) Infrared remote control W avelength ................................. 9 4 5 n m Output ........................................... typ; 10 mw/sr per Infrared LED Note Specifications and the design are subject to pos- sible modifications without notice due to im- provements. Additional Information En 128 Appendix
A Angle icon ................................................. . 34, .99 Aspect ratio ............................................ .99, .123 Audio language .................................. .34, .48, .98 B Bonus group ................................................. .123 Bookmark ........................................................ .33 Brightness ..................................................... .106 Browsable pictures ...................................... .123 C Chapter .......................................................... .123 Code number ................................................ .100 Color .............................................................. .106 Contrast ......................................................... .106 D DivX ................................................................ .123 DivX Certified ................................................ .123 Dolby Digital ................................................. .123 Dolby Digital EX ..................................... .10, .123 Dolby P ro Logic II ........................................ .123 DTS ................................................................ .123 DTS 96/24 ...................................................... .124 DTS Neo:6 ..................................................... .124 DTS-ES ..................................................... .10, .124 Dynamic range control ............................... .124 E EXIF ................................................................ .124 G Group ............................................................. .124 H Hue ................................................................ .106 J JPEG .............................................................. .124 L Language code chart .................................. .120 Linear PCM (LPCM) ..................................... .125 M Menu language .............................................. .99 MPEG ............................................................. .125 Multi-angle .............................................. .34, .125 Multi-audio ............................. ........... .34, .48, .125 Multi-subtitle .......................... ........... .34, .48, .125 P P acked PCM .......................... ....................... .125 P arental lock ......................................... .100, .125 PBC (playback control) ................................. .37 Playback control (PBC) ............................... .126 R Region number ........................................ . 8, .126 S Slideshow ...................................................... .126 Subtitle language ............................... .34, .48, .98 T Title ................................................................ .126 TV aspect ......................................................... .99 V Video CD ........................................................... .8 W Wide screen mode ....................................... .106 Index En 129
En 130
En 131
PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU , T OKY O 153-8654, JAP AN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U .S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-755 5 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY . L TD. 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkwa y , Mar kham, Ontar io L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-2 83-5901 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V . Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-427 0 å  é è¡ 份 æ éÂÂå ¬ å¸ 總 å ¬ å¸ : å°å 帠丠山å 路 亠段 44 èÂÂ13 樠é» 話 : (02) 2521-3588 å  é é» å ＠馠港＠æÂÂéÂÂå ¬ å¸ 馠港 ä¹ é¾ å° æ² å 海港 å 丠ç å æ¥Â丠忠9 æ¨Â901-6 室 é» 話 : (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Corporat ion. Copyright é 2006 by Pioneer Cor poration. All r ights reser ved. Printed in Japan <CRB2234-A> RD , RI,RC <KMMZX> <06E00000>
Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please rea d through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished read ing the instructio ns, k eep this man- ual in a safe place for futu re refer ence. Be sure to read this ! Playable discs 8 ! DVD video disc region numbers 8 ! When an operation is prohibited 12 Precautions IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS 6 T o ensure safe driving 6 T o avoid batter y exhaustion 7 Before Y ou Start About this unit 8 About this manual 9 F eatures 9 About WMA 10 About AAC 11 About DivX 11 T o protect the LCD screen 11 F or viewing LCD comfortably 12 What the marks on DVDs indicate 12 Resetting the microprocessor 12 F eature demo mode 13 Use and care of the remote control 13 What âÂÂs What Head unit 15 Sub-display 16 Remote control 17 Basic Operations T urning the unit on and selecting a source 21 Adjusting the volume 22 T urning the unit off 22 Using the rear display 22 T ouch panel key basic operation 23 Opening and closing the LCD panel 24 P rotecting your unit from theft 25 Built-in DVD player basic operations 26 T uner Listening to the radio 28 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 28 Introduction of advanced tuner operation 29 T uning in strong signals 29 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 29 Playing DVD discs W atching a DVD video 30 Listening to a DVD audio 31 Operating the DVD menu 32 Browsing still pictures 32 Skipping back or for ward to another title/ group 32 Resume playback (Bookmark) 33 F rame-by-frame playback 33 Slow motion playback 33 Searching for the part you want to play 33 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 34 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 34 Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) 34 Automatic playback of DVDs 35 Introduction of advanced DVD operation 35 Repeating play 35 Playing tracks in random order 36 Scanning tracks 36 Selecting audio output 36 Playing Video CDs W atching a Video CD 37 Contents En 2
PBC playback 37 F rame-by-frame playback 38 Slow motion playback 38 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time 38 Introduction of advanced Video CD operation 39 Repeating play 39 Selecting audio output 39 Playing CDs Listening to a CD 40 Selecting tracks from the track title list 40 Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs 40 Introduction of advanced CD operation 41 Repeating play 41 Playing tracks in random order 41 Scanning tracks of a CD 41 Playing MP3/WMA/AAC files Listening to MP3/WMA/AAC 42 Selecting tracks from the file name list 43 Displaying information on MP3/WMA/AAC file 43 Introduction of advanced built-in DVD player (MP3/WMA/AAC) operation 44 Repeating play 44 Playing tracks in random order 44 Scanning folders and tracks 44 Playing DivX/JPEG files W atching a DivX/JPEG 45 Viewing a JPEG slideshow 46 Playing DivXî VOD content 46 Selecting files from the file name list 47 Displaying text information on DivX/JPEG disc 47 F rame-by-frame playback 47 Slow motion playback 47 Searching for the part you want to play 47 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 48 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 48 Introduction of advanced built-in DVD player (DivX/JPEG) operation 49 Repeating play 49 Playing files in random order 49 Multi-CD Player Listening to a CD 50 P ausing CD playback 51 Selecting tracks from the track title list 51 Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs 51 Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 52 Repeating play 52 Playing tracks in random order 52 Scanning CDs and tracks 52 Using compression and bass emphasis 53 Using ITS playlists 53 Playing songs on iPod Listening to songs on your iP od 55 Browsing for a song 55 P ausing a song 56 Displaying text information on iP od 56 Displaying information on song 56 Repeating play 56 Playing songs in a random order (shuffle) 56 Bluetooth Audio Listening to songs on BT Audio (Bluetooth audio player) 57 F unction operation 58 En 3 Contents
Connecting a Bluetooth audio player 58 Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player 59 Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address 59 Bluetooth T elephone Hands-free phoning with cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology 60 Setting up for hands-free phoning 61 Basic operation of hands-free phoning 61 Introduction of advanced hands-free phoning operation 62 Connecting a cellular phone 62 Disconnecting a cellular phone 63 Registering connected cellular phone 63 Deleting a registered phone 63 Connecting to a registered cellular phone 64 Using the Phone Book 64 Using the Call Histor y 66 Using preset numbers 67 Making a call by entering phone number 67 Clearing memory 67 Setting the automatic answering 68 Setting the automatic rejecting 68 Switching the ring tone 68 Echo canceling and noise reduction 68 Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address 68 TV tuner W atching the television 69 Storing and recalling broadcast stations 69 Introduction of advanced TV tuner operation 70 Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 70 Selecting the area group 71 DVD Player Playing a disc 72 T urning the DVD player on or off 73 Selecting a disc 73 Introduction of advanced DVD player operation 74 Repeating play 74 Playing tracks in random order 74 Scanning tracks of a CD/MP3/WMA 74 Selecting audio output 75 Audio Adjustments Introduction to built-in DSP features 76 Introduction of audio adjustments 78 Using balance adjustment 78 Adjusting source levels 79 Using the direct control 79 Listening in surround sound 79 Using the dynamic range control 81 Using the down-mix function 81 Switching the sound settings 82 Switching between the multi-channel output and 2-channel output 82 Introduction of sound settings 83 Using the position selector 83 Recalling equalizer cur ves 84 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer 84 Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer 86 Setting the speaker setting 87 Using the cut-off frequency 87 Using the time alignment 89 Adjusting the speaker output levels 90 Using the auto-equalizer 91 Storing the adjusted audio settings in memor y 91 Editing the name of sound settings 92 Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) 92 Contents En 4
Setup Introduction of setup adjustments 95 Setting the AV input 95 Setting the automatic open function 96 Adjusting the LCD panel slide position 96 Setting the clock 96 Setting the video of rear display 97 Switching the dimmer setting for sub- display 97 Adjusting the contrast for the sub- display 97 Changing languages for CAUTION 97 Setting up the DVD player Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 98 Setting the subtitle language 98 Setting the audio language 98 Setting the menu language 99 Switching the assist subtitle on or off 99 Setting the angle icon display 99 Setting the aspect ratio 99 Setting the parental lock 100 Setting the still picture 101 T o play back bonus groups 101 Displaying your DivXî VOD registration code 101 Setting remote control code type 101 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 102 Setting the FM tuning step 102 Setting the AM tuning step 102 Switching the warning tone 102 Switching the auxiliary setting 103 Correcting distorted sound 103 Switching the sound muting/ attenuation 103 Switching the automatic disc playback 103 Resetting the audio functions 104 Switching the DSP setting mode 104 Setting the optical input 104 Setting the TV signal 104 Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection 105 Setting the security indicator 105 Other F unctions Switching the display on the sub- display 106 Adjusting the screen 106 Selecting the background display 108 Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch P anel Calibration) 108 Using the AUX source 109 Using the PGM button 109 Additional Information T roubleshoo ting 110 Error messages 112 Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages 113 DVD player and care 114 DVD discs 114 CD-R/CD-RW discs 114 Dual Discs 115 MP3, WMA and AAC files 115 About folders and MP3/WMA/AAC files 117 JPEG picture files 117 DivX video files 118 Using the display correctly 118 Language code chart for DVD 120 DSP adjustment value record sheet 121 T erms 123 Specifications 127 Index 129 En 5 Contents
IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS Please read all of these instructions regarding your display and retain them for future refer- ence. 1 Read this manual fully and carefully be- fore operating your display . 2 Keep this manual handy as a refer ence for operating procedures and safety informa- tion. 3 Pay close attention to all warnings in this manual and follow the instructions care- fully . 4 Do not allow other persons to use this sys- tem until they have read and understood the operating instructions. 5 Do not install the display where it may (i) obstruct the driver âÂÂs vision, (ii) impair the performance of any of the vehicle âÂÂs oper- ating systems or safety features, includ- ing air bags, hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the driver âÂÂs ability to safely oper- ate the vehicle. 6 Do not operate this display if doing so in any way will divert your attention from the safe operation of your vehicle. Always observe safe driving rules and follow all existing traffic regulations. If you experi- ence difficulty in operating the system or reading the display , park your vehicle in a safe location and make necessary adjust- ments. 7 Please remember to wear your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled. 8 Never use headphones while driving. 9 T o promote safety , certain functions are disabled unless the parking brake is on, and the vehicle is not in motion. 10 Never set the volume of your display so high that you cannot hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles. WARNING ! Do not attempt to install or service your display by yourself. Installation or servi- cing of the display by persons without training and experience in electronic equipment and automotive accessories may be dangerous and could expose you to the risk of electric shock or other hazards. T o ensur e safe driving WARNING ! LIGHT GREEN LEAD A T POWER CON- NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT P ARKED ST A TUS AND MUST BE CON- NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPL Y SIDE OF THE P ARKING BRAKE SWIT CH. IM- PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MA Y VIOLA TE APPLICABLE LAW AND MA Y RESUL T IN SERIOUS IN- JURY OR DAMAGE. ! T o avoid the risk of damage and injur y and the potential violation of applicable laws, this unit is not for use with a video screen that is visible to the driver . ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, the front DVD or TV (sold separately) feature should never be used while the vehicle is being driven. Also, rear displays should not be in a location where it is a visible distraction to the driver . ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply , they must be obeyed and this unit âÂÂs DVD features should not be used. Precautions En 6 Section 01
When you attempt to watch a DVD, Video CD or TV while driving, the warning Viewing of front seat video source while driving is strictly prohibited. will appear on the front display . T o watch a DVD, Video CD or TV on the front display , park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake. When using a display connected to REAR DISPLA Y OUT This unit âÂÂs REAR DISPLA Y OUT is for connec- tion of a display to enable passengers in the rear seats to watch the DVD or TV . WARNING NEVER install the rear display in a location that enables the driver to watch the DVD or TV while driving. T o avoid battery exhaustion Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using this unit. Using this unit without running the engine can result in batter y drainage. ! When no power is supplied to this unit be- cause of a replacement of the vehicle bat- ter y or for some similar reason, the microcomputer of this unit is returned to its initial condition except audio settings. Although audio adjustment information is stored in this unit for several hours, we re- commend that you transcribe the data. Y ou can fill the data in the sheet on 121. WARNING Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an ACC position. Precautions En 7 Section 01 Precautions
About this unit CAUTION ! Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. Also, this unit damage, smoke, and overheat could result from contact with liquids. ! â CLASS 1 L ASER PRODUCTâ This product contains a laser diode of higher class than 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain ac- cess to the inside of the product. Refer all ser- vicing to qualified personnel. ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for op- erating procedures and precautions. ! Always keep the volume low enough so that you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle. ! P rotect this unit from moisture. ! If the batter y is disconnected or discharged, the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed. ! If this unit does not operate properly , contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer Ser- vice Station. Playable discs DVD, Video CD and CD discs that display the logos shown below can be played back on this player . DVD audio DVD video Video CD CD Notes ! is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Li- censing Corporation. ! This player can only play back discs bearing the marks shown above. DVD video disc r egion numbers DVD video discs that have incompatible region numbers cannot be played on this player . The region number of the player can be found on the bottom of this unit. Before Y ou Start En 8 Section 02
The illustration below shows the regions and corresponding region numbers. About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and op- eration. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanator y . This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit âÂÂs potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. W e recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and obser ve WARNINGs and CAU- TION s in this manual. Features T ouch panel key operation It is possible to operate this unit by using touch panel key . DVD audio playback It is possible to play back DVD audio. DVD video playback It is possible to play back DVD video and DVD - R/RW (video mode). Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). CD playback Music CD/CD-R/RW playback is possible. MP3 file playback Y ou can play back MP3 files recorded on CD- R/RW/ROM and DVD -R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). ! Supply of this product only conveys a li- cense for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-generating) real time broad- casting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other net- works or in other electronic content distri- bution systems, such as pay-audio or audio- on-demand applications. An inde- pendent license for such use is required. F or details, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com. WMA file playback Y ou can play back WMA files recorded on CD- R/RW/ROM and DVD -R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). AAC file playback Y ou can play back AAC files recorded on CD - R/RW/ROM and DVD -R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). DivX î video file playback Y ou can play back DivX video files recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM. JPEG picture file playback Y ou can play back JPEG picture files recorded on CD -R/RW/ROM. Before Y ou Start En 9 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
NTSC/P AL compatibility This unit is NTSC/P AL system compatible. When connecting other components to this unit, be sure components are compatible with the same video system other wise images will not be correctly reproduced. Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES compatibility Y ou can enjoy the atmosphere and excitement provided by DVD movie and music software featuring 5.1 channel recordings. ! Manufactured under license from Dolby La- boratories. âÂÂDolby âÂÂ, âÂÂPro Logic âÂÂ, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ! â DTSâ , â DTS-ESâ , â Neo:6 â , and â DTS 96/24â are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Multi-aspect Switching between wide screen, letterbox and panscan display is possible. Multi-audio Y ou can switch between multiple audio sys- tems recorded on a DVD as desired. Multi-subtitle Y ou can switch between multiple subtitle lan- guages recorded on a DVD as desired. Multi-angle Y ou can switch between multiple viewing an- gles of a scene recorded on a DVD as desired. Hands-free phoning Using Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD -BTB100), this unit realizes effortless hands-fre e phoning with Bluetooth wireless technology. ! In some countries, CD -BTB100 is not sold on the market. Bluetooth audio player compatibility Using Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD -BTB100), you can control Bluetooth audio player featur- ing Bluetooth wireless technology. ! In some countries, CD -BTB100 is not sold on the market. iPod î compatibility When you use this unit with a P ioneer iP od adapter (CD -IB100II) (sold separately), you can control an iP od with Dock Connector . ! iP od is a trademark of Apple Computer , Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun- tries. Note This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual prop- erty rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. About WMA Before Y ou Start En 10 Section 02
The Windows Media ⢠logo printed on the box indicates that this unit can play back WMA data. WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsof t Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . ! Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Mi- crosoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Notes ! This unit may not operate correctly depending on the application used to encode WMA files. ! Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of WMA files encoded with image data. About AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4. Several applications can be used to encode AAC files, but file formats and extensions dif- fer depending on the application which is used to encode. This unit plays back AAC files encoded by iT unes î version 4.6 . ! iT unes is a trademark of Apple Computer , Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. About DivX DivX is a compressed digital video format cre- ated by the DivX î video codec from DivX, Inc. This unit can play DivX video files recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD video, individual DivX video files are called âÂÂTitles âÂÂ. When naming files/titles on a CD -R/RW or a DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabeti- cal order . Official DivX î Certified product Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with standard playback of DivX î media files ! DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. T o protect the LCD screen ! Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the display when this unit is not being used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in LCD screen malfunction due to the resulting high temperatures. ! When using a cellular phone, keep the an- tenna of the cellular phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. ! Never touch the screen with anything be- sides your finger when operating the touch panel function. The screen can scratch easily . Before Y ou Start En 11 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
For viewing LCD comfortably Due to its construction, the viewing angle of the LCD screen is limited. Y ou can adjust it by changing either screen size or picture adjust- ment. Changing the wide screen size By changing the screen size from 4:3 to 16:9, you can adjust the screen so that the screen can fit to the video image you are playing. F or details concerning operation, refer to Changing the wide scr een mode on page 106. Changing the picture adjustm ent Y ou can make the best adjustment to the pic- ture display by changing BRIGHT, CONTRAST , COLOR and HUE . Y ou can also dim or enlight the overall picture image using DIMMER. F or details concerning operation, refer to Changing the picture adjustment on page 106. What the marks on DVDs indicate The marks below may be found on DVD disc labels and packages. They indicate the type of images and audio recorded on the disc, and the functions you can use. Mark Meaning 2 Indicates the number of audio sys- tems. 2 Indicates the number of subtitle lan- guages. 3 Indicates the number of viewing an- gles. Mark Meaning 16 : 9 LB Indicates the picture size (aspect ratio: screen width-to -height ratio) type. 2 3 4 ALL Indicates the number of the region where playback is possible. When an operation is prohibited When you are watching a DVD and attempt to per form an operation, it may not be per formed because of the programming on the disc. When this happens, the icon appears on the screen. ! The icon may not appear with certain discs. Resetting the micropr ocessor P ressing RESET lets you reset the micropro- cessor to its initial settings without changing the bookmark information. The microprocessor must be reset under the following conditions: ! P rior to using this unit for the first time after installation ! If the unit fails to operate properly ! When strange or incorrect messages ap- pear on the display Important If you press RESET, all memorized settings are erased. F or this reason, we recommend that you record the settings in the sheet on page 121 after you have completed audio adjustments. 1 T ur n the ignition switch OFF . Before Y ou Start En 12 Section 02
2 Press RESET with a pen tip or other pointed instrument. RESET button Note After completing connections or when you want to erase all memorized settings or return the unit to its initial (factor y) settings, switch your engine ON or set the ignition switch to ACC ON before pressing RESET. Feature demo mode The feature demo automatically starts when you select the source OFF. The demo con- tinues while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. T o cancel the feature demo, press and hold SOUND SETTING. T o restart the feature demo, press and hold SOUND SETTING again. Remember that if the feature demo continues operating when the car engine is turned off , it may drain batter y power . Important The red lead (ACC) of this unit should be con- nected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch on/off operations. If this is not done, the vehicle batter y may be drained. Use and care of the remote control Installing the battery Slide the tray out on the back of the remote control and insert the batter y with the plus ( ) and minus ( âÂÂ) poles pointing in the proper di- rection. ! When using for the first time, pull out the film protruding from the tray . WARNING Keep the battery out of the reach of children. Should the batter y be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor . CAUTION ! Use only one CR2025 (3 V) lithium batter y . ! Remove the batter y if the remote control is not used for a month or longer . ! Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or dispose of the batter y in fire. ! Do not handle the batter y with metallic tools. ! Do not store the batter y with metallic materi- als. ! In the event of batter y leakage, wipe the re- mote control completely clean and install a new batter y . ! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or en- vironmental public institutions â rules that apply in your countr y/area. Using the remote control P oint the remote control in the direction of the front panel to operate. Before Y ou Start En 13 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
! The remote control may not function prop- erly in direct sunlight. Important ! Do not store the remote control in high tem- peratures or direct sunlight. ! Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor , where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. Before Y ou Start En 14 Section 02
Head unit 1 DISPLA Y button P ress to turn the information display on or off when the video is displayed. 2 PGM button P ress to operate the preprogrammed func- tions for each source. (Refer to Using the PGM button on page 109.) 3 FLIP DOWN button P ress to turn the LCD panel horizontal tem- porarily from upright position. 4 Ambient light sensor Senses ambient light. This system automati- cally adjusts the brightness of the display to compensate for ambient light. 5 OPEN/CLOSE button P ress to open or close the LCD panel. 6 BAND/ESC button P ress to select among three FM bands and to cancel the control mode of functions. 7 A TT button P ress to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. Press once more to return to the original volume level. 8 Joystick Move to per form manual seek tuning, fast forward, reverse and track search controls. Also used for controlling functions. 9 EJECT button P ress to eject a disc from this unit. P ress and hold to open or close the front panel. a RESET button P ress to return to the factor y settings (initial settings). 1 1 1 2 2 2 8 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 9 a b c d e h h h g g g f What â s Wha t En 15 Section 03 What â s What
b SOUND SETTING button P ress to select the sound setting. c REAR ON button P ress to switch between the video sources (such as DVD or AV ) on rear display . d 2ch/MUL TI-CH button P ress to switch between the multi-channel output and 2-channel output. P ress and hold to switch between the dis- plays on the sub-display . e SOURCE button, VOLUME This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all the available sources. Rotate it to increase or decrease the vo - lume. f V .ADJUST button P ress to display the picture adjustment menu. g ENTERT AINMENT button P ress to display the entertainment menu. h WIDE button P ress to select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one. Sub-display 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 1 Source display Shows the status of selected source. 2 Stereo ( 5) indicator Shows when the selected frequency is being broadcast in stereo. 3 V olume level indicator Shows the value of current volume level. 4 RDM indicator Shows when random play is turned on. 5 RPT indicator Shows when repeat play is turned on. 6 Sound setting indicator Shows what the sound setting has been se- lected. 7 Output setting indicator Shows what the output setting has been selected. What â s Wha t En 16 Section 03
Remote control Button names AV H mode DVD mode with remote control code AVH 1 Remote control selection switch Switch to change the setting of the remot e control. For details, refer to Setting re mote con- trol code type on page 101. 2 SOURCE button P ress to cycle through all the available sour ces. Press and hold to turn the source off . 3A T T button P ress to quickly lower the volume level, by ab out 90%. Press once more to return to the ori- ginal volume level. 4 VOLUME but- tons P ress to increase or decrease the volume. 5 AUDIO button P ress to change the audio langua ge during DVD playback. SUBTITLE but- ton P ress to change the subtitle langua ge during DVD playback. ANGLE button P ress to change the viewing angle during DVD playback. 2 2 2 l l l h h h j j j g g g 1 1 1 m m m k k k i i i d d d c c c e e e f f f 7 a a a b b b 9 9 9 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 8 8 8 What â s Wha t En 17 Section 03 What â s What
Button names AV H mode DVD mode with remote control code AVH 6 2ch/MUL TI-CH button P ress to switch between the multi-cha nnel output and 2-channel output. 7 RETURN button P ress to display the PBC (playback control) menu during PBC playback. 8 Dolby/DTS P ress to switch between surround soun d setting (Dolby P ro Logic II or DTS Neo:6). 9 a /b button ( TIL T/DISC ) P ress to adjust the LCD panel angle. Not used. 10 Remote control operation mode switch Switch the operation mode between AV H, DVD and TV modes . Normall y , set to AV H .F o r details, refer to Using the re mote control operation mode switch on the next page. 11 BOOKMARK button P ress to operate the preprogrammed functions for each source. (Refer to Using the PGM button on page 109.) P ress to turn the bookmark functio n on or off . For details, refer to Resume play- back (Bookmark) on page 33. 12 REAR SOURCE button P ress to switch between the video sources (such as DVD or AV ) on rear display. 13 DISPLA Y but- ton P ress to turn the information display on or off when the video is displayed. 14 EJECT button P ress to eject a disc from this unit. P ress and hold to bookmark a disc at the point you want to bookmark. Not used. 15 0 âÂÂ10 buttons, CLEAR button P ress 0 âÂÂ10 to input numbers. Button s 1 âÂÂ6 ca n operate the preset tuning for the tuner or disc changing for DVD player or multi- CD player . P ress CLEAR to clear the input numbe rs. P ress to select a menu item on the Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). 16 BACK button P ress to return to the previous display. Not used. 17 BAND/ESC but- ton P ress to select among three FM bands and to cancel the control mode of functions. P ress to switch between media file types . (Refer to Swi tching the media file type on page 27.) P ress to switch between media file types. (Refer to Switchi ng the media file type on page 27.) What â s Wha t En 18 Section 03
Button names AV H mode DVD mode with remote control code AVH 18 PLA Y/P AUSE ( f) button P ress to switch sequentially betwee n playback and pause. REVERSE ( m) button P ress to per form fast reverse. FORW ARD ( n) button P ress to per form fast for ward. PREVIOUS ( o) button P ress to return to the previous track (chapter). NEXT ( p) button P ress to go to the next track (chapter). STEP ( r/ q) button P ress to move ahead one frame at a time during DVD/VideoCD playback . P ress and hold for one second to activate slow playback . STOP ( g) but- ton P ress to stop playback. 19 AUTO PLA Y button P ress to turn the DVD auto -playback function on or off . 20 a /b button ( FOLDER) P ress to select the next/previou s folder . 21 Joystick Move to do fast for ward, reverse and track search controls. Click to recall AUDIO MEN U. Move to select a menu on the DVD menu. 22 MENU button P ress to display the DVD menu during DVD playback . TOP MENU button P ress to return to the top menu durin g DVD playback . Using the remote control operation mode switch There are three remote control operation modes on the remote control. AV H mode operation When operating this unit by remote control, the mode is normally switched to AV H . ! The joystick on the remote control can per- form the same operations as the one on the head unit. F urthermore, the joystick can per form the same operations as the touch panel keys a, b, c and d. What â s Wha t En 19 Section 03 What â s What
! 1 âÂÂ6 can per form the same operations as the preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 and the disc selection keys 01 âÂÂ06. â If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12 by using buttons 1 âÂÂ6 , press and hold the corresponding numbers, such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number ap- pears in the display . DVD mode operation If you switch the mode to DVD, the joystick and 0 âÂÂ10 operations are changed for DVD player . % When you want to operate the follow- ing functions, switch the mode to DVD: ! When operating the DVD menu by using the joystick. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 32.) ! When browsing still pictures by using the joystick. (Refer to Browsing still pictures on page 32.) ! When operating the PBC menu by using 0 âÂÂ10 . (Refer to Watching a V ideo CD on page 37.) TV mode operation TV operations available with a Pioneer TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P5750TV) can be controled with AV H mode. TV mode is not used with this unit. ! F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manuals. % When you want to operate the follow- ing functions only on the rear display , switch the mode to TV: ! When per forming manual or seek tuning by moving the joystick left or right. ! When recalling preset stations by moving the joystick up or down. What â s Wha t En 20 Section 03
T urning the unit on and selecting a source 1 1 1 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. Y ou can select a source you want to listen to. If DVD DISC AUTO is turned on, load a disc in the unit to switch to DVD (refer to Switching the automatic disc playback on page 103). % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. The source names are displayed and select- able ones are highlighted. ! DVD â Built-in DVD player ! S-DVD â DVD player/multi-DVD player ! M-CD â Multi-CD player ! FM â FM tuner ! AM â AM tuner ! TV â T elevision ! AV 1 â AV 1 input ! AV 2 â AV 2 input ! EXT1 â External unit 1 ! EXT2 â External unit 2 ! AUX1 â AUX 1 ! AUX2 â AUX 2 ! iPod â iP od ! T elephone â BT telephone ! BT AUDIO â Bluetooth audio player ! OFF â T urn the unit off # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # While operating the menu, you cannot select a source by touching the source icon. # T o close source select menu, touch ESC. % When using the button, press SOURCE to select a source. P ress SOURCE repeatedly to switch between the following sources: FM (FM tuner) âÂÂAM (AM tuner) âÂÂTV (televi- sion) â AV 1 (A V 1 input) â AV 2 (AV 2 input) â DVD (built-in DVD player) âÂÂS-DVD (DVD player/multi-DVD player) â M-CD (multi-CD player) â iPod (iP od) â EXT1 (external unit 1) â EXT2 (external unit 2) âÂÂAUX1 (AUX 1) â AUX2 (AUX 2) âÂÂT elephone (bluetooth tele- phone) â BT AUDIO (bluetooth audio player) Notes ! In the following cases, the sound source will not change: â When there is no unit corresponding to the selected source connected to this unit. â When there is no disc in the unit. â When there is no disc in the DVD player . â When there is no magazine in the multi- CD player . â When the AUX (auxiliary input) is set to off (refer to page 103). â When the AV (AV input) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 95). ! External unit refers to a P ioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions by this unit. T wo external units can be controlled by this unit. When two exter- nal units are connected, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this unit. ! When this unit âÂÂs blue/white lead is connected to the vehicle âÂÂs auto-antenna relay control terminal, the vehicle âÂÂs antenna extends when this unit âÂÂs source is turned on. T o retract the antenna, turn the source off . Basic Operation s En 21 Section 04 Basic Operations
Adjusting the volume % Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. With the head unit, rotate VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. With the remote control, press VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. T urning the unit off % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch OFF. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. % When using the button, press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. Using the rear display Y ou can watch the video sources (such as DVD or AV ) on rear display independently of front display. ! T o watch a DVD/Video CD on the rear dis- play only, switch the operation mode on the remote control to DVD. And you can oper- ate the DVD/Video CD playback on the rear display independently by the remote con- trol. (Refer to page 19.) CAUTION When you have turned the rear display output on by pressing REAR ON, you cannot turn it off even if you press SOURCE and hold. In this case, press REAR ON and hold to turn the rear display output off . % Press REAR ON to select the video source on the rear display . P ress REAR ON repeatedly to switch between the following video sources: F . SOURCE (same source as the front display) â DVD (built-in DVD player)â AV 1 (AV 1 input) â AV 2 (A V 2 input) Rear display output is turned on and the illu- mination color of REAR ON changes to a dif- ferent color from the other buttons. # Y ou can also per form this operation by press- ing REAR SOURCE on the remote control. # T o turn the rear display output off , press REAR ON and hold. # When selecting F . SOURCE , when the selected source is an audio source, nothing is displayed on rear display . # When you watch DVD (built-in DVD player) on both the front and the rear display , audio is not outputted from REAR DISPLA Y OUT . # When selecting FRONT in REAR MODE, you can select F . SOURCE only . And audio is not out- putted from REAR DISPLA Y OUT . (Refer to Set- ting the video of rear display on page 97.) Note In the following cases, the sound source will not change: ! When there is no disc in the unit. ! When the A V (AV input) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 95). Basic Operation s En 22 Section 04
T ouch panel key basic operation Activating the touch panel keys 2 1 1 1 1 TIL T ( / ) keys T ouch to adjust the LCD panel angle. 2 T ouch panel keys T ouch to do various operations. 1 T ouch the screen to activate the touch panel keys corresponding to each source. The touch panel keys appear on the display . # T o go to the next group of touch panel keys, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of touch panel keys, touch PREV. 2 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically when selecting video sources. Operating the menu 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 1 FUNCTION key T ouch to select functions for each source. 2 AUDIO key T ouch to select various sound quality con- trols. 3 SETUP key T ouch to select various setup functions. 4 DVD SETUP key T ouch to select various DVD setup func- tions. ! DVD SETUP appears on the display only when DVD is played back on this unit. 5 ESC key T ouch to cancel the control mode of func- tions. 6 BACK key T ouch to return to the previous display. 1 T ouch AV MENU to display AUDIO MENU. AUDIO MENU appears on the display . # When AV MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the desired key to display the function names you want to operate. Basic Operation s En 23 Section 04 Basic Operations
3 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. Operating the menu by using the joystick Y ou can also per form most of the menu items by using the joystick. ! Switch the remote control operation mode to AV H to operate the menu by using the joystick on the remote contro l. (Refer to page 19.) 1 Click the joystick during display of each source to display AUDIO MENU. AUDIO MENU appears on the display . 2 Move the joystick left or right to dis- play the function names you want to oper - ate. 3 Move the joystick to select the desired function. 4 Press BAND/ESC to return to the display of each source. # Y ou can return to the previous display by pressing BACK. Opening and closing the LCD panel The LCD panel will be opened or closed auto- matically with the turning of the ignition switch on or off . Y ou can turn off the automatic close/open function. (Refer to page 96.) ! The automatic close/open function will op- erate the display as follows. â When the ignition switch is turned OFF while the LCD panel is opened, the LCD panel will close aft er six seconds. â When the ignition switch is turned ON again (or turned to ACC), the LCD panel will be opened automatically . â Removing or attaching the front panel will automatically close or open the LCD panel. (Refer to the next page.) ! When the ignition switch is turned OFF after the LCD panel has been closed, turn- ing the ignition switch ON again (or turning it to ACC) will not open the LCD panel. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE to open the LCD panel. ! When closing the LCD panel, check to make sure that it has closed completely . If the LCD panel has stopped halfwa y, leaving it like this could result in damage. CAUTION Keep hands and fingers clear of the unit when opening, closing, or adjusting the LCD panel. Be especially cautious of children âÂÂs hands and fin- gers. % Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the LCD panel. # T o close the LCD panel, press OPEN/CLOSE again. Adjusting the LCD panel angle Important ! If you can hear the LCD panel knocking against your vehicle âÂÂs console or dashboard, touch TIL T ( ) to move the LCD panel a little forward. ! When adjusting the LCD panel angle, be sure to touch TIL T ( / ). F orcibly adjusting the LCD panel by hand may damage it. % T ouch TIL T ( / ) to adjust the LCD panel to an easily viewable angle. The LCD panel angle continues changing as long as you touch TIL T ( / ) and hold. Basic Operation s En 24 Section 04
# The adjusted LCD panel angle will be memor- ized and automatically returned to the next time the LCD panel is opened. T ur ning the LCD pane l horizont al When the LCD panel is upright and it hinders the operation of the air conditioner , the panel can be turned horizontal temporarily. % Press FLIP DOWN to turn the LCD panel horizontal. # T o return to original position, press FLIP DOWN again. # The LCD panel returns to the original position automatically with beeping sound 10 seconds after operation. Protecting your unit from theft The front panel can be detached from the head unit and stored in the provided protective case to prevent thef t. ! If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turni ng off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. ! Y ou can turn off the warning tone. See Switching the warnin g tone on page 102. ! Y ou can turn off the security indicator . See Setting the security indicator on page 105. Important ! Never use force or grip the display and the buttons too tightly when removing or attach- ing. ! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks. ! Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. ! If removed, replace the front panel on the unit before starting up your vehicle. Removing the front panel 1 Press and hold EJECT to open the front panel. 2 Gently grip the right side of the front panel and slowly pull it outward. T ake care not to grip it too tightly or to drop the front panel and protect it from contact with water or other fluids to prevent perma- nent damage. 3 Put the front panel into provided pro- tective case for safe keeping. Attaching the fr ont panel 1 Make sure the inner cover is closed. Basic Operation s En 25 Section 04 Basic Operations
2 Align the top of the front panel to the unit. 3 Press the bottom of the front panel until it is clicked. Note In the following cases, remove the front panel and then attach it again: ! When nothing appears in the sub-display . ! When beep sounds. Built-in DVD player basic operations Playing a disc 1 Press EJECT to open the front panel. Disc loading slot appears. # When a disc is loaded in this unit, touch the source icon and then touch DVD to select DVD . 2 Insert a disc into the disc loading slot. F ront panel is closed automatically , and play- back will start. Disc loading slot # When DVD DISC AUTO is off , touch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the built-in DVD player (refer to page 21). # If you are playing a DVD or Video CD, a menu may appear . Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 32 and PBC playback on page 37. # When the automatic playback function is on, this unit will cancel the DVD menu and automati- cally start playback from the first chapter of the first title. Refer to Automatic playback of DVDs on page 35. # Y ou can eject a disc by pressing EJECT . Notes ! The DVD player plays one, standard, 12-cm or 8-cm (single) disc at a time. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm discs. ! Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot. Discs which can be played back are listed on Playable discs on page 8. ! If bookmark function is on, DVD playback re- sumes from the selected point. For more de- tails, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 33. ! If a disc contains a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3, you can switch between media file types to play . Refer to Switching the media file type on the next page. ! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play , check that the label side of the disc is up. P ress EJECT to eject the disc, and check the disc for damage before inserting it again. Basic Operation s En 26 Section 04
! There is sometimes a delay between starting up disc playback and the sound being issued. When being read, FORMA T READ is dis- played. ! When the disc loading or ejecting function does not operate properly , you can eject the disc by pressing and holding EJECT while opening the front panel. ! If an error message such as ERROR-02 is dis- played, refer to Error messages on page 112. Basic playback controls The table below shows the basic controls for playing discs. The following chapters cover other playback features in more details. Key What it does f Starts playback, pauses a disc that â s playing or restarts a paused disc. g Stops playback. o Skips to the start of the curr ent track, chapter or file, then to previous tracks/chapte rs/files. ! P er forms fast reverse by touching and holding o. p Skips to the next track, chapter or file. ! P er- forms fast for ward by touching and holding p. Notes ! Y ou can also per form fast for ward or reverse by pressing and holding m or n on the re- mote control. ! Y ou may find with some DVD or video CD discs that some playback controls do not work in certain parts of the disc. This is not a mal- function. Switching the media file type When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3, you can switch between media file types to play. ! This unit allows playback of the following media file type recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM discs. â Audio data (CD-DA) â Compressed audio (MP3/WMA/AAC) files â DivX video files â JPEG picture files ! In case of DVD -R/RW /ROM, this unit does not allow playback of audio data (CD-DA) or JPEG picture files. % T ouch MEDIA to switch between media file types. T ouch MEDIA repeatedly to switch between the following media file types: CD (audio data (CD -DA)) âÂÂROM-Audio (MP3/ WMA/AAC files) â DivX (DivX video files) â JPEG (JPEG picture files) Basic Operation s En 27 Section 04 Basic Operations
Listening to the radio 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 6 6 6 2 2 2 5 5 5 These are the basic steps necessar y to operate the radio. More advanced tuner operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Source name Shows the selected source name. 3 Band indicator Shows to which band the radio is tuned when FM is selected as the source. 4 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 5 Frequency indicator Shows the frequency to which the tuner is tuned. 6 Preset list display Shows the preset list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch FM or AM to select the tuner . 2 T ouch BAND to select a band when FM is selected as the source. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired band is displayed, BAND 1, BAND 2 or BAND 3. 3 T o perform manual tuning, briefly touch c or d. The frequencies move up or down step by step. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by mov- ing the joystick left or right. 4 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip stations. Seek tuning starts as soon as you re- lease the key . # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by holding the joystick lef t or right. Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 you can easily store up to six broad- cast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a key . % When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory keep touching one of preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 until the beep sounds. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memor y. The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key the radio station frequency is recalled from memor y . # When P1 âÂÂP6 are not displayed, you can dis- play them by touching LIST . Notes ! Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the three FM bands, and six AM stations can be stored in memor y . ! Y ou can also use a and b to recall radio sta- tion frequencies assigned to preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 when P1 âÂÂP6 are not dis- played. T uner En 28 Section 05
Introduction of advanced tuner operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the frequency display . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . T uning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. % T ouch LOCAL on the function menu to set the sensitivity . T ouch LOCAL repeatedly until the desired level of sensitivity appears in the display . There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for AM: FM: OFF âÂÂLEVEL1 âÂÂLEVEL2 âÂÂLEVEL3 â LEVEL4 AM: OFF â LEVEL1 â LEVEL2 The LEVEL4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memor y) lets you automa- tically store the six strongest broadcast fre- quencies under preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 and once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a key . % T ouch BSM on the function menu to turn BSM on. BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 âÂÂP6 in order of their signal strength. When finished, BSM stops flashing. # T o cancel the storage process, touch BSM again. Note Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may re- place broadcast frequencies you have saved using P1 âÂÂP6 . T uner En 29 Section 05 T uner
W atchi ng a DVD video 1 1 1 4 4 4 5 5 5 2 2 6 6 6 3 3 3 7 8 8 8 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a DVD video with your DVD player . More ad- vanced DVD video operation is explained start- ing on page 35. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 DVD-V indicator Shows when a DVD video is playing. 3 Title number indicator Shows the title currently playing. 4 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent chapter . 6 Viewing angle indicator Shows which viewing angle has been se- lected. 7 Subtitle language indicator Shows which subtitle language has been selected. 8 Audio language indicator Shows which audio language has been se- lected. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit. (Refer to page 26.) # With some discs, a menu may be displayed. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 32.) 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another chapter , touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next chapter . T ouching o once skips to the start of the current chapter . T ouching it again will skip to the previous chapter . # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another chapter by moving the joystick lef t or right. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. If you keep touching o or p for five sec- onds, the icon m or n changes into rever- sal indication. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you re- lease o or p. T o resume playback at a de- sired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. # F ast for ward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Notes ! Y ou can display the repeat range selected cur- rently by touching INFO. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden auto - matically . Playing DVD discs En 30 Section 06
Listening to a DVD audio 1 1 1 4 4 4 5 5 5 2 2 6 6 6 3 3 3 7 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a DVD audio with your DVD player . More ad- vanced DVD audio operation is explained starting on page 35. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 DVD-A indicator Shows when a DVD audio is playing. 3 Group number indicator Shows the group currently playing. 4 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 6 Sampling frequency and number of quantization bits indicator Shows the sampling frequency and number of quantization bits of the current track. 7 Audio system indicator Shows which audio system has been se- lected. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit. (Refer to page 26.) # With some discs, a menu may be displayed. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on the next page.) 2 T ouch KEY to display the touch panel keys. # When KEY is not displayed, you can display the touch panel keys by touching the screen. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick lef t or right. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. If you keep touching o or p for five sec- onds, the icon m or n changes into rever- sal indication. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you re- lease o or p. T o resume playback at a de- sired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. # F ast for ward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Notes ! Y ou can display the repeat range selected cur- rently by touching INFO. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden auto - matically . Playing DVD discs En 31 Section 06 Playing DVD discs
Operating the DVD menu Some DVDs allow you to select from the disc contents using a menu. ! Y ou can display the menu by touching MENU or TOP MENU while a disc is play- ing. T ouching either of these keys again lets you start playback from the location se- lected from the menu. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. Using DVD menu direct touch control This function allows you to operate the DVD menu by touching the menu item directly . % T ouch the desired menu item on the DVD menu directly . # Depending on the contents of DVD discs, this function may not work properly . In this case, using touch panel keys operate the DVD menu. Using the touch panel keys 1 T ouch to display touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu. # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. 2 T ouch , , or to select the desired menu item. 3 T ouch ENT. Playback starts from the selected menu item. # If you switch the remote control operation mode to DVD , the joystick on the remote control can also operate the DVD menu. (Refer to page 19.) # Y ou cannot operate the DVD menu from the joystick on the head unit. # The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc. Browsing still pictures Y ou can browse still pictures recorded on the disc during DVD audio playback. ! Y ou cannot operate Slideshow . (Refer to Sli- deshow on page 126.) 1 T ouch BROWSE to browse still pictures during playback. 2 T ouch P AGE â or P AGE to switch still pictures. T ouching P AGE goes to the next still picture. T ouching P AGE â returns to the previous still picture. # T o return to the initial still picture, touch HOME . # If you switch the remote control operation mode to DVD , the joystick on the remote control can also browse still pictures. (Refer to page 19.) # Y ou cannot browse still pictures from the joy- stick on the head unit. Skipping back or forward to another title/group % T o skip back or forward to another title/group, touch a or b. T ouching a skips to the start of the next title/ group. T ouching b skips to the start of the pre- vious title/group . Title/group numbers are displayed for eight seconds. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another title/group by moving the joystick up or down. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . Playing DVD discs En 32 Section 06
Resume playback (Bookmark) When playing DVD video discs, you can use this function. The Bookmark function lets you resume play- back from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded. ! One bookmark point can be stored for each disc holder independently. % During playback, touch BOOKMARK at the point you want to resume playback next time. The selected scene will be bookmarked so that playback resumes from that point next time. Y ou can bookmark up to six discs. Af ter that, the oldest bookmark is replaced by the new one. # T o clear the bookmark on a disc, keep touch- ing BOOKMARK during playback. # If you switch the remote control operation mode to DVD , you can also bookmark a disc using BOOKMARK on the remote control. (Refer to page 19.) Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % T ouch during playback. Each time you touch , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . # With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. % Keep touching until is displayed during playback. The icon is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # Y ou can adjust playback speed by pressing q or r on the remote control during slow mo- tion playback. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . # T o return to normal playback, touch f . Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi- ble. Searching for the part you want to play Y ou can use the search function to find the part you want to play . F or DVD video, you can select TITLE (title), CHAPT (chapter), TIME (time) or 10KEY (nu- meric keypad). F or DVD audio, you can select GROUP (group), TRACK (track) or 10KEY (numeric keypad). ! Chapter search, track search and time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH/10key. 2 T ouch the desired search option (e.g., CHAPT). 3 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. Playing DVD discs En 33 Section 06 Playing DVD discs
# Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . # In the time search function, to select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7, 1, 0 and 0 in that order . 4 T ouch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected part. Note With discs featuring a menu, you can also touch MENU or TOP MENU and then make selections from the displayed menu. Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) DVDs can provide audio playback with differ- ent languages and different systems (Dolby Di- gital, DTS etc.). With DVDs featuring multi- audio recordings, you can switch between lan- guages/audio systems during playback. % T ouch AUDIO during playback. Each time you touch AUDIO it switches be- tween audio systems. Notes ! With some DVDs, switching between lan- guages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using DVD SETUP MENU. For de- tails, refer to Setting the audio language on page 98. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and Mch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not be with the same audio system as that in- dicated. ! T ouching AUDIO during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings, you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. % T ouch SUBTITLE during playback. Each time you touch SUBTITLE it switches be- tween subtitle languages. Notes ! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using DVD SETUP MENU . F or details, refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 98. ! T ouching SUBTITLE during fast for ward/fast reverse, pause or slow motion playback re- turns you to normal playback. Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings, you can switch among viewing angles during play- back. ! During playback of a scene shot from mul- tiple angles, the angle icon is dis- played. T urn angle icon display on or off using DVD SETUP MENU. F or details, refer to Setting the angle icon display on page 99. Playing DVD discs En 34 Section 06
% T ouch ANGLE during playback of a scene shot from multiple angles. Each time you touch ANGLE it switches be- tween angles. Note T ouching ANGLE during fast for ward/fast reverse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Automatic playback of DVDs When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted, this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati- cally and start playback from the first chapter of the first title. ! Some DVDs may not operate properly . If this function is not fully operated, turn this function off and start playback. % T ouch AUTO PLA Y to turn automatic playback on. # T o turn automatic playback off , touch AUTO PLA Y again. # Y ou can also turn automatic playback on or off by pressing AUTO PLA Y button on the remote control. # When the automatic playback is on, you can- not operate repeating play of DVD disc (refer to Repeating play on this page). Introduction of advanced DVD operation 1 1 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for DVD playback. % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. T ouch REPEA T repeatedly until the desired re- peat range appears in the display . During DVD video playback ! DISC â Play through the current disc ! TITLE â Repeat just the current title ! CHAPTER â Repeat just the current chapter During DVD audio playback ! DISC â Play through the current disc ! GROUP â Repeat just the current group Playing DVD discs En 35 Section 06 Playing DVD discs
! TRACK â Repeat just the current track Note If you per form chapter/track search or fast for- ward/reverse, the repeat play range changes to DISC . Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the current group during DVD audio playback. % T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the current group. # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Scanning tracks Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track in the current group during DVD audio playback. 1 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur- rent group is played. 2 When you find the desired track touch SCAN again. # After scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Selecting audio output When playing DVD video discs recorded with LPCM audio, you can switch the audio output. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. % T ouch L/R SELECT on the function menu to select the audio output. T ouch L/R SELECT repeatedly until the desired audio output appears in the display . ! L R â left and right ! LEFT â left ! RIGHT â right ! MIX â mixing left and right Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the function may not be selectable, indicating that operating this function is not pos- sible. Playing DVD discs En 36 Section 06
W atchi ng a Video CD 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 2 2 5 5 5 6 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a Video CD with your DVD player . More ad- vanced Video CD operation is explained start- ing on page 39. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 VideoCD indicator Shows when a Video CD is playing. 3 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 5 Audio output indicator Shows the output channel selected cur- rently . 6 Repeat indicator Shows the selected repeat range. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit. (Refer to page 26.) # With a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function, a menu is displayed. (Refer to PBC playback on this page.) 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick lef t or right. # During PBC playback, a menu may be dis- played if you per form these operations. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. If you keep touching o or p for five sec- onds, the icon m or n changes into rever- sal indication. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you re- lease o or p. T o resume playback at a de- sired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. # F ast for ward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . PBC playback During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC:ON is displayed. Y ou can operate PBC menu with 10KEY. 1 When PBC menu is displayed, touch SEARCH/10key and then touch 10KEY. # Depending on the discs, the menu may be two or more pages long. In such case, touch o or p to display the next or previous menu. Playing Video CDs En 37 Section 07 Playing Video CD s
2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 corresponding to a menu number and then touch ENTER to start playback. Playback starts from the selected menu item. 3 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Notes ! Y ou can display the menu by touching dur- ing PBC playback. For details, refer to the in- structions provided with the disc. ! PBC playback of Video-CD cannot be can- celled. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC:ON, search and time search functions cannot be used nor can you select the range for repeat play . Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % T ouch during playback. Each time you touch , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . # With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. % Keep touching until is displayed during playback. The icon is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # Y ou can adjust playback speed by pressing q or r on the remote control during slow mo- tion playback. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi- ble. Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time Y ou can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specif ying a track, and the time search function to specif y the time on a disc at which play starts. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. ! Time search is not possible when disc play- back has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH/10key. 2 T ouch TRACK (track), TIME (time) or 10KEY (numeric keypad). 3 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. # Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . # In the time search function, to select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7, 1, 0 and 0 in that order . 4 T ouch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected scene. Playing Video CDs En 38 Section 07
Introduction of advanced Video CD operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play There are two repeat play ranges for the Video CD playback: TRACK (track repeat) and DISC (disc repeat). ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. T ouch REPEA T repeatedly until the desired re- peat range appears in the display . ! DISC â Repeat the current disc ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track Note If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, the repeat play range changes to DISC. Selecting audio output Y ou can switch between stereo and monaural audio output. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. % T ouch L/R SELECT on the function menu to select the audio output. T ouch L/R SELECT repeatedly until the desired audio output appears in the display . ! L R â left and right ! LEFT â left ! RIGHT â right ! MIX â mixing left and right Playing Video CDs En 39 Section 07 Playing Video CD s
Listening to a CD 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 6 6 6 2 2 2 5 5 5 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your DVD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 CD indicator Shows when a CD is playing. 3 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing disc only when playing CD TEXT discs. 4 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 6 T rack list display Shows the track title list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit. (Refer to page 26.) 2 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick lef t or right. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. Selecting tracks from the track title list T rack title list lets you see the list of tracks on a disc and select one of them to play back. When playing a CD TEXT disc, track titles are displayed. 1 T ouch PREV or NEXT to switch between the lists of titles. # When the list of tracks is not displayed, touch LIST . 2 T ouch your favorite track title. That selection will begin to play . Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist âÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. T ext information recorded on a CD TEXT disc can be displayed. % T ouch INFO. T ouch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Disc Title (disc title) âÂÂDiscArtist (disc artist name) â T rack Title (track title) â T rackArtist (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, No XXXX will be displayed (e.g., No Name). Playing CDs En 40 Section 08
Introduction of advanced CD operation 1 1 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play There are two repeat play ranges for the CD playback: TRACK (track repeat) and DISC (disc repeat). % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. T ouch REPEA T repeatedly until the desired re- peat range appears in the display . ! DISC â Repeat the current disc ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track Note If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, the repeat play range changes to DISC. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order . % T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order . # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 2 When you find the desired track touch SCAN again. # After scanning of a CD is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Playing CDs En 41 Section 08 Playing CDs
Listening to MP3/WMA/AAC 1 1 1 4 4 4 5 5 5 8 8 8 2 2 2 6 6 6 3 3 3 7 7 7 These are the basic steps necessar y to play an MP3/WMA/AAC with your DVD player . More advanced MP3/WMA/AAC operation is ex- plained starting on page 44. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 ROM-Audio indicator Shows when a compressed audio (MP3/ WMA/AAC) file is playing. 3 MP3/WMA/AAC indicator Shows the type of file currently playing. 4 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. 5 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing. 6 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent file. 7 Folder name indicator Shows the name of the currently playing folder . 8 Folder and file name list Shows the list of folder and file name. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit. (Refer to page 26.) 2 T ouch a or b to select a folder . # Y ou can also select a folder by moving the joy- stick up or down. # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND/ESC . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) con- tains no files, playback commences with folder 02 . # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have an MP3/WMA/AAC file recorded in it. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick lef t or right. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. Notes ! This DVD player can play back an MP3/WMA/ AAC file recorded on CD -R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM. (Refer to page 115 for files that can be played back.) ! Playback is carried out in order of file number . F olders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02.) ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used. ! There is no sound on fast for ward or re- verse. Playing MP3/WMA/AAC files En 42 Section 09
Selecting tracks from the file name list File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. 1 T ouch PREV or NEXT to switch between the lists of names. # When the list of file names is not displayed, touch LIST . 2 T ouch your favorite file name (or folder name). That selection will begin to play . # When you have selected a folder , a list of the names of the files (or the folders) in it can be viewed. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select the desired file name. # T o return to the previous list (the folder one level higher), touch . Displaying information on MP3/WMA/AAC file Information recorded on an MP3/WMA/AAC disc can be displayed. % T ouch to display information on the MP3/WMA/AAC file you are currently play- ing. ! ALBUM (album title) ! TRACK (track title) ! FOLDER (folder name) ! FILE (file name) ! ARTIST (artist name) ! GENRE (genre) ! YEAR (year) # When playing back WMA files, lists of album title, genre and year appear in blank. # If specific information has not been recorded on an MP3/WMA/AAC file, no xxxx will be dis- played in the list (e.g., No Data). # Depending on the version of ID3 tag or Win- dows Media Player , the information may not be displayed correctly . Displaying text information on MP3/WMA/AAC disc T ext information recorded on an MP3/WMA/ AAC disc can be displayed. % T ouch INFO. T ouch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Folder Name (folder name) âÂÂFile Name (file name) â Album (album title) â T rack (track title) â Artist (artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on an MP3/WMA/AAC disc, no xxxx will be dis- played (e.g., no artist). # Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. Playing MP3/WMA/AAC files En 43 Section 09 Playing MP3/WMA/AAC files
Introduction of advanced built-in DVD player (MP3/ WMA/AAC) operation 1 1 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play F or MP3/WMA/AAC playback, there are three repeat play ranges: FOLDER (folder repeat), FILE (one-track repeat) and DISC (repeat all tracks). % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. T ouch REPEA T repeatedly until the desired re- peat range appears in the display . ! DISC â Repeat all tracks ! FOLDER â Repeat the current folder ! FILE â Repeat just the current track Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during FILE , the repeat play range changes to FOLDER. ! When FOLDER is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, FOLDER and DISC . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected FOLDER or DISC ranges. # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Scanning folders and tracks While you are using FOLDER, the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using DISC , the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur- rent folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. 3 When you find the desired track (or folder) touch SCAN again. # After track or folder scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks will begin again. Playing MP3/WMA/AAC files En 44 Section 09
W atchi ng a DivX/JPEG 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 7 7 7 2 2 2 5 5 5 6 6 6 These are the basic steps necessar y to play a DivX/JPEG with your DVD player . More ad- vanced DivX/JPEG operation is explained start- ing on page 49. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 DivX/JPEG indicator Shows the type of file currently playing. 3 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. 4 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent file. ! When playing a JPEG disc, play time in- dicator does not appear . 6 Folder name indicator Shows the name of the currently playing folder . 7 Folder and file name list Shows the list of folder and file name. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch DVD to select the DVD player . # If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se- lect DVD (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit. (Refer to page 26.) 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch a or b to select a folder . # Y ou can also select a folder by moving the joy- stick up or down. # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND/ESC . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) con- tains no files, playback commences with folder 02 . # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have a DivX/JPEG file recorded in it. 4 T o skip back or forward to another file, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next file. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current file. T ouching it again will skip to the previous file. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another file by moving the joystick lef t or right. 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. If you keep touching o or p for five sec- onds, the icon m or n changes into rever- sal indication. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you re- lease o or p. T o resume playback at a de- sired point, touch f . # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. # This is fast for ward and reverse operation only for the file being played. This operation is can- celed when the previous or next file is reached. # When playing a JPEG disc, this operation can- not be per formed. Playing DivX/JPEG files En 45 Section 10 Playing DivX/JPEG files
Notes ! This DVD player can play back a DivX file re- corded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ ROM. (Refer to page 118 for files that can be played back.) ! This DVD player can play back a JPEG file re- corded on CD-R/RW/ROM. (Refer to page 117 for files that can be played back.) ! Playback is carried out in order of file number . F olders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02.) ! There is no sound on fast for ward or reverse. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden auto - matically . Viewing a JPEG slideshow When loading a CD/CD -R/RW containing JPEG picture files, this unit automatically starts a slideshow from the first folder/picture on the disc. The player displays the pictures in each folder in alphabetical order . The table below shows the controls for viewing a slideshow . Key What it does f Starts the slideshow , pauses the slideshow or restarts a paused disc. o Displays the previous picture. p Displays the next picture. Rotates the displ ayed picture 90ð clockwise. Playing DivX î VOD cont ent Some DivX VOD (video on demand) content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD conte nt, the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), Rental expired is dis- played. ! If your DivX VOD content allows an unlim- ited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your player and play the con- tent as of ten as you like, and no message will be displayed. Important ! In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider . About your regis- tration code, refer to Displaying your DivX î VOD registration code on page 101. ! DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Di- gital Rights Management) system. This re- stricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. % If the message is displayed after load- ing a disc containing DivX VOD content, touch PLA Y. Playback of the DivX VOD content will start. # T o skip to the next file, touch NEXT PLA Y . # If you do not want to play the DivX VOD con- tent, touch STOP. Playing DivX/JPEG files En 46 Section 10
Selecting files from the file name list File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. 1 T ouch PREV or NEXT to switch between the lists of names. # When the list of file names is not displayed, touch LIST . 2 T ouch your favorite file name (or folder name). That selection will begin to play . # When you have selected a folder , a list of the names of the files (or the folders) in it can be viewed. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select the desired file name. # T o return to the previous list (the folder one level higher), touch . Displaying text information on DivX/JPEG disc T ext information recorded on a DivX/JPEG disc can be displayed. % T ouch INFO. T ouch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Folder Name (folder name) âÂÂFile Name (file name) Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during DivX playback. % Press r on the remote control during playback. Each time you press r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . # With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback When playing DivX video file, this lets you slow down playback speed. % Press r on the remote control until is displayed during playback. The icon is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, touch f . Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi- ble. Searching for the part you want to play When playing DivX video file, you can use the time search function to find the part you want to play. ! Time search is not possible when disc play- back has been stopped. 1 T ouch SEARCH. Playing DivX/JPEG files En 47 Section 10 Playing DivX/JPEG files
2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the desired num- ber . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. # T o select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7, 1 , 0 and 0 in that order . # Y ou can also input the desired number by using the joystick and 0-9 . 3 T ouch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected part. Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) When playing a DivX video disc recorded with dialog in two or more languages, you can switch audio language during playback. % T ouch AUDIO during playback. Each time you touch AUDIO it switches be- tween audio systems. Note T ouching AUDIO during fast for ward/fast reverse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) When playing a DivX video disc recorded with subtitles in one or more languages, you can switch subtitle language during playback. % T ouch SUBTITLE during playback. Each time you touch SUBTITLE it switches be- tween subtitle languages. Note T ouching SUBTITLE during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Playing DivX/JPEG files En 48 Section 10
Introduction of advanced built-in DVD player (DivX/ JPEG) operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play F or DivX video file playback, there are three re- peat play ranges: FOLDER (folder repeat), FILE (file repeat) and DISC (repeat all files). F or JPEG picture file playback, there are two repeat play ranges: FOLDER (folder repeat) and DISC (repeat all files). % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. T ouch REPEA T repeatedly until the desired re- peat range appears in the display . ! DISC â Repeat all files ! FOLDER â Repeat the current folder ! FILE â Repeat just the current file Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during FILE , the repeat play range changes to FOLDER. ! When FOLDER is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . Playing files in random order When playing a JPEG disc, random play lets you play back files in a random order within the repeat range, FOLDER and DISC. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. Files will play in a random order within the pre- viously selected FOLDER or DISC ranges. # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Playing DivX/JPEG files En 49 Section 10 Playing DivX/JPEG files
Listening to a CD 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 7 7 7 2 2 2 5 5 5 6 6 6 Y ou can use this unit to control a multi-CD player , which is sold separately . These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your multi- CD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on page 52. ! This unit does not have a disc title input function. ! Only those functions described in this man- ual are supported by 50-disc multi- CD players. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Source name Shows the selected source name. 3 Disc number indicator Shows the disc number currently playing. 4 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 5 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 6 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing disc only when playing CD TEXT discs. 7 Disc list display Shows the disc title list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch M-CD to select the multi-CD player . 2 T ouch any of 01 âÂÂ06 to select a disc you want to listen to. If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12, touch PREV or NEXT to display 07 âÂÂ12 . # When 01 âÂÂ06 and 07 âÂÂ12 are not displayed, you can display them by touching LIST . # Y ou can also sequentially select a disc by using a/ b when DISC LIST is not displayed. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick lef t or right. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. Notes ! When the multi-CD player per forms the pre- parator y operations, READY is displayed. ! If an error message such as ERROR-02 is dis- played, refer to the multi-CD player owner âÂÂs manual. ! If there are no discs in the multi-CD player ma- gazine, NO DISC is displayed. ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden auto - matically . Multi-CD Player En 50 Section 11
Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % T ouch f to tur n pause on. Playback of the current track pauses. # T o turn pause off , touch f again. Selecting tracks from the track title list T rack title list lets you see the list of tracks on a disc and select one of them to play back. When playing a CD TEXT disc, track titles are displayed. 1 T ouch LIST to display track list. Each time you touch LIST it selects lists in the following order: DISC LIST (disc list) âÂÂTRACK LIST (track list) â no list displays 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT to switch between the lists of titles. 3 T ouch your favorite track title. That selection will begin to play . Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs Y ou can use these functions only with a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player . Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist âÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. T ext information recorded on a CD TEXT disc can be displayed. % T ouch INFO. T ouch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Disc Title (disc title) âÂÂDiscArtist (disc artist name) â T rack Title (track title) â T rackArtist (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, No XXXX will be displayed (e.g., No Name). Multi-CD Player En 51 Section 11 Multi-CD Player
Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 1 1 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the multi-CD player: MUL TI-CD (multi- CD player repeat), TRACK (one-track repea t) and DISC (disc repeat). % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. T ouch REPEA T repeatedly until the desired re- peat range appears in the display . ! MUL TI-CD â Repeat all discs in the multi- CD player ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track ! DISC â Repeat the current disc Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to MUL TI-CD . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRACK , the repeat play range changes to DISC. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in ran- dom order within the repeat range, MUL TI-CD and DISC. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected MUL TI-CD or DISC ranges. # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Scanning CDs and tracks While you are using DISC, the beginning of each track on the selected disc plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using MUL TI-CD , the beginning of the first track of each disc is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur- rent disc (or the first track of each disc) is played. Multi-CD Player En 52 Section 11
3 When you find the desired track (or disc) touch SCAN again. # After track or disc scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks will begin again. Using compression and bass emphasis Y ou can use these functions only with a multi- CD player that supports them. Using COMP (compression) and DBE (dy- namic bass emphasis) functions lets you ad- just the sound playback quality of the multi- CD player . Each of the functions has a two- step adjustment. The COMP function balances the output of louder and sof ter sounds at high- er volumes. DBE boosts bass levels to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as you select them and use the one that best enhances the playback of the track or CD that you are listening to. % T ouch COMPRESSI ON on the function menu to select your favorite setting. T ouch COMPRESSION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings: OFF âÂÂCOMP1 âÂÂCOMP2 âÂÂOFF âÂÂDBE1 â DBE2 # If the multi-CD player does not support COMP/DBE, NO COMP is displayed and COMPRESSION cannot be operated. Using ITS playlists ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a playlist of favorite tracks from those in the multi-CD player magazine. After you have added your favorite tracks to the playlist you can turn on ITS play and play just those selec- tions. Creating a playlist with ITS programming Y ou can use ITS to enter and play back up to 99 tracks per disc from up to 100 discs (with the disc titles). (With multi-CD players sold be- fore the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, up to 24 tracks can be stored in the playlist.) 1 Play a CD that you want to program. 2 T ouch ITS MEMORY on the function menu. 3 T ouch or to select the desired track. 4 T ouch MEMORY to store the currently playing track in the playlist. MEMOR Y is displayed briefly and the cur- rently playing selec tion is added to your play- list. The display then shows track number again. # After data for 100 discs has been stored in memor y , data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. Playback from your ITS playlist ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into your ITS playlist. When you turn on ITS play, tracks from your ITS playlist in the multi- CD player will begin to play . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch ITS PLA Y on the function menu to tur n ITS play on. Playback begins of those tracks from your playlist within the previously selected MUL TI-CD or DISC ranges. # If no tracks in the current range are pro- grammed for ITS play , then ITS EMPTY is dis- played. # T o turn ITS play off , touch ITS PLA Y again. Multi-CD Player En 53 Section 11 Multi-CD Player
Erasing a track from your ITS playlist Y ou can delete a track from your ITS playlist if ITS play is on. If ITS play is already on, skip to step 2. 1 Play the CD with the track you want to delete from your ITS playlist, and tur n ITS play on. Refer to Playback from your ITS playlist on the previous page. 2 T ouch ITS MEMORY on the function menu. 3 T ouch or to select the desired track. 4 T ouch CLEAR to erase the track from your ITS playlist. The currently playing selection is erased from your ITS playlist and playback of the next track from your ITS playlist begins. # If there are no tracks from your playlist in the current range, ITS EMPTY is displayed and nor- mal play resumes. Erasing a CD fr om your ITS playlist Y ou can delete all tracks of a CD from your ITS playlist if ITS play is off . 1 Play the CD that you want to delete. 2 T ouch ITS MEMORY on the function menu. 3 T ouch CLEAR to erase all tracks on the currently playing CD from your ITS playlist. All tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from your playlist and CLEAR is dis- played. Multi-CD Player En 54 Section 11
Listening to songs on your iPod 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 8 8 8 2 2 2 6 6 6 7 7 7 5 5 5 Y ou can use this unit to control an iP od adapter , which is sold separately . 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Source name Shows the selected source name. 3 Song number indicator Shows the number of song played in the se- lected list. 4 Repeat indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent track. 5 Shuffle indicator Shows when random play is set to SONGS or ALBUMS. 6 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent song. 7 Song title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing song. 8 Song information Shows detailed information of currently playing song. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch iPod to select the iPod. # When the iP od is not connected to this unit, you cannot select the iP od as a source. 2 T o skip back or forward to another song, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next song. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current song. T ouching it again will skip to the previous song. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. Browsing for a song The operation of this unit to control an iP od is designed to be as close to the operation of the iP od as possible for easy operation and song search. 1 T ouch TOP to display the top menu. 2 T ouch one of the categories in which you want to search for a song. ! Playlists (playlists) ! Artists (artists) ! Albums (albums) ! Songs (songs) ! Genres (genres) 3 T ouch a list title that you want to play . Repeat this operation until you find the de- sired song. # Y ou can start playback throughout the se- lected list by touching and holding desired list title. # Y ou can start a playback of all the songs in the selected list ( Genres , Artists or Albums). T o do this, touch ALL . Playing songs on iPod En 55 Section 12 Playing songs on iPod
# T o go to the next group of list titles, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of list titles, touch PREV . # T o return to the previous menu, touch . # T o go to the top menu of the list search, touch TOP . # If the playback stops for any reason, touch TOP and refine your search for a song. Pausing a song P ause lets you temporarily stop playback of a song. % T ouch f during playback. P AUSE appears in the display . # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again. Displaying text information on iPod T ext information recorded on the iP od can be displayed on the information bar . % T ouch INFO. T ouch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Song Title (song title) âÂÂArtist (artist name) â Album (album title) # If the characters recorded on the iP od are not compatible with this unit, those characters will not be displayed. Displaying information on song Song title, artist name, album title of the cur- rently playing song can be displayed (if they have been entered in iP od) together with the index and the remaining playback time in the form of the status bar . % T ouch to display information on the song you are currently playing. Song informatio n is displayed. ! Status bar shows the remaining playback time. The bar is filled up from the left to the right as the playback time is consumed. Repeating play F or playback of the songs on the iP od, there are two repeat play ranges: ONE (repeat one song) and ALL (repeat all songs in the list). ! While this unit is set to repeat one song, you cannot select the other songs. % T ouch REPEA T to select the repeat range. T ouch REPEA T repeatedly until the desired re- peat range appears in the display . ! ONE â Repeat just the current song ! ALL â Repeat all songs in the selected list Playing songs in a random order (shuffle) F or playback of the songs on the iP od, there are two random play methods: SONGS (play back songs in a random order) and ALBUMS (play back albums in a random order). % T ouch SHUFFLE to select the random play method. T ouch SHUFFLE repeatedly until the desired random play method appears in the display . ! SONGS â Play back songs in a random order within the selected list ! ALBUMS â Select an album randomly , and then play back all the songs in it in order # T o cancel the random play , touch SHUFFLE re- peatedly until the shuffle icon is turned off . Playing songs on iPod En 56 Section 12
Listening to songs on BT Audio (Bluetooth audio player) 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 2 2 2 If you connect Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD- BTB100) to this unit, you can control Bluetooth audio player via Bluetooth wir eless technology . ! In some countries, CD -BTB100 is not sold on the mark et. F or details concerning operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides brief informatio n on Blue- tooth audio player operations with this unit which slightly differes or is cut short from that described in the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. ! Even though your audio player does not contain a Bluetooth module, you can still control it from this unit via Bluetooth wire- less technology. T o control your audio player by using this unit, connect a product featuring Bluetooth wireless technology (available on the market) to your audio player and connect Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100) to this unit. Important ! Depending on the Bluetooth audio player con- nected to this unit, the available operations with this unit are limited to the following two levels: â Lower level: Only playing back songs on your audio player is possible. â Higher level: Playing back, pausing, select- ing songs, etc., are possible (all the opera- tions illustrated in this manual). ! Since there are a number of Bluetooth audio players available on the market, operations with your Bluetooth audio player using this unit var y in great range. Please refer to the in- struction manual that came with your Blue- tooth audio player as well as this manual while operating your player on this unit. ! Information about songs (e.g. the elapsed playing time, song title, song index, etc.) can- not be displayed on this unit. ! While you are listening to songs on your Blue- tooth audio player , please refrain from operat- ing on your cellular phone as much as possible. If you tr y operating on your cellular phone, the signal from your cellular phone may cause a noise on the song playback. ! When you are talking on the cellular phone connected to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology , the song playback from your Blue- tooth audio player connected to this unit is muted. ! Even if while you are listening to song on your Bluetooth audio player you switch to another source, the playback of song continues to elapse. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Source name Shows the selected source name. 3 Device name Shows the device name of the connected Bluetooth audio player (or Bluetooth adap- ter). 4 Bluetooth audio indicator Shows when a Bluetooth audio player con- nection is established (for more details, refer to Connecting a Bluetooth audio player on the next page). Bluetooth Audio En 57 Section 13 Bluetooth Audio
1 T ouch the source icon and then touch BT AUDIO to select the Bluetooth audio source. # F or this unit to control your Bluetooth audio player it needs to establish a Bluetooth wireless connection. (Refer to Connecting a Bluetooth audio player on this page.) 2 T ouch f. Playback starts. # When you want to pause a song, touch f again. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, touch o or p. T ouching p skips to the start of the next track. T ouching o once skips to the start of the current track. T ouching it again will skip to the previous track. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another track by moving the joystick lef t or right. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. 5 T o stop playback, touch g. Note Depending on the Bluetooth audio player you connected to this unit, operations on this unit to control the player may differ from those explained in this manual. Function operation 1 1 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Connecting a Bluetooth audio player % T ouch CONNECTION OPEN on the func- tion menu to tur n the connection open on. CONNECTION W AITING is displayed. This unit is now on standby for connection from Bluetooth audio player . If your Bluetooth audio player is set ready for Bluetooth wireless connection, the connection to this unit will be automatically established. Bluetooth Audio En 58 Section 13
Note Before you can use audio players you may need to enter the PIN code into this unit. If your player requires a PIN code to establish a connection, look for the code on the player or in its accompa- nying documentation . Enter the PIN code refer- ring to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 105. Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player % T ouch DISCONNECT on the function menu. After the disconnection is completed, No Connection is displayed. Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player When you are done using your Bluetooth audio player with this unit, you can close the Bluetooth wireless connection. 1 T ouch AV MENU to display AUDIO MENU. AUDIO MENU appears on the display . 2 T ouch FUNCTION to display the func- tion names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . # T o return to the playback display , touch ESC . 3 T ouch DISCONNECT. After the disconnection is completed, No Connection is displayed. Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address % T ouch DEVICE INFO on the function menu to display the BD address. V arious information regarding the bluetooth wireless technology are displayed. ! BD ADDRESS (system address) ! SYSTEM NAME (system name) ! SYSTEM VER. (version) ! BT MODULE VER. (Bluetooth module version) Bluetooth Audio En 59 Section 13 Bluetooth Audio
Hands-free phoning with cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 b b b 2 2 2 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 a a a If you use Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB100), you can connect a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology to this unit for hands-free, wir eless calls, even while driving. ! In some countries, CD -BTB100 is not sold on the mark et. F or details concerning operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides brief informatio n on the hands-free phoning operations with this unit which slightly differes or is cut short from that described in the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. Important Since this unit is on standby to connect with your cellular phones via Bluetooth wireless technol- ogy , using this unit without running the engine can result in batter y drainage. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Source name Shows the selected source name. 3 User number indicator Shows the registration number of the cellu- lar phone. 4 Device name Shows the device name of the cellular phone. 5 Automatic answering/Automatic reject- ing indicator Shows when the automatic answering func- tion is on (for more details, refer to Setting the automatic answering on page 68). Shows when the automatic rejecting func- tion is on (for more details, refer to Setting the automatic rejecting on page 68). 6 Battery strength indicator Shows the batter y strength of cellular phone. ! Batter y strength indicator may differ from the actual batter y strength. ! If the batter y strength is not available, nothing is displayed in the batter y strength indicator area. 7 Signal level indicator Shows the signal strength of cellular phone. ! Signal level indicator may differ from the actual signal level. ! Depending on the cellular phones featur- ing Bluetooth wireless technology, radio field intensity is not available. 8 T elephone indicator Shows when a phone connection using Bluetooth wireless technology is estab- lished (for more details, refer to Connecting a cellular phone on page 62). 9 Incoming call notice indication Shows when an incoming call has been re- ceived and not checked yet. Bluetooth T elephone En 60 Section 14
! Incoming call notice is not displayed for calls made when your cellular phone is disconnected from this unit. a V oice recognition indicator Shows when the voice recognition function is on (for more details, refer to V oice recogni- tion on this page). b Preset dial list display Shows the Preset dial list. % T ouch the source icon and then touch T elephone to select the telephone. Note Equalizer cur ve for the phone source is fixed. When selecting the phone source, you cannot op- erate the equalizer function. Refer to Recalling equalizer cur ves on page 84. Setting up for hands-free phoning Before you can use the hands-free phoning function you will need to set up the unit for use with your cellular phone. This entails es- tablishing a Bluetooth wireless connection be- tween this unit and your phone, registering your phone with this unit, and adjusting the volume level. 1 Connection F or detailed instructions on connecting your phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless tech- nology , refer to Connecting a cellular phone on the next page. # Y our phone should now be temporarily con- nected; however , to make best use of the technol- ogy , we recommend you register the phone to this unit. 2 Registration Refer to Registering connected cellular phone on page 63 for instructions on how to register your temporaril y connected phone. 3 V olume adjustment Adjust the earpiece volume on your cellular phone for comfort. When adjusted, the volume level is memorized in this unit as the default setting. # Caller âÂÂs voice volume and ring volume may var y depending on the type of cellular phones. # If the difference between the ring volume and caller âÂÂs voice volume is big, overall volume level may become unstable. # Before disconnecting cellular phone from this unit, make sure to adjust the volume to proper level. If the volume has been muted (zero level) on your cellular phone, the volume level of your cellular phone remains muted even aft er the cel- lular phone is disconnected from this unit. Basic operation of hands- free phoning Important Advanced operations that require your attention such as dialing numbers on the monitor , using phone book, etc., are prohibited while you are driving. When you need to use these advanced operations, stop your vehicle in a safe place and operate. Making a phone call V oice recognition 1 T ouch VOICE to tur n the voice recogni- tion function on. V oice dial icon appears on the information bar . V oice recognition function is now ready . Bluetooth T elephone En 61 Section 14 Bluetooth T elephone
# T o cancel the voice recognition function, touch VOICE again. 2 Pronounce the name of your contact. T aking a phone call Answering an incoming call 1 When a call comes in, touch . T ouching switches between callers on hold. 2 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). Rejecting an incoming call % When a call comes in, touch . The call is rejected. Answering a call waiting 1 T ouch to answer a call waiting. 2 T ouch to end the call. # The caller you have been talking to is now on hold. T o end the call, both you and your caller need to hang up the phone. # While your callers hold the line, touching switches between callers. Rejecting a call waiting % T ouch to reject a call waiting. Introduction of advanced hands-free phoning operation 1 1 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Connecting a cellular phone Searching for available cellular phones 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch Search to search for available cel- lular phones. While searching, SEARCHING flashes. When available cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology are found, device names or Name Not Found (if names cannot be ob- tained) are displayed. Bluetooth T elephone En 62 Section 14
# If this unit fails to find any available cellular phones, Not Found is displayed. 3 T ouch the device name you want to connect. While connecting, CONNECTING flashes. T o complete the connection, please check the de- vice name ( Pioneer BT unit) and enter the link code on your cellular phone. If the connection is established, CONNECTED is displayed. # The link code is set to 0000 as default. Y ou can change this code in the initial setting. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con- nection on page 105. Using a cellular phone to initiate a connection 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch CONNECTION OPEN. The unit is now on standby for connection from cellular phone. 3 Use cellular phone to connect to this unit. # T o cancel this function, touch CONNECTION OPEN again. # The link code is set to 0000 as default. Y ou can change this code in the initial setting. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con- nection on page 105. Disconnecting a cellular phone 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch DISCONNECT to disconnect the currently connected cellular phone from this unit. After the disconnection is completed, No Connection is displayed. Registering connected cellular phone 1 T ouch PHONE REGISTER on the function menu. Registration assignments appear on the dis- play . F rom the top to the third assignment are for User phone 1, 2 and 3. The rest two assign- ments are for Guest phone 1 and 2. 2 T ouch and hold one of the registration assignments to register the currenctly con- nected phone. If the registration is succeeded, the device name of the connected phone is displayed in the selected assignment. # If the assignment is empty , the device name is not displayed. If the assignment is already taken, the device name appears. T o replace an assign- ment with a new phone, first delete the current assignment. For more detailed instructions, see Deleting a registered phone on this page. # If the registration failed, device name of the connected phone is not displayed in the selected assignment. In this case, return to step 1 and tr y again. Deleting a registered phone 1 T ouch PHONE REGISTER on the function menu. Bluetooth T elephone En 63 Section 14 Bluetooth T elephone
2 T ouch DELETE next to the device name you want to delete. A confirmation display appears. T ouch YES to delete the phone. # T o cancel deleting a registered phone, touch NO . Connecting to a registered cellular phone Connecting to a registered phone manually 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch DIRECT CONNECT. 3 T ouch the device name you want to connect. While connecting, CONNECTING is flashing. If the connection is established, CONNECTED is displayed. Connecting to a registered phone automatically % T ouch AUTO CONNECT on the function menu to tur n the Automatic Connection function on. If your cellular phone is set ready for Bluetooth wireless connection, the connection to this unit will be automatically established. # T o turn automatic connection off , touch AUTO CONNECT again. Using the Phone Book T ransferring entries to the Phone Book The Phone Book can hold a total of 500 en- tries; 300 from User 1, 150 from User 2, and 50 from User 3. 1 T ouch PHONEBOOK TRANSFER on the function menu. 2 T ouch ST ART to tur n the Phone Book T ransfer function on. The Phone Book T ransfer is now on standby . 3 Use cellular phone to perform phone book transfer . P er form phone book transfer using the cellu- lar phone. For detailed instruction on this, refer to the instruction manual that came with your cellular phone. # The display indicates how many entries have been transferred and the total number to be transferred. # T o cancel the transferring process, touch STOP . 4 Completed is displayed and phone book transfer is completed. Changing the Phone Book display order % T ouch PHONEBOOK NAME VIEW on the function menu to tur n Phone Book Name View function on. Display order for the Phone Book is changed. # T o change to the other display order , touch PHONEBOOK NAME VIEW again. Bluetooth T elephone En 64 Section 14
Calling a number in the Phone Book Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation. After finding the number in the Phone Book you want to call, you can select the entr y and make the call. 1 T ouch PHONEBOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 T ouch SEARCH to display the Phone Book search display . 3 T ouch an alphabet letter to select the first letter of the name you are looking for . 4 T ouch ENTER to show entries starting with the letter you chose. The display shows the first six Phone Book en- tries starting with that letter (e.g. âÂÂBen âÂÂ, â Brianâ and â Burtâ when â Bâ is selected). 5 T ouch a Phone Book entry you want to call. The display is switched to the Phone Book edit display . # T ouch PREV or NEXT to display other phone book entries. # T o refine the search with a different letter , touch . 6 T ouch phone number of the Phone Book entry you want to call. If several phone numbers are entered to an entr y , touch one you want to call. The display returns to the normal display and the Phone Book entr y you selected is dis- played on the information bar . 7 T ouch to make a call. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . 8 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). Editing the name of a Phone Book entry Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation. 1 T ouch PHONEBOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to edit. Refer to Calling a number in the Phone Book on this page for detailed instructions. 3 T ouch EDIT next to the Phone Book entry name. The display is changed to the Phone Book edit display . 4 T ouch the letter you wish to input. Key What it does Moves the cursor to the previous charac- ter pos ition. Moves the cursor to the next character po - sition. Inputs the space. ABC /123 Switches keypad between alphabet and numeric. Deletes letter by letter from the end of the text. 5 T ouch MEMORY to store the new name. Bluetooth T elephone En 65 Section 14 Bluetooth T elephone
Editing phone numbers Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation. 1 T ouch PHONEBOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to edit. See step two to three on Calling a number in the Phone Book on the previous page for how to do this. 3 T ouch EDIT next to the phone number you want to edit. The display is changed to the Phone Book dial edit display. 4 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input numbers. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . # T ouch CLEAR to delete the number . T ouch and hold CLEAR to delete all the input numbers. 5 T ouch MEMORY to store the new num- ber . Clearing a Phone Book entry Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation. 1 T ouch PHONEBOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to delete. See step two to three on Calling a number in the Phone Book on the previous page for how to do this. 3 T ouch DELETE to delete the Phone Book entry . A confirmation display appears. T ouch YES to delete the entr y . # If you do not want to clear a Phone Book entr y that you have selected, touch NO. Using the Call History Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation. The 12 most recent calls made (dialed), re- ceived and missed are stored in the Call His- tor y . Y ou can browse the Call Histor y and call numbers from it. 1 T ouch LOG to display the Call History . T ouching LOG repeatedly switches between the following call histories: MISSED CALL LIST (missed call) â DIALED CALL LIST (dialed call) â RECEIVED CALL LIST (received call) # If no phone numbers have been stored in the selected list, nothing is displayed. # Y ou can switch between phone number and name (if entered) by touching ABC/123. 2 T ouch a phone number or name (if en- tered) you want to call. The display returns to the normal display and the phone number you selected is displayed on the information bar . # T ouch PREV or NEXT to display other phone number or name (if entered). 3 T ouch to make a call. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . 4 T o end the call, touch . Bluetooth T elephone En 66 Section 14
Using preset numbers Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation. Assigning preset numbers Numbers that you dial frequently can be as- signed to presets for quick recall. Y ou can assign up to 6 frequently called phone numbers to number presets. 1 Select a desired phone number from the Phone Book or the Call History . Or di- rectly enter a desired phone number . T o select a desired phone number from the Phone Book or the Call Histor y , see the in- structions explained in previous pages. T o di- rectly enter a desired phone number , see Making a call by entering phone number on this page. The display should now be the normal display and the selected phone number is displayed on the information bar . 2 Keep touching one of preset assign- ments to store the phone number . The phone number you selected is stored in presets. # When P1 âÂÂP6 are not displayed, you can dis- play them by touching LIST . # No Data is displayed for empty assignment. Even if the assignment is taken, you can replace it to the new one by keeping touching the assign- ment. Recalling preset numbers 1 T ouch one of preset assignments . The selected phone number should now be displayed on the information bar . # When P1 âÂÂP6 are not displayed, you can dis- play them by touching LIST . 2 T ouch to make a call. 3 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). Making a call by entering phone number Important Y ou are required to park your vehicle and set the parking brake in order to per form this operation. 1 T ouch DIRECT to display the direct dial display . 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input numbers. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . # If you want to store the entered phone number to preset assignment, touch SET here. The display returns to the normal display and the phone num- ber you entered is selected. # T ouch CLEAR to delete the number . T ouch and hold CLEAR to delete all the input numbers. # Up to 24 digits can be entered. 3 When you completed entering the number , touch to make a call. 4 T o end the call, touch . The estimated call time appears in the display (this may differ slightly from the actual call time). Clearing memory 1 T ouch CLEAR MEMORY on the function menu. Bluetooth T elephone En 67 Section 14 Bluetooth T elephone
2 T ouch CLEAR next to the item you want to delete from the memory . Select from the following: ! PHONEBOOK (phone book) ! Dialed Calls (dialed call histor y) ! Received Calls (received call histor y) ! Missed Calls (missed call histor y) ! Preset Dials (preset phone numbers) After selecting a desired item, a confirmation display appears. T ouch YES to delete the mem- or y . # If you do not want to clear memor y that you have selected, touch CANCEL. # If you want to clear all the Phone Book, dia- led/received/missed call histor y list and preset phone number , touch CLEAR ALL . Setting the automatic answering % T ouch AUTO ANSWER on the function menu to tur n the automatic answer on. # T o turn the automatic answer off , touch AUTO ANSWER again. Setting the automatic rejecting % T ouch REFUSE ALL CALLS on the func- tion menu to tur n the automatic call rejec- tion on. # T o turn the automatic call rejection off , touch REFUSE ALL CALLS again. Switching the ring tone % T ouch RING TONE on the function menu to tur n the ring tone on. # T o turn the ring tone off , touch RING TONE again. Echo canceling and noise reduction % T ouch ECHO CANCEL on the function menu to tur n Echo Cancel function on. # T o turn echo canceling off , touch ECHO CANCEL again. Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address % T ouch DEVICE INFO on the function menu to display the BD address. V arious information regarding the bluetooth wireless technology are displayed. ! BD ADDRESS (system address) ! SYSTEM NAME (system name) ! SYSTEM VER. (version) ! BT MODULE VER. (Bluetooth module version) Bluetooth T elephone En 68 Section 14
W atchi ng the television 1 1 1 3 3 3 4 4 4 6 6 6 2 2 2 5 5 5 Y ou can use this unit to control a TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P5750TV), which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. This section pro- vides information on TV operations with this unit which differs from that described in the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. Important Depending on the TV tuner connected to this unit, some functions may not be operable. For de- tails, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Source name Shows the selected source name. 3 Band indicator Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to. 4 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 5 Channel indicator Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned. 6 Preset list display Shows the preset list. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch TV to select the TV . 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired band is displayed, BAND 1 or BAND 2 . 4 T o perform manual tuning, briefly touch c or d. The channels move up or down step by step. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by mov- ing the joystick left or right. 5 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the channels until a broad- cast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys. # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by holding the joystick lef t or right. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Storing and recalling broadcast stations If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P01 âÂÂP12 you can easily store up to 12 broad- cast stations for later recall with the touch of a key . TV tuner En 69 Section 15 TV tuner
% When you find a station that you want to store in memory , keep touching one of preset tuning keys P01 âÂÂP12 until the beep sounds. The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key the station is recalled from memor y . # T o switch between P01 âÂÂP06 and P07 âÂÂP12 , touch PREV or NEXT . # When P01 âÂÂP06 and P07 âÂÂP12 are not dis- played, you can display them by touching LIST. Notes ! Up to 24 stations, 12 for each of two TV bands, can be stored in memor y . ! Y ou can also use a and b to recall stations as- signed to preset tuning keys P01 âÂÂP12 when P01 âÂÂP12 are not displayed. Introduction of advanced TV tuner operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the TV picture. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially % T ouch BSSM on the function menu to turn BSSM on. BSSM begins to flash. While BSSM is flashing the 12 strongest broadcast stations will be stored in order from the lowest channel up. When finished, BSSM stops flashing. # T o cancel the storage process, touch BSSM again. TV tuner En 70 Section 15
Note Storing broadcast stations with BSSM may re- place broadcast stations you have saved using P01 âÂÂP12 . Selecting the area group % T ouch COUNTRY on the function menu to select the area group. T ouch COUNTR Y repeatedly until the desired area group appears in the display . COUNTR Y 1 (CCIR channel) âÂÂCOUNTRY 2 (IN channel) â COUNTR Y 3 (CHN channel) â COUNTR Y 4 (U.K. channel) âÂÂCOUNTRY 5 (OIRT channel) â COUNTR Y 6 (AUSTRALIA channel) â COUNTRY 7 (SAF channel) TV tuner En 71 Section 15 TV tuner
Playing a disc 1 1 1 4 4 4 6 6 6 a a a 2 2 2 7 7 7 3 3 3 9 9 9 5 5 5 8 8 8 Y ou can use this unit to control a DVD player or multi-DVD player , which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the DVD player âÂÂs or multi-DVD player âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides information on DVD operations with this unit which differs from that described in the DVD player â so r multi-DVD player âÂÂs operation manual. ! When operating DVD player/multi-DVD player by using the touch panel keys, refer to built-in DVD player operation. â When using a DVD player or multi-DVD player , you cannot operate the DVD menu by touching the menu item di- rectly . ! This unit does not have ITS playlist and disc title functions. ! Switch the remote control selection to sui- table setting to operate DVD players. (Refer to page 101.) ! Switch the remote control operation mode to DVD to operate the DVD player by using remote control. (Refer to page 19.) 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Disc type indicator Shows the type of the currently playing disc. 3 Audio language indicator Shows which audio language has been se- lected when playing DVD video. 4 Disc number indicator Shows the disc number currently playing when using a multi-DVD player . 5 Title/Folder number indicator Shows the title (when playing DVD video) or folder (when playing MP3 or WMA) of the selection currently playing. 6 Chapter/track number indicator Shows the chapter (when playing DVD video) or track (when playing video CD, CD, MP3 or WMA) currently playing. 7 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent chapter/track. 8 Viewing angle indicator Shows which viewing angle has been se- lected when playing DVD video. 9 Subtitle language indicator Shows which subtitle language has been selected when playing DVD video. a Disc list display Shows the list of the disc type when using a multi-DVD player . 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch S-DVD to select the DVD player . 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another chapter/track, briefly touch o or p. # Y ou can also skip back or forward to another chapter/track by moving the joystick left or right. DVD Player En 72 Section 16
When using the joystick on the remote control, switch the remote control operation mode to AV H . (Refer to page 19.) 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast forward by holding the joystick left or right. When using the joystick on the remote control, switch the remote control operation mode to AV H . (Refer to page 19.) Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically when playing DVD video or video CD. T urning the DVD player on or off ! Only the remote control can operate this function. T o per form this function, switch the remote control operation mode to DVD . (Refer to page 19.) % Press REAR SOURCE to turn the DVD player on. # T o turn the DVD player off , press REAR SOURCE again. Selecting a disc ! Y ou can operate this function only when a multi-DVD player is connected to this unit. % T ouch any of 01 âÂÂ06 to select the de- sired disc. # When 01 âÂÂ06 are not displayed, you can dis- play them by touching LIST . # Y ou can also select a disc by pressing a/ b ( TIL T/DISC ) on the remote control when the re- mote control operation mode is switched to DVD . DVD Player En 73 Section 16 DVD Player
Introduction of advanced DVD player operation 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. During DVD video playback ! DISC â Repeat the current disc ! CHAPTER â Repeat just the current chapter ! TITLE â Repeat just the current title During Video CD or CD playback ! DISC â Repeat the current disc ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track During MP3/WMA playback ! DISC â Repeat the current disc ! FOLDER â Repeat the current folder ! TRACK â Repeat just the current track Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! During video CD or CD playback, if you per- form track search or fast for ward/reverse dur- ing TRACK , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! During MP3/WMA playback, if you select an- other folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! During MP3/WMA playback, if you per form track search or fast for ward/reverse during TRACK , the repeat play range changes to FOLDER . Playing tracks in random order ! Y ou can operate this function during CD/ MP3/WMA playback. % T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order . # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Scanning tracks of a CD/ MP3/WMA ! Y ou can operate this function during CD/ MP3/WMA playback. 1 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 2 When you find the desired track touch SCAN again. DVD Player En 74 Section 16
Selecting audio output When playing DVD video discs recorded with LPCM audio, or video CD discs, you can switch the audio output. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. % T ouch L/R SELECT on the function menu to select the audio output. T ouch L/R SELECT repeatedly until the desired audio output appears in the display . ! L R â left and right ! LEFT â left ! RIGHT â right DVD Player En 75 Section 16 DVD Player
Introduction to built-in DSP features Important W e recommend that you record the settings in the sheet on page 121 after you have completed audio adjustments. DSP modes This unit features two DSP modes: the net- work mode and the standard mode. Y ou can switch between DSP modes as desired. Initi- ally , the DSP mode is set to the standard mode. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) ! Auto T A and EQ can be used for the stan- dard mode only . (Refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto -equalizing) on page 92 and Using the auto-equalizer on page 91.) ! A 2-way front speaker output can be used for the network mode only . Note Switching the DSP mode erases the current ad- justing audio settings ( LAST MEMOR Y ). If needed, memorize it into custom settings ( CUSTOM1 , CUSTOM2 or CUSTOM3). Output channel modes ( 2CH/Multi CH) This unit has two output channel modes for each DSP mode: the 2-channel mode and the multi-channel mode. Y ou can switch between output channel modes depending on the source that you have selected. ! Dolby Pro Logic II/EX and DTS Neo:6 ( Dolby/DTS) can be used for multi-channel mode only. ! Graphic equalizer ( GRAPHIC EQ ) can be used for 2-channel mode only . ! P arametric equalizer ( P ARAMETRIC EQ ) can be used for multi-channel mode only . Note When selecting 2-channel mode, audio does not be output from front center and rear center speakers. Sound settings ( SETTING1, SETTING2 or SETTING3 ) Created acoustic sound field can be stored in this unit and called up easily . Additionally, this unit stores the sound setting and output chan- nel information for each source group. Chan- ging the source switches sound setting and output channel information for each source group at the same time. Three types of sound settings can be set and stored for both 2-channel mode and multi- channel mode independently. Moreover , sound settings can be stored for both the net- work mode and the standard mode. Therefore, a total of 12 types of sound settings can be set and stored. ! Auto T A and EQ can be per formed only when the standard mode is selected. P er- forming Auto T A and EQ creates auto set- tings ( AUTO) which are adjusted finely for both 2-channel mode and multi-channel mode. However , AUTO cannot be custo- mized. Source groups Each source stores both sound settings and output channels information. When a DVD player (built-in or optional) is selected as a source, the each medium stores these settings independently . Media of DVD player are listed as follows: ! DVD audio (AOB: audio object) Audio Adjustments En 76 Section 17
! DVD audio (VOB: video object) ! DVD video ! Video CD ! CD (CD-DA) ! DTS-CD ! Compressed audio (MP3/WMA/AAC) files ! DivX video files Note External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same value automatically . Custom settings ( CUSTOM1, CUSTOM2 and CUSTOM3) F ollowing functions can store the settings in the custom settings ( CUSTOM1, CUSTOM2 and CUSTOM3 ). Custom settings are com- mon to Sound settings ( SETTING1, SETTING2 and SETTING3 ). ! Speaker setting ( SPEAKER SETTING) ! Cut-off frequency setting ( CUT OFF) ! Time alignment setting ( TIME ALIGNMENT ) ! Speaker level setting ( SPEAKER LEVEL) ! P arametric equalizer setting ( P ARAMETRIC EQ ) (when selecting multi- channel mode only) ! Graphic equalizer setting ( GRAPHIC EQ ) (when selecting 2-channel mode only) Audio setup procedure Standard mode First, per form Auto T A and EQ. Auto T A and EQ creates finely-tuned sound field for both 2- channel mode and multi-channe l mode ac- cording to your vehicle interior acoustic char- acteristics. (Refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto -time alignment and auto-equalizing) on page 92.) Basically , that âÂÂs all you need to do to adjust the audio setting and no other fine tuning is necessar y . However , according to your wishes, it is possi- ble to customize audio settings based on Auto T A and EQ settings. By carr ying out the follow- ing settings/adjustments in the order shown, you can customize sound field effortlessly . ! Switching the sound settings ( SOUND SETTING ) ! Customizing the speaker setting ( SPEAKER SETTING) ! Using the cut- off fr equency ( CUT OFF) ! Adjusting the time alignment ( TIME ALIGNMENT ) ! Adjusting the speak er output levels ( SPEAKER LEVEL) ! Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer ( P ARAMETRIC EQ ) (when selecting multi- channel mode only) ! Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer ( GRAPHIC EQ) (when selecting 2-channel mode only) Network mode Make sure of the following settings before per- forming finely audio adjustments. Function Setting Page Digital Direct OFF 79 P ARAMETRIC EQ / GRAPHIC EQ FLA T 84, 86 FADER/BALANCE FRONT 0/REAR 0/ LEFT 0/RIGHT 0 78 Dolby/DTS OFF 79 By carr ying out the following settings/adjust- ments in the order shown, you can create a fi- nely-tuned sound field effortlessly. ! Switching the sound settings ( SOUND SETTING ) ! Using the position selector ( POSITION ) ! Customizing the speaker setting ( SPEAKER SETTING) ! Using the cut- off fr equency ( CUT OFF) Audio Adjustments En 77 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
! Adjusting the time alignment ( TIME ALIGNMENT ) ! Adjusting the speak er output levels ( SPEAKER LEVEL) ! Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer ( P ARAMETRIC EQ ) (when selecting multi- channel mode only) ! Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer ( GRAPHIC EQ) (when selecting 2-channel mode only) Extra functions These functions are helpful in adjusting the sound to suit your system or your personal preferences. ! Using balance adjustment ( FADER/BALANCE) ! Adjusting source levels ( SOURCE LEVEL ADJUSTER) ! Using the dir ect control ( Digital Direct) ! Listening in surr ound sound ( Dolby/DTS) (when selecting multi-channel mode only) ! Using the dynamic range contr ol ( DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL ) ! Using the down-mix function ( DOWN MIX) Introduction of audio adjustments 1 1 1 1 Audio display Shows the audio function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU to display the audio function names. The audio function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SOURCE LEVEL ADJUSTER. # When selecting 2-channel mode, you cannot switch to Dolby/DTS . 2 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Using balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide you an ideal listening envir- onment in all occupied seats. 1 T ouch FADER/BALANCE on the audio function menu. Audio Adjustments En 78 Section 17
2 T ouch or to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Each time you touch or it moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FRONT 25 to REAR 25 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . 3 T ouch or to adjust left/right speaker balance. Each time you touch or it moves the lef t/ right speaker balance towards the lef t or the right. LEFT 25 to RIGHT 25 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from lef t to right. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad- just. 2 T ouch SOURCE LEVEL ADJUSTER on the audio function menu. 3 T ouch or to adjust the source vo- lume. Each time you touch or it increases or decreases the source volume. 14dB to âÂÂ14dB is displayed as the source vo - lume is increased or decreased. Notes ! Video CD, CD, compressed audio (MP3/WMA/ AAC) and DivX are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! DVD and the optional DVD player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . Using the direct control Y ou can override audio settings to check for ef- fectiveness of your audio settings. ! All audio functions are locked out when the direct control is on except VOLUME, Dolby PL II/EX and DTS Neo:6 . % T ouch Digital Direct on the audio func- tion menu to tur n the direct control on. # T o turn direct control off , touch Digital Direct again. Note When selecting 2-channel mode, the following occurs: ! If Digital Direct is turned on, output setting is switched to MCH automatically . If Digital Direct is turned off , output setting is returned to 2CH automatically . Listening in surround sound Using this unit, you can listen to any source in surround sound. However , the options avail- able will depend on your speaker setup and the type of source you are listening to. Y ou can select Dolby PL II/EX or DTS Neo:6. Audio Adjustments En 79 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
! When selecting 2CH (2-channel mode), you cannot use this function. (Refer to Switch- ing between the multi-channel output and 2-channel output on page 82.) ! If both the front center and the rear speak- ers are set to OFF, you cannot use this function. Recalling surround sound settings % T ouch Dolby/DTS on the audio function menu to select your favorite setting. T ouch Dolby/DTS repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings. OFF (off) âÂÂDolby PL II/EX (Dolby P ro Logic II/ EX) â DTS Neo:6 (DTS Neo:6) Using the Dolby Pro Logic II/EX Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth output channels from two -channel sources to achieve high-purity matrix surround. ! If both the center and the rear speakers are set to OFF, you cannot use this function. ! Dolby Pro Logic II supports up to 48kHz sampling rate stereo source and has no ef- fect on other types of source. 1 T ouch Dolby/DTS on the audio function menu to select Dolby PL II/EX. Refer to Recalling surr ound sound settings on this page. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to Dolby/DTS. 3 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the desired mode. ! MOVIE â The Movie mode suitable for movie playback ! MUSIC â The Music mode suitable for music playback ! MA TRIX â The Matrix mode for when FM radio reception is weak # Y ou can operate MUSIC ADJUSTMENT only when MUSIC has been selected. Adjusting the Music mode Y ou can adjust the Music mode with the fol- lowing three controls. ! P anorama ( P ANORAMA ) extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting â wraparound â ef- fect. ! Dimension ( DIMENSION ) allows you to gradually adjust the sound field either to- wards the front or the rear . ! Center Width Control ( CENTER WIDTH ) al- lows center-channel sounds to be posi- tioned between the center speaker and the left/right speakers. It improves the left-cen- ter-right stage presentation for both the dri- ver and the front passenger . 1 T ouch MUSIC to adjust music mode. Refer to Using the Dolby P ro L ogic II/EX on this page. 2 T ouch P ANORAMA to turn the Panora- ma control on. # T o turn the P anorama control off , touch P ANORAMA again. 3 T ouch or to adjust DIMENSION (di- mension). Each time you touch or it moves the sound towards the front or the surrounds. 3 to âÂÂ3 is displayed as the front/surround speaker balance moves from front to sur- rounds. 4 T ouch or to adjust CENTER WIDTH (center width control). Each time you touch or it gradually spreads the center channel sound into the front lef t and right speakers over a range 0 to 7 . Audio Adjustments En 80 Section 17
3 is the default and it âÂÂs recommended for most recordings. 0 places all center sound in the center speaker . 7 places all center sound equally in the lef t/right speakers. Using the DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources. 1 T ouch Dolby/DTS on the audio function menu to select DTS Neo:6. Refer to Recalling surr ound sound settings on the previous page. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to Dolby/DTS. 3 T ouch either of the following touch panel keys to select the desired mode. ! CINEMA â The Cinema mode suitable for movie playback ! MUSIC â The Music mode suitable for music playback # Y ou can operate MUSIC ADJUSTMENT only when MUSIC has been selected. # With the DTS Neo:6, audio and voice from TV or radio may be breaking up. In such case, we re- commend you to turn the DTS Neo:6 off . Adjusting the Music mode In music mode, you can adjust the center image to create a wider stereo effect with vo - cals. Adjust the effect from 0 (all center chan- nel sent to front right and left speakers) to 10 (center channel sent to the center speaker only). 1 T ouch MUSIC to adjust music mode. Refer to Using the DTS Neo:6 on this page. 2 T ouch or to adjust CENTER IMAGE (center image). Each time you touch or it gradually spreads the center channel sound into the front lef t and right speakers over a range 10 to 0 . Using the dynamic range control The dynamic range refers to the difference be- tween the largest and sof test sounds. The dy- namic range control compresses this difference so that you can clearly hear sounds even at low volume levels. ! The dynamic range control is effective only on Dolby Digital sounds. ! The dynamic range control may produce lit- tle effect on certain discs. % T ouch DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL on the audio function menu to turn the dy- namic range control on. # T o turn dynamic range control off , touch DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL again. Using the down-mix function The down-mix function allows you to play back multi-channel audio in 2 channels. % T ouch DOWN MIX on the audio func- tion menu to switch the setting. ! Lt/Rt â Down mix so that the surround components can be restored (decoded). ! Lo/Ro â Stereo mix the original audio that do not contain channel modes such as sur- round components. Audio Adjustments En 81 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
Switching the sound settings Y ou can switch the acoustic sound field stored in this unit according to the source you are lis- tening to. F or detailed instructions on creating the acoustic sound field, refer to Introduction of sound settings on the next page. % T ouch SOUND SETTING on the audio function menu to switch the sound setting. T ouch SOUND SETTING repeatedly to switch between the following settings: SETTING1 (user setting 1) âÂÂSETTING2 (user setting 2) â SETTING3 (user setting 3) â AUTO (setting created by auto T A & EQ) # Y ou can also switch the sound setting by pressing SOUND SETTING. # Y ou cannot select AUTO when NETWORK has been selected. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) # When ST ANDARD has been selected, you cannot select AUTO if Auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. Switching between the multi-channel output and 2-channel output Y ou can switch the output channel between the multi-channel output and 2-channel out- put according to the source you are listening to. ! Selecting 2CH changes the audio settings as below: â Both the front center and rear center speakers are turned off automatically in the speaker setting. (Refer to page 87.) â Both Dolby Pro Logic II/EX and DTS Neo:6 switch to OFF. (Refer to page 79.) % T ouch 2CH/Multi CH on the audio func- tion menu to switch the mode. T ouch 2CH/Multi CH repeatedly until the de- sired mode appears in the display . ! MCH â Multi-channel audio output ! 2CH â 2-channel audio output (stereo) # Y ou can also switch the output setting by pressing 2ch/MUL TI-CH . Audio Adjustments En 82 Section 17
Introduction of sound settings 1 1 1 1 Sound setting display Shows the sound setting function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU to display the audio function names. The audio function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to SOUND SETTING to display the sound setting function names. The sound setting function names are dis- played. # AUTO cannot be customized. When AUTO is selected, select the other sound settings by touching SOUND SETTING. 3 T ouch any of SETTING1, SETTING2 or SETTING3 to select the sound setting to be adjusted. 4 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Sound setting function display T ouching the sound setting selection keys en- ables you to cross-refer the other adjustments. Even in the adjustment screen, it is possible to refer and set another setting menus. 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 Sound setting selection keys T ouch to recall the desired sound setting function. 2 Sound setting function display Shows the adjustment screen of the se- lected sound setting function. Using the position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. The position selector function lets you automati- cally adjust the speaker output levels and in- serts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. 1 T ouch POSITION on the sound setting menu. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select a listening position. ! FRONT LEFT â Front seat left ! FRONT RIGHT â F ront seat right ! FRONT â Front seats ! ALL â All seats Audio Adjustments En 83 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
# T o cancel the selected listening position, touch OFF . Note When you make adjustments to the listening po- sition, the speaker outputs are automatically set for appropriate levels. Y ou can tailor the levels more precisely referring to Adjusting the speaker output levels on page 90. Recalling equalizer curves The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. There are eight stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves: Display Equalizer curve SUPER BASS (S. BASS) Super bass POWERFUL P ower ful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal FLA T Flat CUSTOM1 Custom 1 CUSTOM2 Custom 2 CUSTOM3 Custom 3 ! CUSTOM1 , CUSTOM2 and CUSTOM3 are adjusted equalizer cur ves. ! When FLA T is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. When selecting multi-channel mode % T ouch P ARAMETRIC EQ on the sound setting menu to select the equalizer . T ouch P ARAMETRIC EQ repeatedly to switch between the following equalizers: POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂFLA T â CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂCUSTOM3 â LAST MEMORY âÂÂSUPER BASS (S. BASS) # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted equalizer cur ve is not memorized in this unit. When selecting 2-channel mode % T ouch GRAPHIC EQ on the sound set- ting menu to select the equalizer . T ouch GRAPHIC EQ repeatedly to switch be- tween the following equalizers: POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂFLA T â CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂCUSTOM3 â LAST MEMORY âÂÂSUPER BASS (S. BASS) # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted equalizer cur ve is not memorized in this unit. Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer F or custom equalizer cur ves ( CUSTOM1 to CUSTOM3 ), you can adjust the front, rear , front center and rear center equalizer cur ves separately by selecting a center frequency, an equalizer level, and a Q factor for each band. ! A separate CUSTOM1 cur ve can be cre- ated for each source. ! CUSTOM2 and CUSTOM3 cur ves can be created common to all sources. Audio Adjustments En 84 Section 17
! The center speaker largely determines the sound image and getting the balance right isn âÂÂt easy . We recommend reproducing a 2- ch. audio (a CD for example) and getting the balance right among the speakers ex- cept for the center , and then reproducing a 5.1-ch. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and ad- justing the center speaker output to the balance you have already got among the other spea kers. 1 T ouch ADJ. next to P ARAMETRIC EQ on the sound setting menu. 2 T ouch LR Common/LR Independent to switch the equalizer adjustment method. ! LR Common â Adjusts left and right speak- ers simultaneously . ! LR Independent â Adjusts lef t and right speakers separately . 3 T ouch EQ to select the equalizer . T ouch EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂFLA T â CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂCUSTOM3 â LAST MEMORY âÂÂSUPER BASS (S. BASS) # Y ou can also select the equalizer by using EQUALIZER LIST . # T o close the equalizer cur ve list, touch CLOSE. # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted equalizer cur ve is not memorized in this unit. 4 T ouch or next to SPEAKER to select the speaker to be adjusted. T ouch or until the desired speaker appears in the display . FRONT LEFT (front lef t speaker) â FRONT RIGHT (front right speaker) â REAR LEFT (rear lef t speaker) âÂÂREAR RIGHT (rear right speaker) â FRONT CENTER (front center speaker) â REAR CENTER (rear center speaker) # Y ou can mute the selected speaker unit by touching . T o cancel muting, touch . # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . 5 T ouch BAND to select the equalizer band to be adjusted. Each time you touch BAND it selects equalizer bands in the following order: LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) â HIGH (high) 6 T ouch or to select the center fre- quency of selected band. T ouch or until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display . 40 âÂÂ50 âÂÂ63 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ100 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ160 âÂÂ200 â 250 âÂÂ315 âÂÂ400 âÂÂ500 âÂÂ630 âÂÂ800 âÂÂ1k â 1.25k âÂÂ1.6k âÂÂ2k âÂÂ2.5k âÂÂ3.15k âÂÂ4k âÂÂ5k â 6.3k âÂÂ8k âÂÂ10k âÂÂ12.5k (Hz) # Y ou can select a center frequency from among 20 frequencies for each band. Y ou can change the center frequency in 1/3-octave steps, but you cannot select frequencies that have inter- vals shorter than 1 octave among the center fre- quencies of the three bands. 7 T ouch or to adjust the equalizer level. Each time you touch or it increases or decreases the equalizer level. 12dB â âÂÂ12dB is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. # When you adjust the speaker loudness with selecting LR Common , the equalizer levels of both side speakers are changed simultaneously . Thus, if the equalizer level of one speaker is at maximum or minimum, the level of the other speaker is at full limit in opposite direction. 8 T ouch Q.Fac to select the desired Q fac- tor . Each time you touch Q.Fac it switches be- tween the following Q factor: 1.2 (wide) â 3.6 (narrow) Audio Adjustments En 85 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
# Y ou can adjust parameters for each band of the other speakers in the same way. Note Y ou can store the adjusted setting in memor y by using MEMOR Y . For details concerning opera- tion, refer to Storing the adjusted audio settings in memor y on page 91. Adjusting 13-band graphic equalizer F or custom equalizer cur ves ( CUSTOM1 to CUSTOM3 ), you can adjust the level of each band. ! A separate CUSTOM1 cur ve can be cre- ated for each source. ! CUSTOM2 and CUSTOM3 cur ves can be created common to all sources. 1 T ouch ADJ. next to GRAPHIC EQ on the sound setting menu. 2 T ouch LR Common/LR Independent to switch the equalizer adjustment method. ! LR Common â Adjusts left and right speak- ers simultaneously . ! LR Independent â Adjusts lef t and right speakers separately . 3 T ouch EQ to select the equalizer . T ouch EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂFLA T â CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂCUSTOM3 â LAST MEMORY âÂÂSUPER BASS (S. BASS) # Y ou can also select the equalizer by using EQUALIZER LIST . # T o close the equalizer cur ve list, touch CLOSE. # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted equalizer cur ve is not memorized in this unit. 4 T ouch or next to SPEAKER to select the speaker to be adjusted. T ouch or until the desired speaker appears in the display . LEFT (lef t spea kers) âÂÂRIGHT (right speakers) # Y ou can mute the selected speaker units by touching . T o cancel muting, touch . 5 T ouch or to select the equalizer band to be adjusted. T ouch or until the desired equalizer band appears in the display . 50 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ200 âÂÂ315 âÂÂ500 âÂÂ800 âÂÂ1.25k â 2kâ 3.15kâ 5kâ 8kâ 12.5k (Hz) 6 T ouch or to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Each time you touch or it increases or decreases the level of the equalization band. 12dB â âÂÂ12dB is displayed as the level is in- creased or decreased. # When you adjust the speaker loudness with selecting LR Common , the equalizer levels of both side speakers are changed simultaneously . Thus, if the equalizer level of one speaker is at maximum or minimum, the level of the other speaker is at full limit in opposite direction. # Y ou can then select another band and adjust the level. Note Y ou can store the adjusted setting in memor y by using MEMOR Y . For details concerning opera- tion, refer to Storing the adjusted audio settings in memor y on page 91. Audio Adjustments En 86 Section 17
Setting the speaker setting Y ou can make a fine adjustment on each speaker installed in your vehicle. Y ou can change the size of each speaker according to the speaker specification. On a spot at which a speaker is not installed, you can set the ad- justment to OFF. The adjustment you made will be memorized into this unit and you can recall it. Recalling speaker settings % T ouch SPEAKER SETTING on the sound setting menu to select the speaker setting. T ouch SPEAKER SETTING repeatedly to switch between the following speaker settings: CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂCUSTOM3 âÂÂAUTO â LAST MEMORY # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted speaker setting is not memorized in this unit. # Y ou cannot select AUTO when NETWORK has been selected. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) # When ST ANDARD has been selected, you cannot select AUTO if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. Customizing the speaker setting Y ou need to make with/without (or yes/no) and size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/ad- justments depending on the installed speak- ers. The size needs to be set to LARGE (large) if the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds of about 100 Hz or below . Other wise select SMALL (small). ! Low frequency range is not output if the subwoofer is set to OFF and the front and rear speakers set to SMALL or OFF . ! It is imperative that non-installed speakers be set to OFF. ! Set the front or rear speaker to LARGE if the speaker is capable of reproducing bass content, or if no subwoofer is installed. 1 Recall the speaker setting you want to adjust. Refer to Recalling speak er settings on this page. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to SPEAKER SETTING on the sound setting menu. 3 T ouch or to select the correct size for the speaker . Each time you touch or it selects the size in the following order: OFF (off) âÂÂSMALL (small) âÂÂLARGE (large) # Y ou cannot select OFF in the front speaker set- ting. # Y ou can turn ON or OFF in the subwoofer set- ting. # When the rear speaker setting is set to OFF , the rear center speakers switch to OFF automati- cally . Note Y ou can store the adjusted setting in memor y by using MEMOR Y . For details concerning opera- tion, refer to Storing the adjusted audio settings in memor y on page 91. Using the cut-off frequency Y ou can adjust the cut- off frequency and slope to match the characteristics of each speaker unit. And then you can store the adjusted cut- off frequency in this unit for later recall. Audio Adjustments En 87 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
Recalling cut-off frequency settings % T ouch CUT OFF on the sound setting menu to select the cut-off frequency set- ting. T ouch CUT OFF repeatedly to switch between the following cut- off frequency settings: CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂCUSTOM3 âÂÂAUTO â LAST MEMORY # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted cut- off frequency setting is not memor- ized in this unit. # Y ou cannot select AUTO when NETWORK has been selected. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) # When ST ANDARD has been selected, you cannot select AUTO if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. Selecting a cut-off frequency Y ou can select a frequency , under which sounds are reproduced through the subwoo - fer . If the installed speakers include one whose size has been set to SMALL, you can select a frequency , under which sounds are repro - duced through a LARGE speaker or subwoo- fer . 1 Recall the cut-off frequency setting you want to adjust. Refer to Recalling cut- off frequency settings on this page. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to CUT OFF on the sound setting menu. 3 T ouch the speaker to be adjusted. # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF or LARGE . 4 T ouch or to adjust parameters of the selected speak er unit (filter). Adjustable parameters and ranges are differ- ent depending on each speaker unit (filter). Parameter What it does FREQUENCY Selects cut-off freque ncies in the fol- lowing order: 50 âÂÂ63 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ100 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ160 âÂÂ200 (Hz) SLOPE Selects slopes in the following order: 18 â 12 â 6 (dB/oct.) When subwoofer is selected Parameter What it does FREQUENCY Selects cut-off freque ncies in the fol- lowing order: 50 âÂÂ63 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ100 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ160 âÂÂ200 (Hz) SLOPE Selects slopes in the following order: â 18 â â 12 â â 6 â 0 (pass) (dB/oct .) PHASE Switches the phase between NOR- MAL and REVER SE . When tweeter is selected in the network mode Parameter What it does FREQUENCY Selects cut-off freque ncies in the fol- lowing order: 1.25k âÂÂ1.6k âÂÂ2k âÂÂ2.5k âÂÂ3.15k âÂÂ4k â 5kâ 6.3kâ 8kâ 10kâ 12.5k (Hz) SLOPE Selects slopes in the following order: 12 â 6 (dB/oct.) When front speaker HPF is selected in the network mode Parameter What it does FREQUENCY Selects cut-off frequenc ies in the following order: 50 âÂÂ63 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ100 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ16 0 âÂÂ200 (Hz) SLOPE Audio Adjustments En 88 Section 17
Parameter What it does Selects slopes in the following order: 18 â 12 â 6 (dB/oct.) T o switch the filter of the front speaker between LPF and HPF , touch HIGH or LOW . When front speaker LPF is selected in the network mode Parameter What it does FREQUENCY Selects cut-off freque ncies in the fol- lowing order: 1.25k âÂÂ1.6k âÂÂ2k âÂÂ2.5k âÂÂ3.15k âÂÂ4k â 5kâ 6.3kâ 8kâ 10kâ 12.5k (Hz) SLOPE Selects slopes in the following order: â 12 â â 6 âÂÂ0 (pass) (dB/oct.) # Y ou can mute the selected speaker unit by touching MUTE OFF. T o cancel muting, touch MUTE ON . Notes ! Selecting cut-off frequencies sets cut-off fre- quencies of the subwoofer âÂÂs L.P .F . (low-pass filter) and that of the SMALL speaker H .P .F . (high-pass filter). The cut-off frequency setting has no effect if the subwoofer is set to OFF and other speakers are set to LARGE or OFF . ! If tr ying to boost the bass output of the sub- woofer doesn âÂÂt do much or rather makes you feel that the bass gets more murky , this may indicate that the subwoofer âÂÂs output and bass content you hear over other speakers cancel each other out. T o remove this problem, tr y changing the phase setting for the subwoofer . ! Y ou can store the adjusted setting in memor y by using MEMORY . F or details concerning op- eration, refer to Storing the adjusted audio set- tings in memor y on page 91. Using the time alignment The time alignment lets you adjust the dis- tance between each speaker and the listening position. Recalling time alignment settings % T ouch TIME ALIGNMENT on the sound setting menu to select the time alignment. T ouch TIME ALIGNMENT repeatedly to switch between the following time alignment set- tings: INITIAL âÂÂAUTO âÂÂCUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 â CUSTOM3 âÂÂLAST MEMOR Y âÂÂOFF # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted time alignment setting is not memorized in this unit. # Y ou cannot select AUTO when NETWORK has been selected. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) # When ST ANDARD has been selected, you cannot select AUTO if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. Adjusting the time alignment Y ou can adjust the distance between each speaker and the selected position. ! An adjusted time alignment can be memor- ized in CUSTOM1, CUSTOM2 or CUSTOM3 . 1 Recall the time alignment setting you want to adjust. Refer to Recalling time alignment settings on this page. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to TIME ALIGNMENT on the sound setting menu. # Y ou cannot adjust the time alignment when neither FRONT LEFT nor FRONT RIGHT is se- lected in the position selector mode. Audio Adjustments En 89 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
3 T ouch or to adjust the distance be- tween each speaker and the listening posi- tion. Each time you touch or it increases or de- creases the distance. 0.0cm to 500.0cm is dis- played as the distance is increased or decreased. # Y ou can mute the selected speaker unit by touching MUTE. T o cancel muting, touch MUTE again. # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . Note Y ou can store the adjusted setting in memor y by using MEMOR Y . For details concerning opera- tion, refer to Storing the adjusted audio settings in memor y on the next page. Adjusting the speaker output levels Y ou can adjust the speaker output level of each speaker unit. Recalling the speaker output level settings % T ouch SPEAKER LEVEL on the sound setting menu to select the speaker output level setting. T ouch SPEAKER LEVEL repeatedly to switch between the following speaker output level set- tings: CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂCUSTOM3 âÂÂAUTO â LAST MEMORY # Y ou can select LAST MEMOR Y only when the adjusted speaker output level setting is not mem- orized in this unit. # Y ou cannot select AUTO when NETWORK has been selected. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) # When ST ANDARD has been selected, you cannot select AUTO if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone This function allows you to easily get the over- all balance right among the speakers. 1 Recall the speaker output level settings you want to adjust. Refer to Recalling the speak er output level set- tings on this page. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to SPEAKER LEVEL on the sound setting menu and then touch TEST TONE. The test tone is outputted. It rotates from speaker to speaker in the following sequence at inter vals of about two seconds. The current settings for the speaker over which you hear the test tone are shown in the display . F ront lef t speaker âÂÂF ront center speaker â F ront right speaker âÂÂRear right spea ker âÂÂRear center speaker âÂÂRear left speaker âÂÂSubwoo- fer Check each speaker output level. If no adjust- ments are needed, per form step 4 to stop the test tone. # Using TEST TONE , the tweeters and the front speakers are adjusted same time. T o adjust them separately , please refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels finely on the next page. # The settings do not appear for speakers whose size is set OFF . 3 T ouch or to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch or it increases or de- creases the speaker output level. â 24dB to 10dB is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Audio Adjustments En 90 Section 17
# The test tone rotates to the next speaker after about two seconds from the last operation. 4 T ouch STOP to stop the test tone out- put. Notes ! If needed, select speakers and adjust their âÂÂab- solute â output levels. (Refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels on the previous page.) ! Y ou can store the adjusted setting in memor y by using MEMORY . F or details concerning op- eration, refer to Storing the adjusted audio set- tings in memor y on this page. ! The adjusted speaker output level cannot be stored by each listening position. This means, memorizing a speaker output level for custom setting over writes the levels of all listening po- sitions. Adjusting the speaker output levels finely Y ou can readjust the speaker output levels using a test tone while listening to music. 1 Recall the speaker output level settings you want to adjust. Refer to Recalling the speak er output level set- tings on the previous page. 2 T ouch ADJ. next to SPEAKER LEVEL. 3 T ouch or to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch or it increases or de- creases the speaker output level. â 24dB to 10dB is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . Notes ! Y ou can store the adjusted setting in memor y by using MEMORY . F or details concerning op- eration, refer to Storing the adjusted audio set- tings in memor y on this page. ! The adjusted speaker output level cannot be stored by each listening position. This means, memorizing a speaker output level for custom setting over writes the levels of all listening positions. Using the auto-equalizer Y ou can use this function only when ST ANDARD has been selected. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) The auto-equalizer is the equalizer cur ve cre- ated by auto T A and EQ (refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto -time alignment and auto-equalizing) on the next page). Y ou can turn the auto-equalizer on or off . 1 T ouch AUTO EQ on the sound setting menu. # Y ou cannot use this function if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. 2 T ouch ON to turn the auto-equalizer on. # T o turn auto -equalizer off , touch OFF . Storing the adjuste d audio settings in memor y Y ou can store the adjusted audio settings in this unit for later recall. 1 T ouch MEMORY. 2 T ouch any of CUSTOM1, CUSTOM2 or CUSTOM3 to store the adjusted setting. Audio Adjustments En 91 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
3 T ouch YES to store the current setting into the selected sound setting. # T o cancel the storage process, touch NO. Editing the name of sound settings The name displayed for sound settings ( SETTING1 , SETTING2 and SETTING3 ) can be changed. ! Each name can be up to 10 characters long. 1 T ouch any of SETTING1, SETTING2 or SETTING3 on the sound setting menu. 2 T ouch NAME EDIT. 3 T ouch the letter you wish to input. Key What it does Moves the cursor to the previous charac- ter pos ition. Moves the cursor to the next character po - sition. Inputs the space. ABC /123 Switches keypad between alphabet and numeric. Deletes letter by letter from the end of the text. 4 T ouch MEMORY to store the entered name in memory . Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto- equalizing) Y ou can use this function only when ST ANDARD has been selected. (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) The auto-time alignment is automatically ad- justed for the distance between each speaker and the listening position. The auto-equalizer automatically measures the car interior acoustic characteristics, and then creates the auto -equalizer cur ve based on that information. WARNING T o prevent accidents, never carr y out auto T A and EQ while driving. When this function measures the car interior acoustic characteristics to create an auto-equalizer cur ve, a loud measurement tone (noise) may be outputted from the speakers. CAUTION ! Carr ying out auto T A and EQ under the follow- ing conditions may damage the speakers. Be sure to check the conditions thoroughly be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. â When speakers are incorrectly connected. (e.g., When a rear speaker is connected to a subwoofer output.) â When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speaker âÂÂs maximum input power capabil- ity . ! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measurement tone may become loud and measurement may take a long time, resulting in a drain on batter y power . Be sure to place the microphone in the specified loca- tion. Audio Adjustments En 92 Section 17
Before operating the auto T A and EQ function ! Carr y out auto T A and EQ in as quiet a place as possible, with the car engine and air conditioning switched off . Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car , or remove them from the car be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. Sounds other than the measurement tone (sur- rounding sounds, engine sound, tele- phones ringing etc.) may prevent correct measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! Be sure to carr y out auto T A and EQ using the supplied microphone. Using another microphone may prevent measurement, or result in incorrect measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! When front speaker is not connected, auto T A and EQ cannot be carried out. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with input level control, auto T A and EQ may not be possible if you lower power amp input level. Set the power amp âÂÂs input level to the standard position. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with an LPF , turn off the LPF on the power amp before carr ying out auto T A and EQ. In addition, the cut-off frequency for built-in LPF of an active subwoofer should be set to the highest frequency . ! The time alignment value calculated by auto T A and EQ may differ from the actual distance in the following circumstances. However , the distance has been calculated by computer to be the optimum delay to give accurate results for the circum- stances, so please continue to use this value. â When the reflected sound within a vehi- cle is strong and delays occur . â When delays occur for low sounds due to the influence of the LPF on active subwoofers or external amps. ! Auto T A and EQ changes the audio settings as below: â The fader/balance settings return to the center position. (Refer to page 78.) â The equalizer cur ve switches to FLA T . (Refer to page 84.) â It will be adjusted automatically to high pass filter setting for front, center and rear speaker . ! If you carr y out auto T A and EQ when a pre- vious setting of this already exists, the set- ting will be replaced. Carrying out auto T A and EQ 1 Stop the car in a place that is as quiet as possible, close all doors, windows and the sun roof, and then tur n the engine off. If the engine is left running, engine noise may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. 2 Fix the supplied microphone in the cen- ter of the headrest of the driver â s seat, fa- cing forward, using the belt (sold separately). The auto T A and EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone. If desired, place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carr y out auto T A and EQ. Audio Adjustments En 93 Section 17 Audio Adjustments
3 T ur n the ignition switch to ON or ACC. If the car âÂÂs air conditioner or heater is turned on, turn it off . Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. 4 Press SOURCE to turn the source off if this unit is tur ned on. 5 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 6 T ouch AV MENU and then touch AUTO EQ&T A to enter the auto T A and EQ measurement mode. 7 T ouch either of the following touch panel keys to select the position for the seat on which the microphone is placed. ! FRONT LEFT â Front seat left ! FRONT RIGHT â F ront seat right 8 T ouch NEXT. 9 Plug the AUTO T A&EQ microphone into the microphone/auxiliary input jack on this unit. AUTO T A&EQ microphone 10 T ouch ST ART to start the auto T A and EQ. 11 Get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds when the 10-second count-down starts. The measurement tone (noise) is outputted from the speakers, and auto T A and EQ be- gins. # When all speakers are connected, auto T A and EQ is completed in about 14 minutes. # T o stop auto T A and EQ, touch STOP . # T o cancel auto T A and EQ part way through, touch BACK or ESC . 12 When auto T A and EQ is completed, Complete is displayed. When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible, an error message is displayed. (Refer to Under- standing auto T A and EQ error messages on page 113.) 13 T ouch ESC to cancel the auto T A and EQ mode. 14 Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment. Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or any other safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for an extended period, high temperatures may cause distortion, color change or mal- function. Audio Adjustments En 94 Section 17
Introduction of setup adjustments 1 1 1 1 Setup menu display Shows the setup function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch SETUP to display the setup function names. The setup function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Setting the A V input Y ou can connect up to two AV components to this unit and display videos either on AV source or S-DVD source. Switch the AV input setting depending on the connected AV components. ! Select VIDEO to watch video of a con- nected component as AV source. ! Select S-DVD to watch video of a con- nected DVD player as S-DVD source. ! Select B.UP CAMERA to watch a rear view camera video while you are backing your vehicle. When A V component is connected to A V input 1 % T ouch AV INPUT 1 on the setup menu to select the AV input 1 setting. T ouch A V INPUT 1 until the desired setting is selected. ! OFF â No video component is connected ! VIDEO â External video component (such as portable video player) ! S-DVD â DVD player connected with RCA cable # When a DVD player is connected with an AV - BUS cable, do not select S-DVD other wise no pic- ture will be displayed even if you select S-DVD as a source. When A V component is connected to A V input 2 % T ouch AV INPUT 2 on the setup menu to select your desired setting. T ouch A V INPUT 2 until the desired setting is selected. ! OFF â No video component is connected ! VIDEO â External video component (such as portable video player) ! B.UP CAMERA â Rear view camera When rear view camera is connected to A V input 2 CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images, other- wise screen image may appear reversed. Y ou can install a rear view camera onto the AV input 2 and display a rear view camera video. When the gear shif t is in REVERSE (R) posi- tion, the video automatically switches to a rear view camera video. (F or more details, consult your dealer .) Setup En 95 Section 18 Setup
! After you set up the rear view camera set- ting, move the gear shift in REVERSE (R) and confirm if a rear view camera video can be shown on the display . ! If the display should be switched to a rear view camera video by error while you are driving forward, change the rear view cam- era setting. ! T o end watching a rear view camera video and return to the source display , press V .ADJUST . 1 T ouch AV INPUT 2 on the setup menu to select B.UP CAMERA. 2 T ouch B. CAMERA POLARITY on the setup menu to select an appropriate set- ting for polarity . Each time you touch B. CAMERA POLARITY it switches between the following polarity: ! BA TTER Y â When the polarity of the con- nected lead is positive while the gear shif t is in REVERSE (R) position ! GROUND â When the polarity of the con- nected lead is negative while the gear shif t is in REVERSE (R) position Setting the automatic open function T o prevent the display from hitting the shif t lever of an automatic vehicle when it is in P (park) position, or when you do not wish the display to open/close automatically , you can set the automatic open function in the manual mode. % T ouch AUTO FLAP on the setup menu to select the display to open/close automa- tically or manually . Each time you touch AUTO FLAP it switches between the following settings: ! AUTO â The LCD panel will be opened or closed automatically with the turning of the ignition switch on or off ! MANUAL â Y ou have to press OPEN/CLOSE to open/close the LCD panel Adjusting the LCD panel slide position Y ou can adjust the LCD panel slide position so that the panel is set back or for ward. % T ouch FLAP SET BACK on the setup menu to tur n the set back on. The LCD panel slides to the back. # T ouch FLAP SET BACK again to turn the set back off and the LCD panel slides to the front. Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. 1 T ouch CLOCK ADJUSTMENT on the setup menu. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to set the clock. # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 3 T ouch ENTER. Note T ouching 24h/ 12h switches the clock display on the sub-display between 12/24-hour formats. Setup En 96 Section 18
Setting the video of rear display Y ou can select either showing the same source as the front display or showing the video source on rear display independently . ! When selecting FRONT and the selected source is an audio source, nothing is dis- played on the rear display . ! When selecting FRONT, audio is not out- putted from REAR DISPLA Y OUT . % T ouch REAR MODE on the setup menu to select the video on rear display . Each time you touch REAR MODE it switches between the following settings: ! FRONT â Display the same source as the front display ! SEP ARA TE â Display the video source on rear display independently of front dis- play Switching the dimmer setting for sub-display T o prevent the sub-display from being too bright at night, the sub-display is automati- cally dimmed when the car âÂÂs headlights are turned on. Y ou can turn dimmer on or off . % T ouch SUB DISPLA Y DIMMER on the setup menu to tur n dimmer on. # T o turn dimmer off , touch SUB DISPLA Y DIMMER again. Adjusting the contrast for the sub-displ ay Display contrast adjustment lets you adjust the display for easier viewing when lighting conditions change. % Press SUB DISPLA Y CONTRAST on the setup menu to switch the contrast setting. Each time you touch SUB DISPLA Y CONTRAST it switches between HIGH (high contrast) and LOW (low contras- t). Changing languages for CAUTION Some operations on this unit are prohibited while driving or needs to be paid a careful at- tention when operating. In such case, a cau- tion appears on the display . Y ou can change the language of the cautions at this setting. 1 T ouch CAUTION LANGUAGE on the setup menu. 2 T ouch the desired language. The language for CAUTION is set. Setup En 97 Section 18 Setup
Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 1 1 1 Y ou can use this menu to change audio, subti- tle, parental lock and other DVD settings. ! When watching a DVD/Video CD on the rear display independently, you cannot op- erate this menu . 1 DVD setup menu display Shows the DVD setup menu names. 1 While playing a disc, touch A V MENU and then touch DVD SETUP to display the DVD setup function names. The DVD setup function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Setting the subtitle language Y ou can set a desired subtitle language. If the selected subtitle language is recorded on the DVD, subtitles are displayed in that language. 1 T ouch SUB TITLE LANGUAGE on the DVD setup menu. A subtitle language menu is displayed. 2 T ouch the desired language. A subtitle language is set. # If you have selected Others , refer to When you select Others on this page. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is displayed. ! Y ou can also switch the subtitle language by touching SUBTITLE during playback. (Refer to Changing the subtitle language during play- back (Multi-subtitle) on page 34.) ! Even if you use SUBTITLE during playback to switch the subtitle language, this does not af- fect the settings here. When you select Others When you select Others, a language code input display is shown. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 120 to input the four- digit code of the desired language. 1 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the language code. # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 2 T ouch ENTER. Setting the audio language Y ou can set the preferred audio language. 1 T ouch AUDIO LANGUAGE on the DVD setup menu. An audio language menu is displayed. 2 T ouch the desired language. The audio language is set. # If you have selected Others , refer to When you select Others on this page. Setting up the DVD player En 98 Section 19
Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is outputted. ! Y ou can also switch the audio language by touching AUDIO during playback. (Refer to Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) on page 34.) ! Even if you use AUDIO during playback to switch the audio language, this does not af- fect the settings here. Setting the menu language Y ou can set the preferred language for dis- plays of menus recorded on a disc. 1 T ouch MENU LANGUAGE on the DVD setup menu. A menu language menu is displayed. 2 T ouch the desired language. The menu language is set. # If you have selected Others , refer to When you select Others on the previous page. Note If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is dis- played. Switching the assist subtitle on or off If assist subtitles are recorded on a DVD disc, you can display them by turning the assist subtitle function on. Y ou can turn assist subtitles on or off as de- sired. % T ouch ASSIST SUB TITLE on the DVD setup menu to tur n assist subtitles on. # T o turn the assist subtitle off , touch ASSIST SUB TITLE again. Setting the angle icon display Y ou can set it up so that the angle icon ap- pears on scenes where the angle can be switched. % T ouch MUL TI ANGLE on the DVD setup menu to tur n angle icon display on. # T o turn the angle icon display off , touch MUL TI ANGLE again. Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display . A wide screen display has a width-to -height ratio (TV aspect) of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display connected to REAR DISPLA Y OUT . ! When using a regular display , select either LETTER BOX or P AN SCAN . Selecting 16:9 may result in an unnatural picture. ! If you select the TV aspect, the unit âÂÂs dis- play changes to the same setting. % T ouch TV ASPECT on the DVD setup menu to select the TV aspect. T ouch TV ASPECT repeatedly until the desired TV aspect appears in the display . ! 16:9 â Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis- played as it is (initial setting) ! LETTER BOX â The picture is the shape of a letterbox with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen ! P AN SCAN â The picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen Setting up the DVD player En 99 Section 19 Setting up the DVD player
Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify P AN SCAN , playback is with LETTER BOX even if you select P AN SCAN setting. Confirm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark. (See page 12.) ! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc âÂÂs in- structions. Setting the parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict children from viewing violent and adult- oriented scenes. Y ou can set the par- ental lock to your desired level. ! When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock, code number input indications may be dis- played. In this case, playback will begin when the correct code number is input. Setting the code number and level Y ou need to have registered a code number for playing back discs with parantal lock. 1 T ouch P ARENT AL on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input a four digit code number . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 3 T ouch ENTER. The code number is set, and you can now set the level. 4 T ouch any of 1 âÂÂ8 to select the desired level. The parental lock level is set. ! 8 â Playback of the entire disc is possible (initial setting) ! 7 to 2 â Playback of discs for children and non-adult-oriented discs is possible ! 1 â Playback of discs for children only is possible Notes ! W e recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. ! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc. Look for the level indication written at the disc package, included literature or on the disc it- self . P arental lock of this unit is not possible if a parental lock level is not recorded in the disc. ! With some discs, the parental lock may be ac- tive only on the scenes with certain levels. The playback of those scenes will be skipped. For details, refer to the instruction manual that came with the discs. Changing the level Y ou can change the set parental lock level. 1 T ouch P ARENT AL on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the registered code number . 3 T ouch ENTER. This enters the code number , and you can now change the level. # If you input an incorrect code number , the icon is displayed. T ouch C and input the cor- rect code number . # If you forget your code number , refer to If you forget your code number on the next page. 4 T ouch any of 1 âÂÂ8 to select the desired level. The new parental lock level is set. Setting up the DVD player En 100 Section 19
If you forget your code number Refer to Changing the level on the previous page, and touch C 10 times. The registered code number is canceled, letting you register a new one. Setting the still picture The unit uses one of two processes when dis- playing a still picture from a DVD disc. % T ouch STILL PICTURE on the DVD setup menu to select the setting. T ouch STILL PICTURE repeatedly until the de- sired setting appears in the display . ! AUTO â FIELD or FRAME is selected auto - matically by this unit. ! FIELD â P roduces a stable, generally shake- free image. ! FRAME â P roduces a sharper image, but more prone to shake than field stills. T o play back bonus groups Some DVD audio discs have an extra âÂÂbonus â group that requires a four-digit password to access. See the disc packaging for details and the password. When you tr y and play the bonus group, the password input screen will automatically appear . ! The bonus group can be played back after the password has been entered, until the disc is removed from the unit. 1 T ouch BONUS GROUP on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input a four -digit pass- word. # If you input an incorrect password, touch C and then input the correct password. 3 T ouch ENTER. Displaying your DivX î VOD registration code In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider . Y ou do this by generating a DivX VOD registra- tion code, which you submit to your provider . % T ouch DivX VOD on the DVD setup menu. Y our 8-digit registration code is displayed. ! Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider . Setting remote control code type When the remote control operation switch is set to DVD, changing the remote control code type enables you to operate the P ioneer DVD player with the supplied remote control. There are three remote codes, code type A , code type B and code type AV H . When operating a multi-DVD player (e.g. XDV -P90), select code A . When operating this unit, select code AV H . 1 Set the remote control selection switch on the left side of the remote control to the appropriate position with a pen tip or other pointed instrument . ! If you select AV H mode, there is no need to take the following procedure. ! If you select A/ B mode, take the following procedure and change the code type to the appropriate type. 2 Press 7 and 0 on the remote control si- multaneously to change the code type. Initially , the code type is set to A. Each time you press 7 and 0 simultaneously on the re- mote control the code type switches between A and B . Setting up the DVD player En 101 Section 19 Setting up the DVD player
Adjusting initial settings 1 1 1 Using the initial settings, you can customize various system settings to achieve optimal per- formance from this unit. 1 Function display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch OFF to tur n this unit off. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch AV MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . 4 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Note Y ou can use AUTO EQ&T A (auto- time alignment and auto-equalizing), only when ST ANDARD has been selected in DSP MODE . (Refer to Switching the DSP setting mode on page 104.) Setting the FM tuning step The FM tuning step employed by seek tuning can be switched between 100 kHz, the preset step, and 50 kHz. % T ouch FM STEP on the initial menu to select the FM tuning step. T ouching FM STEP will switch the FM tuning step between 50 kHz and 100 kHz. The se- lected FM tuning step will appear in the dis- play . Note If seek tuning is per formed in 50 kHz steps, sta- tions may be tuned in imprecisely . T une in the sta- tions with manual tuning or use seek tuning again. Setting the AM tuning step The AM tuning step can be switched between 9 kHz, the preset step, and 10 kHz. When using the tuner in North, Central or South America, reset the tuning step from 9 kHz (531 kHz to 1 602 kHz allowable) to 10 kHz (530 kHz to 1 640 kHz allowable). % T ouch AM STEP on the initial menu to select the AM tuning step. T ouching AM STEP will switch the AM tuning step between 9 kHz and 10 kHz. The selected AM tuning step will appear in the display . Switching the war ning tone If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turni ng off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. Y ou can turn off the warning tone. Initial Settings En 102 Section 20
% T ouch DET ACH W ARNING on the initial menu to tur n war ning tone on. # T o turn warning tone off , touch DET ACH W ARNING again. Switching the auxiliary setting Auxiliar y equipments connected to this unit can be activated individually . Set each AUX source to ON when using. About connecting or using auxiliar y equipments, refer to Using the AUX sour ce on page 109. % T ouch AUX1/AUX2 on the initial menu to tur n each auxiliary setting on. # T o turn auxiliar y setting off , touch AUX1/ AUX2 again. Correcting distort ed sound Y ou can minimize distortion that may be caused by the equalizer cur ve settings. Setting an equalizer level high can cause dis- tortion. If high sound is crippled or distorted, tr y switching to LOW. Normally , leave the set- ting at HIGH to ensure quality sound. % T ouch DIGIT AL A TT on the initial menu to switch the digital attenuator setting. T ouch DIGIT AL A TT repeatedly until the de- sired setting appears in the display . ! HIGH â High quality sound ! LOW â Minimize distortion sound Switching the sound muting/attenuation Sound from this system is muted or attenu- ated autom atically when the signal from the equipment with mute function is received. ! Sound from this system returns to normal when the muting or attenuation is can- celed. % T ouch MUTE on the initial menu to se- lect any of the muting, attenuation or off. T ouch MUTE until the desired setting appears in the display . ! MUTE â Muting ! AT T â 10dB â Attenuation ! AT T â 20dB â Attenuation ( AT T â 20dB has a stronger effect than AT T â 10dB) ! OFF â T urn the sound muting/attenuation off Notes ! The sound is turned off , MUTE is displayed and no audio adjustments are possible. ! The sound is attenuated, AT T is displayed and no audio adjustments, except volume control, are possible. ! Operation returns to normal when the phone connection is ended. Switching the automatic disc playback Y ou can turn automatic disc playback on or off when you insert a disc into the disc loading slot. When this function is on, the disc will be automatically played af ter it is inserted into the disc loading slot. Initially , this function is set to on. Initial Settings En 103 Section 20 Initial Settings
% T ouch DVD DISC AUTO on the initial menu to tur n automatic disc playback on. # T o turn automatic disc playback off , touch DVD DISC AUTO again. Resetting the audio functions Y ou can reset all audio functions except vo- lume. Important If you per form this operation, audio settings are erased. F or this reason, we recommend that you record the settings in the sheet on page 121 after you have completed audio adjustments. 1 T ouch AUDIO RESET on the initial menu. 2 T ouch RESET. Proceed with reset? appears and asks you to confirm it. 3 T ouch RESET again to reset audio func- tions. Reset completed is displayed and the audio settings are reset. # T o cancel resetting the audio functions, touch CANCEL . Switching the DSP setting mode This unit features two operation modes: the network mode and the standard mode. Y ou can switch between modes as desired. Initi- ally , the DSP setting is set to the standard mode. ! Switching the DSP mode erases the cur- rent adjusting audio settings ( LAST MEMOR Y ). If needed, memorize it into custom settings ( CUSTOM1, CUSTOM2 or CUSTOM3 ). 1 T ouch DSP MODE on the initial menu. 2 T ouch either of the following touch panel keys to select the desired mode. ! ST ANDARD â Standard mode ! NETWORK â Network mode 3 T ouch CHANGE to change the mode. # T o cancel changing the mode, touch CANCEL . Setting the optical input When connecting a DVD player , select S-DVD. % T ouch OPTICAL INPUT on the initial menu to select the optical input setting. T ouch OPTICAL INPUT until the desired set- ting appears in the display . ! OFF â No DVD player is connected ! S-DVD â DVD player/multi-DVD player Setting the TV signal When this unit is connected to a TV tuner , you need to adjust the TV signal suitable to your countr y TV signal setting. ! This function is initially set to AUTO so that this unit automatically adjusts the TV signal setting. % T ouch TV FORMA T on the initial menu to select an appropriate TV signal. T ouching TV FORMA T switches TV signal set- tings in the following order: AUTO â PA L âÂÂNTSC âÂÂP AL-M âÂÂSECAM Initial Settings En 104 Section 20
Note About your countr y TV signal, consult with your nearest P ioneer dealer . Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection With some Bluetooth audio players, you may be required to enter to this unit in advance PIN code of your Bluetooth audio player , in order to set this unit ready for a connection from your Bluetooth audio player . ! Only when Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD - BTB100) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. 1 T ouch PIN EDIT on the initial menu. PIN code input display appears. 2 T ouch 0 âÂÂ9 to input the PIN code of your Bluetooth audio player . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 3 After inputting PIN code (up to 16 di- gits), touch ENTER. The PIN code you entered is stored in this unit. Setting the security indicator The LED indicator (security indicator) will flash when front panel is detached from the head unit. Y ou can turn this indicator on or off . % T ouch SECURITY INDICA TOR on the in- itial menu to tur n security indicator on. # T o turn security indicator off , touch SECURITY INDICA TOR again. Initial Settings En 105 Section 20 Initial Settings
Switching the display on the sub-displ ay Y ou can switch between the displays on the sub-display . % Press 2ch/MUL TI-CH and hold to switch the display . P ress and hold 2ch/MUL TI-CH repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Source display âÂÂclock display âÂÂOFF Adjusting the screen Changing the wide screen mod e Y ou can select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one. % Press WIDE to select the desired set- ting. P ress WIDE repeatedly to switch between the following settings: FULL (full) âÂÂJUST (just) âÂÂCINEMA (cinema) â ZOOM (zoom) âÂÂNORMAL (normal) â AUTO (auto) FULL (full) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direc- tion only , giving you a 4:3 TV picture (normal pic- ture) without any omissions. JUST (just) The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and the amount of enlargement increases horizontally to the ends, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without sensing any disparity even on a wide screen. CINEMA (cinema) The picture is enlarged by the same proportion as FULL or ZOOM in the horizontal direction and by an intermediate proportion between FULL and ZOOM in the vertical direction; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture) where cap- tions lie outside. ZOOM (zoom) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion both vertically and horizontally ; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture). NORMAL (normal) A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no sense of disparity since its proportions are the same as that of the normal picture. AUTO (auto) In this mode, this unit selects the appropriate set- ting from among FULL , JUST, CINEMA , ZOOM or NORMAL automatically . Notes ! Different settings can be memorized for each video source. ! When video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original aspect ratio, it may appear different. ! Remember that using the wide mode feature of this system for commercial or public view- ing purposes may constitute an infringement on the author âÂÂs rights protected by the Copy- right Law . ! Video will appear grainy when viewed in CINEMA or ZOOM mode. Changing the picture adjustm ent Y ou can adjust BRIGHT (brightness), CONTRAST (contrast), COLOR (color) and HUE (hue) for each source and rear view cam- era. Other Functions En 106 Section 21
! The adjustments of BRIGHT and CONTRAST are stored separately for light ambient (daytime) and dark ambient (night- time). A sun or moon is displayed to the lef t of BRIGHT and CONTRAST, respec- tively , as the ambient light sensor deter- mines brightness or darkness. ! Y ou cannot adjust HUE for P AL video. ! Y ou cannot adjust COLOR or HUE for the audio source. 1 Press V .ADJUST to display PICTURE ADJUSTMENT. 2 T ouch or to adjust the following items. The adjustment function names are displayed and adjustable ones are highlighted. Each time you touch or it increases or de- creases the level of selected item. â 24 to 24 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. ! BRIGHT â Adjust the black intensity ! CONTRAST â Adjust the contrast ! COLOR â Adjust the color saturation ! HUE â Adjust the tone of color (red is em- phasized or green is emphasized) ! DIMMER â Adjust the brightness of display ! B.Camera /SOURCE â Switch the picture ad- justment modes # Y ou can adjust the picture adjustment for rear view camera only when BACK UP CAMERA IN is turned on. (Refer to When rear view camera is con- nected to A V input 2 on page 95.) # If you are viewing image from the rear view camera, you cannot adjust picture adjustment for the selected source. # With some rear view cameras, picture adjust- ment may not be possible. 3 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Adjusting the dimmer The adjustment of DIMMER is stored sepa- rately for each ambient light; daytime, evening and nighttime. The brightness of LCD screen will be adjusted to optimum level automati- cally in accordance with the ambient light based on the setting values. ! The icons indicating the current ambient brightness used for adjusting BRIGHT and CONTRAST may differ from DIMMER slightly . 1 Press V .ADJUST to display PICTURE ADJUSTMENT. The ambient light level used as the standard for adjusting DIMMER appears above the level bar . ! Red sun â Adjust the brightness for bright ambient light (daytime) ! Orange sun â Adjust the brightness for intermediate brightness (evening) ! Y ellow moon â Adjust the brightness for dark ambient light (nighttime) 2 T ouch or for DIMMER to adjust the brightness. Each time you touch or it moves cursor to - wards the lef t or the right. The level indicates the brightness of the screen being adjusted. The farther cursor moves to the right, the brighter the screen. 3 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Other Functions En 107 Section 21 Other Functions
Selecting the background display Y ou can display the thumbnails of available background pictures/movies and select one to set your background display. The selection can be made each for the audio source group (playing CD, listening to T uner , etc.), telephone source and the movie source group (watching DVD, AV , etc.). 1 Press ENTERT AINMENT. Thumbnails of background pictures/movies appear on the display . 2 T ouch one of the thumbnails that you want to display in the background. The selected picture/movie is displayed at the background. Note In the following cases, background images from that source cannot be selected: ! When there is no disc in the unit. ! When the A V (AV input) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 95). Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch Panel Calibration) If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch, adjust the response po- sitions of the touch panel. There are two ad- justment methods: 4-point adjustment, in which you touch four corners of the screen; and 16-point adjustment, in which you make fine-adjustments on the entire screen. ! Make sure to use the supplied pen for ad- justment, and gently touch the screen. If you press the touch panel forcefully , the touch panel may be damaged. Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen. Other wise the screen is damaged. 1 Press V .ADJUST to display PICTURE ADJUSTMENT. 2 Press and hold V .ADJUST. The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen ap- pears. 3 T ouch each of the arrows on the four corners of the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen. # T o cancel the adjustment, press and hold V .ADJUST . 4 Press V .ADJUST to complete the 4-point adjustment. The adjusted position data is saved. ! Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data. 5 Press V .ADJUST to proceed to the 16- point adjustment. The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen appears. # T o cancel the adjustment, press and hold V .ADJUST . 6 Gently touch the center of the mark displayed on the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen. After you touch all the marks, the adjusted po - sition data is saved. ! Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data. 7 Press and hold V .ADJUST to complete the adjustment. Note If touch panel adjustment cannot be per formed properly , consult your local Pioneer dealer . Other Functions En 108 Section 21
Using the AUX source This unit can control an auxiliar y equipment such as VCR or portable device (sold sepa- rately). When connected, auxiliar y equipment is automatically read in as AUX source and as- signed to AUX. About AUX connection method Y ou have two methods to connect auxiliar y equipment to this unit. Stereo mini pin plug cable When connecting auxiliar y equipment using a stereo mini plug cable % Insert the stereo mini plug into the mi- crophone/auxiliary input jack on this unit. F or more details, refer to the installation man- ual. IP-BUS-RCA interconnector When connecting auxiliar y equipment using an IP -BUS-RCA Inter connector (sold separately) % Use an IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separetely) to connect this unit to auxiliary equipment featuring RCA output. F or more details, refer to the IP -BUS-RCA Inter- connector owner âÂÂs manual. # Y ou can only make this type of connection if the auxiliar y equipment has RCA outputs. Selecting AUX as the source % T ouch the source icon and then touch AUX1/AUX2 to select AUX as the source. # If the auxiliar y setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. For more details, see Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 103. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. ! Each title can be up to 10 characters long. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source, touch A V MENU and FUNCTION and then touch NAME EDIT. 2 T ouch the letter you wish to input. F or details concerning operation, refer to Edit- ing the name of sound settings on page 92. Using the PGM button Y ou can operate the preprogrammed functions for each source by using PGM. % Press PGM to turn pause on when se- lecting the following sources: ! DVD â Built-in DVD player ! S-DVD â DVD player/multi-DVD player ! M-CD â Multi-CD player ! iPod â iP od ! BT AUDIO â Bluetooth Audio # T o turn pause off , press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to tur n BSM on when selecting FM or AM as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to tur n BSSM on when selecting TV as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. Other Functions En 109 Section 21 Other Functions
T roubleshooting Common Symptom Cause Action (See) P ower doesn âÂÂt turn on. The unit doesn âÂÂt operate. Leads and connectors are incor- rectly connected. Confirm once more that all connect ions are correct. The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then replace the fuse. Be ver y sure to install the correct fuse with the same rating. Noise and other factors are causing the built-in microprocessor to oper- ate incorrectly . P ress RESET . (P ag e 12) Operation with the remote con- trol isn âÂÂt possibl e. The unit does not operate cor- rectly even when the appropriate remote control buttons are pressed. The remote control operation mode is incorr ect. Switch to the correct remote control mode. (P age 19) The remote control code is incor- rect. Make sure the remote control selection switch setting and code type setting are the same. (P ag e 101) Batter y power is low . Load new batter y . ( P age 13) Some operations are prohibited with certain discs. Check by using another disc. Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty. Clean disc. (P age 114) The loaded disc is a type this unit cannot play . Check what type the disc is. Non compatible video system disc is loaded. Change to a disc compatible to your video system. No sounds are heard. The volume level will not rise. Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly. The unit is per form ing still, slow mo - tion or frame-by-frame playback . There is no sound during still, slow motion or frame-by-frame playback. The front, rear , lef t and rig ht speak- ers are not properly adjusted in level balance. Adjust the relative levels between the speak- ers correc tly . (Page 78) Sound is not heard over a speci- fic speake r . The speaker size is set to OFF . Make the correct size setting for the speaker . (P age 87) The speaker level is set too low . Increase the speaker level setting to get the balance right with the other speakers. (Page 90) The center speaker size is set to SMALL or LARGE whereas no cen- ter speaker is installed. Set the center speaker size to OFF . (P age 87) There is no picture. The parking brake cord is not con- nected. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The parking brake is not applied. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. Additional Information En 110 Appendix
Symptom Cause Action (See) The icon is displ ayed, and op- eration is not possible. The operation is prohibited for the disc. This operation is not possible. The operation is not compatible with the disc âÂÂs organization. This operation is not possible. The picture stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated. Reading of data has become impos- sible during playback. After pressing g once, start playback once more. There is no sound. V olume level is low . The volume level is low . Adjust the volume level. The attenuator is on. T urn the attenuator off . There is audio and video skip- ping. The unit is not firmly secured. Secure the unit firmly. The picture is stretched, the as- pect is incorrect. The aspect setting is incorrect for the display . Select the appropriat e settin g for your display. (P age 99) When the ignition switch is turned ON (or turned to ACC), the motor sounds. The unit is confirming whether a disc is loaded or not. This is a normal operation. Nothing is displayed. The touch panel keys cannot be used. The rear view camera is not con- nected. BACK UP CAMERA IN is at incor- rect setting. Connect a rear view camera. P ress V .ADJUST to return to the source dis- play and then select the correct setting for BACK UP CAMERA IN . (P age 95) Problems during DVD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re- gion number from this unit. Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. (P age 8, P age 126) A parental lock message is dis- played and playback is not pos- sible. P arental lock is on. T urn parental loc k off or change the level. (P age 100) P arental lock cannot be can- celed. The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number . (Page 100) Y ou have forgotten your code num- ber . P ress CLEAR 10 times to cancel the code number . (P age 101) Dialog language (and subtitle language) cannot be switched. The DVD playing does not feature multiple language recordings . Y ou cannot switch among multiple languages if they are not recorded on the disc. Y ou can only switch betwee n items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. No subtitles are displayed. The DVD playing does not feature subtitles. Subtitles are not displayed if they are not re- corded on the disc. Y ou can only switch betwee n items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. Playback is not with the audio language and subtitle language settings selected in DVD SETUP MENU . The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the language selected in DVD SETUP MENU. Switching to a selected language is not possi- ble if the language selected in DVD SETUP MENU is not recorded on the disc. Additional Information En 111 Appendix Additional Information
Symptom Cause Action (See) Switching the viewing angle is not possible. The DVD playing does not feature scenes shot from multiple angles. Y ou cannot switch betwee n multiple angles if the DVD does not feature scenes recorded from multiple angles. Y ou are tr ying to switch to multiple angle viewing of a scene that is not recorded from multiple angles. Switch between multiple angles when watch- ing scenes recorded from multiple angles. The picture is extremely unclear/ distorted and dark during play- back. The disc features a signal to prohibit copying. (Some discs may have this.) Since this unit is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect system, when play- ing a disc that has a signal prohibiting copy- ing, the picture may suffer from horizon tal stripes or other imper fections when viewed on some displays. This does not mean this unit is malfunctioning. Problems during Video CD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) The PBC (playback control) menu display cannot be called up. The Video CD playing does not fea- ture PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs not featuring PBC. Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. The Video CD playing features PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs featuring PBC. Error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Ser vice Center , be sure to record the error message. Message Cause Action (See) ERROR-02 Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Replace disc. ERROR-05 Electrical or mechanical P ress RESET . DIFFERENT REGION DISC (RE- GION ERR) The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct region number . NON PLA Y ABLE DISC (NO N- PLA Y) This type of disc cannot be played by this un it Replace the disc with one this unit can play. The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly. THERMAL PROTECTION IN MOTION (TEMP) The temperature of this unit is out - side the normal operating range W ait until the unit âÂÂs temperature returns to within normal operating limits. NO AUDIO The inserted disc does not contain any files that can be played back Replace disc. Additional Information En 112 Appendix
Message Cause Action (See) T rack Skipped The inserted disc contains WMA files that are protected by DRM Replace disc. PROTECT All the files on the inserted disc are secured by DRM Replace disc. Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto T A and EQ, an error message may appear on the display . If an error message appears, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. Af ter checking, tr y again. Message Cause Action Error check MIC Microph one is not connected. Plug the supplied microphone securely into the jack. Error check front SP , Error check FL SP , Error check FR SP , Error check center SP , Error check RL SP , Error check RR SP , Error check subwoofer The microphone cannot pick up the measuring tone of a speaker . ! Confirm that the speakers are connected correctly . ! Correct the input level setting of the power amp connected to the speakers. ! Set the mic rophone correctly . Error check noise The surrounding noise level is too high. ! Stop your car in a place that is as quiet as possible, and switch off the engine, air condi- tioner or heater . ! Set the mic rophone correctly . Additional Information En 113 Appendix Additional Information
DVD player and care ! Use only normal, round discs. If you insert irregular , non-round, shaped discs they may jam in the DVD player or not play prop- erly . ! Check all discs for cracks, scratches or warping before playing. Discs that have cracks, scratches or are warped may not play properly. Do not use such discs. ! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed) sur face when handling the disc. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che- micals to the sur face of the discs. ! T o clean a disc, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center . ! If the heater is used in cold weather , con- densation may form on components inside the DVD player . Condensation may cause the DVD player to not operate properly . If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the DVD player for an hour or so to allow it to dr y out and wipe any damp discs with a sof t cloth to remove the moisture. ! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback. DVD discs ! With some DVD video discs, it may not be possible to use certain functions. ! It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode). It is not possible to play back DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode). ! It may not be possible to play back DVD -R/ DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode), be- cause of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit. ! It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/ DVD-RAM discs. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD -R/CD-RW discs are used, play- back is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! It may not be possible to play back CD -R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re- corder or a personal computer because of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc., on the lens of this unit. Additional Information En 114 Appendix
! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) ! Playback of CD-R/CD -RW discs may be- come impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the sto - rage conditions in the vehicle. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD -R/CD-RW disc may not be dis- played by this unit (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)). ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD -RW discs before using them. Dual Discs ! Dual Discs are two -sided discs that have a recordable CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other . ! Playback of the DVD side is possible with this unit. However , since the CD side of Dual Discs is not physically compatible with the general CD standard, it may not be possible to play the CD side with this unit. ! F requent loading and ejecting of a Dual Disc may result in scratches on the disc. Serious scratches can lead to playback pro- blems on this unit. In some cases, a Dual Disc may become stuck in the disc loading slot and will not eject. T o prevent this, we recommend you refrain from using Dual Disc with this unit. ! Please refer to the information from the disc manufacturer for more detailed infor- mation about Dual Discs. MP3, WMA and AAC files ! MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard. ! WMA is short for Windows Media ⢠Audio and refers to an audio compression tech- nology that is developed by Microsoft Cor- poration. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . ! AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression tech- nology standard. ! This unit may not operate correctly depend- ing on the application used to encode WMA files. ! Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of WMA/AAC files encoded with image data. ! This unit allows playback of MP3/WMA/ AAC files on CD-R/R W/ROM and DVD -R/ RW/ROM discs. Disc recordings compati- ble with level 1 and level 2 of ISO9660 and with the Romeo and Joliet file system can be played back. ! It is possible to play back multi-session compatible recorded discs. ! MP3/WMA/AAC files are not compatible with packet write data transfer . ! The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a file name, including the extension (.mp3, .wma or .m4a), is 64, from the first character . ! The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a folder name is 64. ! In case of files recorded according to the Romeo file system, only the first 64 charac- ters can be displayed. Additional Information En 115 Appendix Additional Information
! The folder selection sequence for playback and other operations becomes the writing sequence used by the writing software. For this reason, the expected sequence at the time of playback may not coincide with the actual playback sequence. However , there also is some writing sof tware which per- mits setting of the playback order . ! Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge into one another without a pause. When these discs are converted to MP3/WMA/ AAC files and burned to a CD-R/RW/ROM or a DVD -R/RW/ROM, the files will be played back on this player with a short pause between each one, regardless of the length of the pause between tracks on the original audio CD. Important ! When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file, add the corresponding filename extension (.mp3, .wma or .m4a). ! This unit plays back files with the filename ex- tension (.mp3, .wma or .m4a) as an MP3/ WMA/AAC file. T o prevent noise and malfunc- tions, do not use these extensions for files other than MP3/WMA/AAC files. MP3 additional information ! Files are compatible with the ID3 T ag V er . 1.0, 1.1, 2.2 and 2.3 formats for display of album (disc title), track (track title), artist (track artist) and comments. V er . 2.x of ID3 T ag is given priority when both V er . 1.x and V er . 2.x exist. ! The emphasis function is valid only when MP3 files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequen- cies are played back. (16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz sampling frequencies can be played back.) ! There is no m3u playlist compatibility . ! There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3 interactive) or mp3 PRO formats. ! The sound quality of MP3 files generally be- comes better with an increased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality , we recommend using only discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps. WMA additional information ! This unit plays back WMA files encoded by Windows Media Player version 7, 7.1, 8, 9 and 10. ! Y ou can only play back WMA files in the fre- quencies 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. ! The sound quality of WMA files generally becomes better with an increased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 48 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR) or from 48 kbps to 384 kbps (VBR), but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality , we recommend using discs recorded with a higher bit rate. ! This unit doesn âÂÂt support the following for- mats. â Windows Media Audio 9 P rofessional (5.1ch) â Windows Media Audio 9 Lossless â Windows Media Audio 9 V oice AAC additional information ! This unit plays back AAC files encoded by iT unes î version 4.6 . ! This unit plays back AAC files in the sam- pling frequencies 11.025, 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. Additional Information En 116 Appendix
! The sound quality of AAC files generally be- comes better with an increased transmis- sion rate. This unit can play recordings with transmission rates from 16 kbps to 320 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality , we recommend using discs recorded with a higher trans- mission rate. ! This unit doesn âÂÂt support the following for- mats. â Apple Lossless About folders and MP3/ WMA/AAC files ! An outline of a disc with MP3/WMA/AAC files on it is shown below . Subfolders are shown as folders in the folder currently se- lected. 3 1 2 1 First level 2 Second level 3 Third level Notes ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user cannot assign folder numbers. ! It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3/WMA/AAC files. (These folders will be skipped without displaying the folder number .) ! MP3/WMA/AAC files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back. However , there is a delay in the start of playback on discs with numer- ous tiers. F or this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers. ! It is possible to play back up to 255 folders on one disc. JPEG picture files ! JPEG is short for Joint Photographic Ex- perts Group and refers to a still image com- pression technology standard. ! Files are compatible with Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.1 still image up to resolution of 8 192 à7 680. (EXIF format is used most commonly with digital still cameras.) ! EXIF format that processed by the personal computer may not be played back. ! There is no progressive JPEG compatibility . Important ! When naming a JPEG picture file, add the cor- responding filename extension (.jpg, .jpeg or .jpe). Additional Information En 117 Appendix Additional Information
! This unit plays back files with the filename ex- tension (.jpg, .jpeg or .jpe) as a JPEG picture file. T o prevent malfunctions, do not use these extensions for files other than JPEG picture files. DivX video files ! Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with standard playback of DivX î media files ! F or more details about DivX, visit the follow- ing site: http://www .divx.com/ Important ! When naming a DivX video file, add the corre- sponding filename extension (.avi or .divx). ! This unit plays back files with the filename ex- tension (.avi or .divx) as a DivX video file. T o prevent noise and malfunctions, do not use these extensions for files other than DivX video files. Using the display correctly CAUTION ! If liquid or foreign matter should get inside this unit, turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Do not use the unit in this condition because doing so may result in a fire, electric shock, or other failure. ! If you notice smoke, a strange noise or smell, or any other abnormal signs from the display , turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Using this unit in this condition may result in permanent da- mage to the system. ! Do not disassemble or modify this unit, as there are high-voltage components inside which may cause an electric shock. Be sure to consult your dealer or the nearest author- ized PIONEER Ser vice Station for internal in- spection, adjustments or repairs. Handling the display ! When the display is subjected to direct sun- light for a long period of time, it will be- come ver y hot resulting in possible damage to the LCD screen. When not using this unit, close the display and avoid exposing it to direct sunlight. ! The display should be used within the tem- perature ranges shown below . Storage temperature range: â 20 ðC to 80 ðC At temperatures higher or lower than the operating temperature range the display may not operate normally . ! The LCD screen of this unit is exposed in order to increase its visibility within the ve- hicle. Please do not press strongly on it as this may damage it. ! Do not place anything on the display when it is opened. Also, do not attempt to carr y out angle adjustment, or open/close the display by hand. Applying strong force to the display may damage it. ! Do not push the LCD screen with much force as this may scratch it. ! Be careful not to place anything between the display and the main body when the display is opening or closing. If an object gets between the display and main body , the display may stop working. Additional Information En 118 Appendix
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen ! If the display is near the vent of an air con- ditioner when it is opened, make sure that air from the air conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from the heater may damage the LCD screen, and cool air from the cool- er may cause moisture to form inside the display resulting in possible damage. Also, if the display is cooled down by the cooler , the screen may become dark, or the life span of the small fluorescent tube used in- side the display may be shortened. ! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots) may appear on the LCD screen. These are due to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do not indicate a problem with the display. ! At low temperature s, the LCD screen may be dark for a while after the power is turned on. ! The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is exposed to direct sunlight. ! When using a portable phone, keep the an- tenna of the portable phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. Keeping the display in good condition ! When removing dust from the screen or cleaning the display , first turn the system power off , then wipe with the supplied cloth . ! When wiping the screen, take care not to scratch the sur face. Do not use harsh or abrasive chemical cleaners. Small fluorescent tube ! A small fluorescent tube is used inside the display to illuminate the LCD screen. â The fluorescent tube should last for ap- proximately 10 000 hours, depending on operating conditions. (Using the display at low temperatures reduces the ser vice life of the fluorescent tube.) â When the fluorescent tube reaches the end of its useful life, the screen will be dark and the image will no longer be projected. If this happens, consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Additional Information En 119 Appendix Additional Information
Language code chart for DVD Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 P ashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721 F rench (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814 German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Romanian (ro), 1815 Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyar wanda (rw), 1823 Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 P ortuguese (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sangho (sg), 1907 Swedish (sv), 1922 Inu piak (ik), 0911 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911 Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Soma li (so), 1915 Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Albanian (sq), 1917 Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918 Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919 Aymara (ay), 0125 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 T amil (ta), 2001 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 T elugu (te), 2005 Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 T ajik (tg), 2007 Bislama (bi), 0209 Laothian (lo), 1215 Thai (th) , 2008 Bengali (bn), 0214 Lithuan ian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian (lv), 1222 T urkmen (tk), 2011 Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 T agalog (tl), 2012 Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014 Corsican (co), 0315 Macedo nian (mk), 1311 T onga (to), 2015 Czech (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 T urkish (tr), 2018 W elsh (cy), 0325 Mongoli an (mn ), 1 314 T songa (ts), 2019 Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 T atar (tt), 2020 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 T wi (tw), 2023 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Estonian (et), 0520 Maltese (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118 Basque (eu), 0521 Burme se (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126 P ersian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Finnish (fi) , 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 V olapük (vo), 2215 Fiji (fj), 06 10 Norwegian (no), 1415 Wolof (wo), 2315 F aroes e (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408 F risian (fy), 0625 Oromo (om), 1513 Y oruba (yo), 2515 Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu), 2621 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 P anjabi (pa), 1601 Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl), 1612 Additional Information En 120 Appendix
DSP adjustme nt value record sheet Please make a copy of sheet below as desired. Parametric equalizer setting ( P ARAMETRIC EQ ) (when selecting multi-channel mode only) Speaker unit BAND F requency Level Q.Fac FRONT LEFT LOW MID HIGH FRONT RIGHT LOW MID HIGH REAR LEFT LOW MID HIGH REAR RIGHT LOW MID HIGH FRONT CENTER LOW MID HIGH REAR CENTER LOW MID HIGH Graphic equalizer setting ( GRAPHIC EQ) (when selecting 2-channel mode only) Speaker unit 50 80 125 200 315 500 800 1.25k 2k 3.15k 5k 8k 12.5k LEFT RIGHT Speaker setting ( SPEAKER SETTING) Speaker unit F ront center F ront Rear Rear center Subwoofer Setting Cut-off frequency setting ( CUT OFF) Additional Information En 121 Appendix Additional Information
Speaker unit FREQUENCY SLOPE PHASE TWEETER LEFT â TWEETER RIGHT â FRONT LEFT LOW â HIGH â FRONT RIGHT LOW â HIGH â REAR LEFT â REAR RIGHT â CENTER â REAR CENTER â SUBWOOFER The following filters (speaker units) are availabl e on the network mode only . ! TWEETER LEF T ! TWEETER RIGHT ! LOW of the front speaker s Time alignment setting ( TIME ALIGNMENT) and speaker level setting ( SPEAKER LEVEL) Speaker unit TIME ALIGNMENT SPEAKER LEVEL T weeter left T weeter right F ront center F ront lef t F ront right Rear left Rear right Rear center Subwoofer T weeters are available on the network mode only . Additional Information En 122 Appendix
T erms AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4. Aspect ratio This is the width-to -height ratio of a TV screen. A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps (bits per second) units. The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. Bonus group An âÂÂextra â group on some DVD audio discs that requires a key number to access. Browsable pictures A feature of some DVD audio discs in which you can browse still pictures recorded on the disc while the audio is played back. Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book. With DVD video discs fea- turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search. DivX DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com- pressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files can also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks. Many DivX media files are available for down- load online, and you can create your own using your personal content and easy-to -use tools from DivX.com. DivX Certified DivX Certified products are officially tested by the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all versions of DivX video, including DivX 6. Certi- fied products qualif y for one of several DivX P rofiles that designate the type of video the product supports, from compact portable video to high-definition video. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system used in theaters. Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates six full-bandwidth out- put channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives three surround channels from the two in the original recording. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II can create five full-band- width output channels from two -channel sources. This new technology enables a dis- crete 5-channel playback with 2 front chan- nels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear channels. A music mode is also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. DTS This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a surround system delivering multi-channel audio from up to 6 independent channels. Additional Information En 123 Appendix Additional Information
DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio using a DTS 96/24 decoder . This format is also fully backward compatible with all existing decoders. This means that DVD players can play this sof tware using a conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder . DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel information already encoded into the source, as well as its ownpro- cessing to determine channel localization (with two channel sources, the âÂÂ.1 â subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver). T wo modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS Neo:6 with two chan- nel sources. DTS-ES DTS-ES is a decoder that is capable of decod- ing both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Ma- trix 6.1 encoded sources. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives âÂÂtrue â 6.1 channel sound, with a comple- tely separate (discrete) surround back chan- nel. DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed into the surround lef t/right channels. Both sources are also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder . Dynamic range control Dolby Digital has a function for compressing the difference between the loudest and softest sounds: Dynamic range control. This control ensures sounds with an increased dynamic range are heard clearly even at low volume le- vels. EXIF (Exchangeable image file) A file format developed by F uji Photo Film for digital still cameras. Digital cameras from var- ious manufacturers use this compressed file format which carries date, time and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data. Group A collection of tracks on a DVD audio disc. Equivalent to a DVD video title. ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded in- formation can include the track title, the ar- tist âÂÂs name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 T ag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted as to the num- ber of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the for- mat logic of CD -ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con- sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the â _â sign, with a file-extension of three charac- ters). Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (in- cluding the separation mark âÂÂ. â and a file ex- tension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. JPEG This stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group, and is an international still image com- pression standard. Additional Information En 124 Appendix
Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. Generally , DVDs are re- corded with higher sampling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide higher sound quality. m3u Playlists created using the â WINAMP â soft- ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan- dards Orga nization). MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a con- ventional disc. MPEG This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group, and is an international video image compression standard. Some DVDs feature di- gital audio compressed and recorded using this system. MS ADPCM This stands for Microsof t adaptive differential pulse code modulation, which is the signal re- cording system used for the multimedia sof t- ware of Microsof t Corporation. Multi-angle With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV . Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let- ting you choose your viewing angle as desired. Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog) Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi- ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc, letting you choose as desired. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that al- lows additional data to be recorded later . When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD -R or CD-RW , etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses- sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses- sions on one disc. Multi-subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re- corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as desired. Number of quantization bits The number of quantization bits is one factor in the overall sound quality; the higher the â bit-depthâ , the better the sound quality . How- ever , increasing the bit-depth also increases the amount of data and therefore storage space required. Packed PCM A lossless compression system that enables more PCM audio to be stored on a DVD audio disc than would other wise be possible. Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD -R , etc., at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. Parental lock Some DVD video discs with violent or adult-or- iented scenes feature parental lock which pre- vents children from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you set the unit âÂÂs parental lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these scenes will be skipped. Additional Information En 125 Appendix Additional Information
Playback control (PBC) This is a playback control signal recorded on Video CDs (V ersion 2.0). Using menu displays provided by Video CDs with PBC lets you enjoy playback of simple interactive software and software with search functions. Y ou can also enjoy viewing high- and standard-resolution still images. Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos- sible unless it features the same region num- ber as the DVD player . This unit âÂÂs region number is displayed on the bottom of the unit. Slideshow A feature of some DVD discs in which still pic- tures recorded on the disc cycle automatically while the audio is played back. Title DVD video discs have high data capacity , en- abling recording of multiple movies on a sin- gle disc. If , for example, one disc contains three separate movies, they are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func- tions. VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compres- sion, it is possible to achieve compression- priority sound quality. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media ⢠Audio and refers to an audio compression technol- ogy that is developed by Microsoft Corpora- tion. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra- demarks or registered trademarks of Microsof t Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Additional Information En 126 Appendix
Specifications General Rated powe r source ............... 14.4 V DC (allowable voltage range: 12.0 V to 14.4 V DC) Grounding system ................... Negative type Head unit: Max. current consumption ........................................... 3 . 7 A Dimensions (W àH àD): DIN Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 0 m m Nose ........................... 1 8 8 à5 8 à3 6 m m D Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 5 m m Nose ........................... 1 7 0 à4 6 à3 1 m m W eight ................................ 2 . 3 k g Hideaway unit: Max. current consumption ........................................... 21.5 A Dimensions (W àH àD) ........................................... 2 8 0 à3 7 à1 7 1 m m W eight ................................ 1 . 4 k g Display Screen size/aspect ratio ....... 7 inch wide/15:9 (effective display area: 152.4 à91.44 mm) P ixels ............................................. 1 1 5 2 0 0 0 (800 à480 à3) T y p e ................................................ T F T active matr ix, transmis- sive type Color system .............................. NTSC/P AL compat ible Storage temperature range ..................................................... â 20 ðC to 80 ðC Angle adjustment .................... 5 0 ð t o 110ð (initial settings: 90ð) Audio Maximum power output ....... 5 0 W à8 Continuous power output . . . 22 W à8 (50 Hz to 15 000 Hz, 5% THD, 4 W load, both channels driven) Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 W to 8 W allowable) P reout max output level/outpu t impedance ..................................................... 5 . 0 V à9/100 W Decoder ........................................ Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby EX, Dolby P ro Logic II, DTS, DTS-CD, DTS-ES (matrix, discrete), DTS 96/24, DTS Neo:6, AAC Sound setting P osition ........................................ Front left /F ront right/F ront/ All/Off P arametric equ alizer (multi-channel mode): Band .................................... 3 b a n d F requency .......................... 40/50/63/80/ 100/125/160/ 200/250/315/400/500/630/ 800/1k/1.25k/1.6k/2k/2.5k/ 3.15k/4k/5k/6.3k/8k/10k/ 12.5k Hz Q Fa c t o r .............................. 1.2/3.6 Gain ...................................... ñ12dB (2 dB/ste p) Graphic equalizer (2-channel mode): Band .................................... 1 3 band F requency .......................... 50/80/125 /200/315/500/800/ 1.25k/2k/3.15k/5k/8k/12.5k Hz Q Fa c t o r .............................. 5 . 0 Gain ...................................... ñ12dB (2 dB/ste p) Speaker setting: F ront ..................................... Large/Small F ront center ...................... Large/Small/Off Rear ...................................... Large/Small/Off Rear cen ter ....................... Large/Small/O ff Subwoofer ......................... On/Off Time alignme nt ........................ 0 c m t o 5 0 0 c m (2.5 cm/ step) Speaker level .............................. âÂÂ24 dB to 10 dB (1 dB/ step) Cut-off frequency F ront (L/R independe nt) (Standard mode): HPF : F requency ................ 50/63/80/100/1 25/160/200 Hz Slope .......................... âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12/ âÂÂ18 dB/oct Mute .................................... On/Off F ront (L/R independe nt) (Network mode): High HPF : F requency ................ 1.25/1.6/2 /2.5/3.15/4/5/6.3/8/ 10/12.5 kHz Slope .......................... âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12 dB/oct Low LPF : F requency ................ 1.25/1.6/2 /2.5/3.15/4/5/6.3/8/ 10/12.5 kHz Additional Information En 127 Appendix Additional Information
Slope .......................... 0 ( Pass)/ âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12 dB/oct Low HPF : F requency ................ 50/63/80/100/1 25/160/200 Hz Slope .......................... âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12/ âÂÂ18 dB/oct Mute .................................... On/Off F ront center: HPF : F requency ................ 50/63/80/100/1 25/160/200 Hz Slope .......................... âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12/ âÂÂ18 dB/oct Mute .................................... On/Off Rear (L/R independe nt): HPF : F requency ................ 50/63/80/100/1 25/160/200 Hz Slope .......................... âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12/ âÂÂ18 dB/oct Mute .................................... On/Off Rear cen ter: HPF : F requency ................ 50/63/80/100/1 25/160/200 Hz Slope .......................... âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12/ âÂÂ18 dB/oct Mute .................................... On/Off Subwoofer: LPF : F requency ................ 50/63/80/100/1 25/160/200 Hz Slope .......................... 0 ( Pass)/ âÂÂ6/ âÂÂ12/ âÂÂ18 dB/oct Phase ........................ Normal/Reverse Mute .................................... On/Off DVD Player System .......................................... D V D audio, DVD video, Video CD, CD, MP3 , WMA, AAC, DivX, JPEG system Usable discs .............................. D V D audio, DVD video, Video CD, dtsCD, CD, CD-R/ RW , DVD -R/RW Region number: for Sou theast Asian models ........................................... 3 for Sou th American and Oceanian model s ........................................... 4 for Midd le East Asian and South African models ........................................... 2 Signal format: Sampling frequency ..... 16/22.05/24/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 kHz Number of quantization bits ........................................... 16/20/24; linear F requency respo nse ............... 5 H z t o 9 6 0 0 0 H z (with DVD, at sampling frequency 192 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 1 0 2 d B ( 1 k H z ) (IEC -A net- work) (CD: 102 dB (1 kHz) (IEC -A network)) Dynamic range ......................... 1 0 0 d B ( 1 k H z ) (CD: 98 dB (1 kHz)) Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz) Output level: Video .................................... 1 . 0 Vp-p/75 W (ñ0.2 V) Audio ................................... 1 . 1 V ( 1 k H z , 0 d B ) Number of channels .............. 2 ( s t ereo), Digita l 6 ch MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ......... V e r . 7 , 7.1, 8, 9, 10 (2ch audio) (Windows Me dia Playe r) AAC decoding format ............ i Tunes î V er . 4.6 FM tuner F requency ran ge ...................... 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz Usable sensitivity ..................... 8 d B f (0.7 õV/75 W , mono, S/N: 30 dB) 50 dB quieting sensitivity ..... 1 0 d B f (0.9 õV/75 W , mono) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 7 5 d B (IEC -A network) Distortion ..................................... 0 . 3 % ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 kHz, stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dBf , 1 kHz, mono) F requency respo nse ............... 3 0 H z t o 1 5 0 0 0 H z ( ñ 3 d B ) Stereo separation .................... 4 5 d B ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 kHz) Selectivity .................................... 8 0 d B (ñ200 kHz) AM tuner F requency ran ge ...................... 5 3 1 k H z t o 1 6 0 2 k H z ( 9 kHz) 530 kHz to 1 640 kHz (10 kHz) Usable sensitivity ..................... 1 8 õ V (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 6 5 d B (IEC -A network) Infrared remote control W avelength ................................. 9 4 5 n m Output ........................................... typ; 10 mw/sr per Infrared LED Note Specifications and the design are subject to pos- sible modifications without notice due to im- provements. Additional Information En 128 Appendix
A Angle icon ................................................. . 34, .99 Aspect ratio ............................................ .99, .123 Audio language .................................. .34, .48, .98 B Bonus group ................................................. .123 Bookmark ........................................................ .33 Brightness ..................................................... .106 Browsable pictures ...................................... .123 C Chapter .......................................................... .123 Code number ................................................ .100 Color .............................................................. .106 Contrast ......................................................... .106 D DivX ................................................................ .123 DivX Certified ................................................ .123 Dolby Digital ................................................. .123 Dolby Digital EX ..................................... .10, .123 Dolby P ro Logic II ........................................ .123 DTS ................................................................ .123 DTS 96/24 ...................................................... .124 DTS Neo:6 ..................................................... .124 DTS-ES ..................................................... .10, .124 Dynamic range control ............................... .124 E EXIF ................................................................ .124 G Group ............................................................. .124 H Hue ................................................................ .106 J JPEG .............................................................. .124 L Language code chart .................................. .120 Linear PCM (LPCM) ..................................... .125 M Menu language .............................................. .99 MPEG ............................................................. .125 Multi-angle .............................................. .34, .125 Multi-audio ............................. ........... .34, .48, .125 Multi-subtitle .......................... ........... .34, .48, .125 P P acked PCM .......................... ....................... .125 P arental lock ......................................... .100, .125 PBC (playback control) ................................. .37 Playback control (PBC) ............................... .126 R Region number ........................................ . 8, .126 S Slideshow ...................................................... .126 Subtitle language ............................... .34, .48, .98 T Title ................................................................ .126 TV aspect ......................................................... .99 V Video CD ........................................................... .8 W Wide screen mode ....................................... .106 Index En 129
En 130
En 131
PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU , T OKY O 153-8654, JAP AN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U .S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-755 5 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY . L TD. 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkwa y , Mar kham, Ontar io L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-2 83-5901 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V . Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-427 0 å  é è¡ 份 æ éÂÂå ¬ å¸ 總 å ¬ å¸ : å°å 帠丠山å 路 亠段 44 èÂÂ13 樠é» 話 : (02) 2521-3588 å  é é» å ＠馠港＠æÂÂéÂÂå ¬ å¸ 馠港 ä¹ é¾ å° æ² å 海港 å 丠ç å æ¥Â丠忠9 æ¨Â901-6 室 é» 話 : (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Corporat ion. Copyright é 2006 by Pioneer Cor poration. All r ights reser ved. Printed in Japan <CRB2234-A> RD , RI,RC <KMMZX> <06E00000>